Star Wards - Welcome Home Earthman by Richard T. Miller

‘The information in this book will upset many of the traditional concepts about humanity and what has been happening on and to Planet Earth. Here are startling re: not been able to get it ons why human technology has ‘all together." Hunanity's knowledge of the Cosmos is sparse, at best, and scientists and astronomers are constantly up- dating and revising their theories and knowledge con~ cerning the origin, evolution and functionings of the physical universe and the prospects of intelligent life existing on other worlds. Now, evidence is being gathered by various ecien- tists, geologists and researchers that indicates that Mother Earth is experiencing sone startling changes. Life, as we now know and experience it, may change drastically in the next few years. A decade from now, the earth and all life present on it may be experiencing a totally different state of reality. ‘The present state or uneasiness, dissatisfaction and worldy frustrations and problems seems to indicate that human progress has been less than brilliant in many respects. Perhaps, out there, resident in the starry vaults of the heavens there are others ~~ others who could help us. Do we dare ignore the possibility? I wonder.STAR WARDS Welcome Home Earthman complies ao Edited rune 1. Miller Published By The Solar Cross Foundation PrOrBoxltr Gempbett-Catrforna 25608 SOLAR CROSS P, 0. Box 1129 ‘Middletown, CA 95461Copyright© 1979 by Richard T. Miller & The Solar Cross Foundation All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic of mechanical, including photo- copy. recording, or any informational storage or retrieval system, without permission in writing from The Solar Cross Foundation. First Edition—This Limited Collector's Edition, individually numbered, published by The Solar Cross Foundation, December 1979. Published and printed in the United States of America Original artwork and cover design by Larry Chase.DEDICATION ‘This book is dedicated to any and all of Planet Earth who have gazed into the evening skies and felt a sense of wonderment as they viewed the splendor and majesty of the Heavens, AND to all of those who have sought after, studied and worked toward advancing the growth of avareness for all or any of those resident on earth, AND ESPECIALLY for all of you, on earth, who ever experienced a touch of longing and perhaps, homésickness, as you looked and then reached out towards your heavenly homes among the stars.ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I wish to express my gratitude to everyone involved in any and all aspects of preparing this book for publication. The list of those who have participated in thie effort, both human and extraterrestrial, is too Lengthy for us to name them all individually, as more than fifty people have been involved. However, without their help, dedication and effort, and the thousands of hours devoted to this project, since the year 1955, this work could not have been completed. The Eruits of their efforts are now, however, before them and in that fact they can all derive great satisfaction and ¢ sense of accomplishment. In closing, t should mention that this has been a volunteer effort from the very beginning and this resultant book is the product of their "Light" and Love. Blessings in the "Light" of the Radiant One, to each and every one of you. Richard T, MillerINTRODUCTION “our great hope for your peoples is your re-discovery of the worlds of the mind. For all your current sorrows result from your neglect of this faculty. Down through the ages on your planet, men have ruth lessly destroyed the knowledge of the past. Often, they obliterated those records of human thought by which life can be intelligently directed. What was knowledge - truth, beauty, love and idealism of thought - to such men a these, who desired co control an infinitesimal spot in the Gosmas for a minute fragment of time? Merely to satisfy some personal whim or urge to uproot the universe, though knowing vell that in a few short years they would leave it all as an old cause beckoning for a new conten- tion. Competition - conflict and war, the essence of irra~ tionality - still lives in the hearts of men and women on your planet. Lt cannot depart until your love affair with the irrational is ended. Now, from the Stars come men and women, schooled in the use of the mind, to help you learn the techniques and dimensions of your minds, so that you can emerge to build and nourish a great new age." Excerpt from the Preface to the Tensor Concepts "qhe information will stand on its own merit." Kadar Mon-Ka - Saturn Tribunal You are about to experience the transcripts of one of the most unusval, awe-inepizing dialogues of our time; a dialogue which began over twentynfive years ago and is being published for the first time. For as many years as it has taken to compile the information in this book, we have been witness to every conceivable (and inconceivable) char- acterization of the UFO phenomenon. Despite the preponderance of evidence to the contrary, our government is still advocating the ‘marsh gas syn- drone’ and it is highly unlikely that ehis attitude will change, for rea~ sons which are too complex and too numerous to explain, Of course the mass media must share this responsibility because they have been operat~ ing in a similar vacuum for as many yea What is at issue here is not so much the government's attempts to conceal its previous blunders and coverups in dealing with the UFO enigna; rather it is the use of its huge propaganda machine to perpetuate such delusions, thus tampering with a timetable of events for which the count= down has already begun. In his book, "UFOLOGY," James M. McCampbell sums up the situation: “yhe full magnitude of the UFO phenomenon is not commonly realized. A casual observer may have noted a dozen or 80II INTRODUCTION newspaper accounts in about a9 many years. He may have accidentally seen a few magazine articles sandwiched between sensational treatments of hunting polar bears and searching for treasure in the steaming Amazon. He may know of a few books on the subject, but not read them. Newspaper comments on the Condon Report (also unread) have assured him that there was nothing of special interest in the subject. Tt may be somewhat shocking for him to learn that the average number of reported sightings since 1947 is greater than 200 per year. Over 1,000 sightings were reported in 1967. As these figures apply only to the United States and UFO's are a global problem, the number of sighting reports is substantial. The total is not knovn, but there is every indication that it is on the order of 500,000 or larger." The intent of this book is to try to set the record straight on a number of issues concerning the history of this planet, earth, and its status with regard to its Solar Systen neighbors. The information is expected to provide a clearer understanding of how this planet and its native inhabitants evolved. It is hoped that, armed with this new knowledge and awareness of the past, humans may begin to put their present world situations into proper perspective and thus prepare for a nunber of cosmic changes destined to ‘transform every atom’ of matter on this planet. These changes are inevitable. Each of us will prepare for this transition according to his own level of avareness. Some will neither accept the idea or even give it a passing thought. So be it. here did all this information cone from and why is it only now being published? The ‘information’ as we, who have been preparing it for publication, have fondly come to know it, is much more than the term implies. In earth terms, it can best be described as the end product of a commitment which was initiated over twenty five years ago, This commitment vas in the form of a gentlemen's agreement, wherein Space Intelligences of various disciplines, science, medicine, philosophy, ete., vould establish a curriculum of educational treatises in the form of telepathic communi cations which in turn would be compiled and stored by the earth recipient for dissemination at a tine to be determined by the space beings. The reader will note that I slipped over the method of communication casually and the reason is simple: the average man or woman on the street, for whom the book is published, still thinks of telepathy as one of the mystical arts. Russian researchers have developed this art of communics: tion far beyond the amateur meanderings of the western world. This country's exploration of the field has been Limited to ESP (Extrasensory Per- ception), Telepathy, a5 a form of Long Aange communication, has in the Past found its practitioners in the realm of the occult. In the advanced civilizations with which we are dealing, telepathy, direct mind-to~mind contact is the notma£ form of communication. In order for advanced races to receive any radio communications from this planet, they would have to build a special receiver and this would be comparable to our scientists building @ jungle drum in order to communicate with some of the more primitive peoples in the remote regions of this planet. When our scientists ean accept this fact, they (and the governnent) will realize the fallacy Of pouring 44 million dollars into a twenty year search for a method of communicating with extraterrestrials.INTRODUCTION 11 ‘Telepathy, in the form that was utilized to receive the information in this book, is described on Pages 252 and 276 and there's no need to dwell on it here. Suffice to say that it works. As for the release schedule, no self-respecting writer ever published aback, one chapter at atime. In a more realistic sense, there has not been an overvhelming public demand for this information, Of course, it was not generally known, until now, that this compendium of information was available. Ie would scem that our space friends have chosen an opportune time for the publication of this book, Before taking on the assignment to write this introduction, I did a little personal research to ‘test the water.’ What kind of selling points could I use to convince people of the uniqueness of this material? I visited a lot of book shops and talked to a lot of people, often playing ‘devil's advecate’ just to get a reaction. I was pleased to discover a quiet revolution in the general attitude toward the UFO mistique. UFO's and information dealing with UFO phenomena have now been given the same degree of public acceptance as other world events. It has nothing to do with belief or disbelief; but in terms of news interest, it rates with such other world conflicts as the Middle East problem, OPEC, the energy crisis and inflation. 'In- difference’ is the vord that comes to mind. "All I know is what I read dn the papers," or "E can't do anything about it, so why be concerned about it Our government continues to play the role of ‘protector! even though it won't say what it is protecting the people from. Prestigious writers and prominent scientists are still reaping the royalties of opposing ‘opinions, in print and on the talk shows. Public opinion surveys continue to show an increase in the percentage ‘of people believing in the existence of UFO's; but it's a good bet that ‘a lesser percentage of that sane group can accept the idea that UFO's are controlled by intelligent extraterrestrials. The intent of this book therefore, is to correct some of the more prevalent misconceptions. Although it is not intended to create contro- versy, the information in this book will undoubtedly upset many long- standing theories which, for lack of physical evidence, have never been proved or disproved. Astronomers will no doubt take exception to much Of the information in Chapter One. Those who question the reality of extraterrestrial spaceships and the existence of the advanced civilizations that they represent should read those sections entitled "Zo Men of Earth" (Page 3), "Mars, the Red Planet" (Page 8), "A Solar Tour" (Page 30), "Space, Time and Reality" (Page 67) and "Confederation Spacecraft in Our Skies" (Page 69). ‘The real story of Atlantis and Lemuria is adequately covered in those sections entitled "Earthman Come Hone" (Page 1), "The Guardianship of Earth" (Page 75), "The Great Heritage of Earth" (Page 81) and "The AtLen— tean Time Capeules" (Page 240). ‘Tneologians, philosophers and divinity students who ponder the future of mankind while trying to define the diverse elements of conbativeness in the life forms that inhabit this planet will find some salvation and comfort by reading the chapters on "Earthman Come Home" (Page 1), "the Profile of MAN" (Page 35), "Life and Death” (Page 73), "Universal Vibra~>Re Le. oe Iv INTRODUCTION tion" (Bage 78), "The Chanber of Creation" (Page 134), "Earth Changes (Page 269), and "Remember Earth" (Page 295). What is the present status of earth's technology? Laymen and scientists may be interested in learning why the ultimate truth is always just a Little beyond their reach. This country has spent billions of dollars on space exploration. One wonders if all of those funds could have been assigned to some more appropriate service to mankind if the people responsible would have had access to the information herein. One can only wonder. A personal note: The subject matter in this book will take sone ‘getting use to’ ag the saying goes. My first introduction, to this entire concept of telepathic communication between a human being on earth and an extraterrestrial being somewhere out in space, was at a lecture at De Anza College in Cupertino, California. The speaker was Richard Miller and that was his subject. He spoke to an audience of over 200 people. He was not a spellbinder in any sense of the word, but as I searched that audience for some signs of boredom (people dozing off) I found none. His lecture inspired more questions than there was time to answer but he did not renege on any question, no matter how pertinent or impertinent and I knew that that audience had gotten its money's worth. Tt wasn't until two busy radio talk show appearances and another De ‘Anza lecture that I had an opportunity to meet Richard Miller personally. During a very brief chat, he suggested that I attend an orientation class for an organization called the Solar Cross Foundation. That meeting took place almost two years ago. During those early months of my association with the Solar Ctoss, there was a time vhen I would have to measure my personal commitment to an organization and a task that I knew so little about. I needed to learn more about this man, Richard Miller. I searched for flews in the opera~ tion and in the man, If I had any intention of backing out of this effort, that would have been the time. I performed what is known in the industry as a "feasibility study." I asked a lot of loaded questions and I reviewed the information file. The information 'tracked' and the more involved I got with the information, the greater my respect for this man and his total dedication. Today, I an proud to know Richard as a trusted and sincere friend. He is everything that he stands for. Knowing Richard and knowing the Solar Cross has made me confident that there will indeed be A REUNION. William R. Buhler Fremont, California 1979TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION PROLOGUE “THE STORY OF RICHARD MILLER" - = - CHAPTER ONE - - - “EARTHMAN COME HOME" The origin of life on earth -- the degeneration of early man and its results —- civilizations of Atian- tis and Lemuria == war between Atlantis and Lemuria. "TO MEN OF EARTH" Why space people visit earth —- the Universal Confed- eration -- space people have friendly intentions toward earth -- when the space people will land. “MON-KA AND MERKU SPEAK" space people have contacted world leaders -~ the government has spacecraft in its possession, "MARS, THE RED PLANET" Communication center KOR -~ Martian civilizations. “MALDEK - THE LOST PLANE: The number of planets in our so! planet of Maldek had a great civilization -- the destruction of Maldek ~~ will earth also suffer Maldek's fate? "SOLAR GOVERNMENT" Solar Tribunals -- Galactic Pax regulations on planetary intervention -~ the Chronomonitors. “STATION KOR - MARS" (A Question and Answer Exchange) ‘The communications center on Mers -- galactic com munications == survey craft, record thought impres- fons of earth people —- a policy of communicating with earth people is initiated. “yptHoDS OP INTERPLANETARY COMMUNICATION" (A Question and Answer Exchange) Methods of communication -- the Tensor Beam =~ the mechanical Vocalator converts thoughts to words detecting and locating telepaths. PAGE aL 13 1s 18Pa a TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE “TENSOR INFORMATION AND DEFINITIONS" 20 (A Question and Answer Exchange) Tensor defined -- induction between the telepathic receiver and the knowledge being passed =~ the Cortex and Thalamus "A QUESTION AND ANSWER EXCHANGE" 22 Space people examine Russian Sputnik -~ Sputnik : battery lasts longer than expected. = = = CHAPTER TWO - - - “PRELUDE TO TENSOR EQUATIONS" 24 Principles of Tensor Equations ~~ Tensor Equation number one -- the Tensor method of relaxation -- the Thalanatic Cortical Pause. "THE EARLY U.S. SPAGE PROGRAM, ATOMIC TESTS AND THEIR a7 UNKNOWN CONSEQUENCES" Soltec's spacecraft examines a missle ~~ missle launching causes rift in ionosphere and influx of harmful radiation -- detonation of device by Russia causes shift in magnetic North Pole. ‘ATOM AND HIS: PLANET" 28 Description of a building on the planet Hatonn -~ the sphere, a source of knowledge —- a comforting thought for the tines of trouble. “a SOLAR TOUR" 30 The underground civilization of Mars ~~ Jupiter, hone of an ancient civilization -- Saturn, the law guardian -- Pluto used as a trade center. "PROFILE OF MAN" 35 The original thought form -- the similarity of MAN throughout the universes == MAN has a cosmic des~ tiny —- future MAN. "ADVICE TO REPRESENTATIVES OF THE "LIGHT" 36 Suggestions to the people working with the space people -- the space people initiate subconscious conditioning -- predictions of troubled times and chaos. "A TENSOR EQUATION"TABLE OF CONTENTS "A MISSILE FAILURE AND THE LORDS OF THE PLANETS" Vanguard missile to fail, says Sutko -- Planetary Lords who recently descended to earth -- the order of eveation -- the qualities of love. “LOVE - SOME COMMENTS ON THE SUBJECT" Love has different qualities at various vibratory levels -- MAN volunteers to incarnate on earth groups incarnate together -- many on earth have kin among the stars. "THE SUBJECT OF CONSCIOUSNESS" The human body can last forever thoughts are blueprints. Consciousness ~- - - - CHAPTER THREE - - - "OOUNCIL ACTIONS REGARDING EARTH" MAN's penetration into the United States government and the United Nations == power generating stations reactivated ~~ visitors from Vega and Procyon. "A GALACTIC TOUR" ‘The people of Aldebaran built the Pyramids ~~ the beauty of Aldebaran at nighttime -- Procyon's force fields make theix planet invisible -- 2 magnificent civilization. “THE GREAT PYRAMID" When the Great Pyramid was built -- who built it —— hhow the Great Pyramid was built -- the purpose of the generators in the Pyramid. "SPACECRAFT NUMBER ONE" ‘Types of spacecraft -- star-shaped spacecraft (the Star of Bethlehem) -- the cities of Shen, evacuation spacecraft. "SPACECRAFT NUMBER TWO" (a Question and Answer Exchange) The forcefield surrounding spacecraft -- changing atomic polarity - space people will protect our astronauts under certain conditions = the danger ef creating a hole in the ionosphere. "COMMENTS REGARDING EARTH'S SATELLITE AND SPACE PROGRAM" ‘Tne missing Explorer -- temperature predicted to rise after nuclear testing. 39 40 46 50 52 58 60 62 64Neen en TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE "q COMMUNICATION FROM ASHTAR" 66 a prediction concerning Tensor Equation training ~~ What the space brothers do not do. “SPACE, TIME AND REALITY" 67 ‘the essence of Being is everywhere -- the creation Of matter -- traveling in forms of light -~ Androm Gas, the administrative headquarters of a neighbor— ing galaxy. “CONFEDERATION SPACECRAFT IN OUR SKIES" 6 The Confederation allows some visible flights to ake the people of earth awaze of their presence -~ ‘The military patrols skies after UFO phenomena Soltec promises that Confederation spacecraft wi not harm our military aircraft. 4g DISCUSSION OF VARIOUS TOPICS” 70 Let your "Light" shine -- screening techniques applied te these ho wish to join the group ~~ the selection of music for the "Galaxy" Radio Programs. = = = CHAPTER FOUR - - ~ FE AND DEATH" 73 ‘A commentary on evolution -- MAN's natural habitat The Love of The Radiant One -~ the creation of the Lords. ‘HE CUARDLANSHIP OF EARTH" 5 outside alien forces led to war between Atlantis and Temuria -- migration after the Atlantean-Lenurian conflict —- Space people to prohibit negative aliens from again interfering with earth's evolution Earth must evolve with the other planets. “UNIVERSAL VIBRATION" 78 Planes of thought -- time -- matter -- materialization of a mighty being -- The Lord Of The Earth. “HE GREAT HERITAGE OF EARTH” 81 yon-Ka's advice concerning the pending "Galaxy" Radio Talks ~~ Similarity transfer ..Teleportation —~ The journey to Tealus (an Atlantean time vault) - earth ‘and ite heritage and destiny. ELEPORTATION AND LEVLTATION" 8h The meaning of similarity transfer -- Teleportation through the technique of similarity transfer -- Will —— OO - <<.TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE power not involved in levitation == the higher self, the MIND and the power of the "Light." "THE GREEN EMERALD" (Introduction to the Tape) 36 Other beings on different planes ~~ The talks are monitored =~ Actions of the group usually observed. "THE GREEN EMERALD" 87 Earth received Divine energies -- A disaster occurs -- ‘Space people in important positions -- Ivo possible futures for earth. "A MEETING OF THE SATURN TRIBUNAL" 90 The deviation in the earth's rotational axis -- a "sneak" atomic attack is averted ~~ Chronomonitors decide to let one missile detonate at its launch site -- Events on earth to bring greater good ~~ Great ones visited earth. "EN THE MOUNTAINS" 94 Movement to a location directed == the group was at the Jocation 11,000 years ago -- the "Light" will spread ~~ MAN's purpose. "ELEMENTARY MAGNETICS" 0 The atom analyzed -- The three forces permeating all matter -- The second dimensional clue. - - - CHAPTER FIVE - - - "HATONN'S FIRST PARABLE” 9 Examining a pebble -- Not all are seekers ~~ Power over the pebble. "WORLD CONDITIONS" 100 People striving toward liberation - The Confeder: tion's motives -- The unveiling of self and mission. “ADVICE CONCERNING THE MISSION" 103 ‘The group did not meet by chance ~~ Many lifetimes in training for the mission. "CONCERNING THE RADIO TALKS" 105 ‘The major effort to enlighten the people -- Informe- tion which would endanger mission is withheld -- Forces in universe operate intelligently. :ee TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE “gauaxy - AN INTRODUCTION" 107 (The First of the "Galaxy" Radio Series) The type of Life thought to exist on other planets —- How would we react if we encountered life on other planets ~~ The vast number of UFO sightings. "COMMENTS ON THE RADIO TALKS" nie The "Galaxy" Radio Programs spread a special influence. ‘“tgaronN'S SECOND PARABLE" un Curiosity -- A hazardous path ~~ The unenlightened "A DANGEROUS TIME PERTOD" nz ‘The group is placed on stand-by notice -- Three things which ean occur to earth -~ The flexibility of destiny. "pIME, SPACE AND THE GREATION OF MATTE! 14 How matter is created -- How Planets and Suns are formed -- Parallel fields of probability ~~ Tele portation, or is it space travel, or both? "DESCUSSION WITH A SPACE DOCTOR” 119 Disease creates an electro-chemical unbalance Coonic radiation affects a cell's electrons — Aging as an electro-chemical reaction =~ Destructive and benevolent forms of radiation. = = = CHAPTER SIX - - - "A PROBABILITY LEGEND" 126, The Keonotron is used to project into a possible future ~~ The future of a little known planet —— Evidence ef a past civilization, perhaps barbaric —- The literature of the civilization contains noble words. "A QUESTION AND ANSWER EXCHANGE" 129 Frequency disturbances affect cerebro~spinal fluid -— in the past, earth contributed outstanding gifts to other civilized vorlds =~ The Great Plan cannot be Slowed -- A mission to perforn. "THE CHAMBER OF CREATION" 134 ‘The Chamber of Creation and The Lords Of "Light" -— Lord Eéu watehes the splendor of earth ~~ Lord Esu spealTABLE OF CONTENTS “EXPLORATION OF THE UNIVERS What it will mean to earth to be a part of the Con~ federation =~ An educational process must be under~ gone before earth is ready for confederation status ~~ The inmensity of the Universe. "ADVICE 10 THE CROUP" A disembarking location == A force transmitted to the group while they sleep -- The Radio Series. "THE GALACTIC SURVEY AND PHILOSOPHY" Specialists aboard Galactic Survey spacecraft -- The function of the Planetary Guardians -- Multivalued physics of reality. "THE ‘TRIBUNAL MEETING" An alliance between the United States and Russia to create tension -- Space representatives on earth - Soltee requests the use of Chronomonitors to neu tralize nuclear devices -- The Confederation's greatest challenge. "THE GALACTIC SURVEY REPORTS - PART-1' Period following destruction of Atlantis and Lemuria -- The 17th and 18th century in North America ~~ The American political systen -~ Mexico and South Amer ica. “THE GALACTIC SURVEY REPORTS - PART-2"" 20th century, England and France ~~ Russia -- Japan -~ China "THE MATTER OF MISSION RESPONSIBILITY" "A SHORT-WAVE RADIO MESSAGE CONCERNING THE ACTIVITIES OF THE SPACE PEOPLE" A promise of a future communication by Light Beam and Short-Wave Radio equipment The space people request thet oll the military intelligence agencies monitor the communication -- They request that the news media be alerted. “a MESSAGE FROM THE SPACE PEOPLE TO THE PEOPLE OF EARTH, WIA MODULATED LIGHT BEAM & SHORT-WAVE RADIO" Past communications from The Confederation -- A mes~ sage to representatives of the space people among humanity -- The Confederation has protected the earth ~~ Future reunion. PAGE 135 138 140 142 148, 160 172 174 175TABLE OF CONTENTS - > - CHAPTER SEVEN = = ~ "SpITOR"s COMMENTS" Explaining the end of the first phase of communica~ tions -- The communications pause and the start of the correlation effort -- The new information of "phase two" and its import. “THE HALLS OF GRANDEUR" What The Halls Of Grandeur are ~~ Space people will not function as Saviors of the Planet Barth -- A special affinity for eaxth -- Know who you are, and what you represent. "SEMANTICS AND THOUGHT - NUMBER ONE” Tensor Equations -- Who can change the conditions of earth ~- The Confederation will assist if asked -- ‘The destiny of MAN. "THE DISCOVERY" Attempts to unravel a cosmic mystery -- The harmful radiation from the Sun -~ Radiation alters behavioral patterns -- MAN shields earth from the harmful Sun radiation “EFFECTS AND COMING CHANGES NUMBER ONE" (From 1970 te the Year 2000) Increased violence predicted for the Unites States -- Police state to emerge == Ecological imbalance and food shortages foreseen -- Tensor-oriented MAN will have stabilizing effect on other people. ERSPECTIVE - A MESSAGE FROM THE SPIRITUAL HETRARCHY" Noble ones of "Light" have been on earth == A new world is being prepared -- The earth will be trans~ formed -- MAN will help men grow. represents the earth at the Solar Tribunal -~ MAN will make his knowledge available to the Planet Earth -- MAN will assist humans to become MAN -- The rewards of becoming MAN. "A CODE OF CONDUCT FOR SOLAR CROSS” MAN monitors thoughts conduct themselves well. Solar Cross menbers must “THE PRESENTATION OF THE TENSOR CONCEPTS" Formal training in the Tensor Concepts ~~ Tensor PAGE v7 178 181. 185, 188 192 19% 196 198TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE concepts will alter a person's life -- Tensor Con~ cepts cannot be used to harm another person == MAN's longing for reunion with men. "RESULTS OF TENSOR-ORIENTED PHILOSOPHIES" 201 Lige forms lower than human have been taught tele~ portation -~ Moving objects by HIND power -~ Tele pathy, s universal characteristic of MAN -~ The pr mary objective of all life forms. "KORTON'S ADVICE TO SOLAR CROSS MEMBERS" 205 Delegation of authority ~~ Being careful about who represents Solar Cross -- The importance of Solar Cross work =- A reference to previous lives and mis~ - - = CHAPTER EIGHT - - - “YON-KA'S PERSONAL TALK TO SOLAR CROSS" 209 MAN monitors thoughts -~ A reference to previous lives =~ Failure would not be a disaster -- The tapes carry a special emanation of a magnetic char~ acter. “EVENTS PREDICTED PRIOR 10 THE NEW WORLD" 22 Every atom will be transformed -- A new ecology will emerge -- A new world in preparation -~ Space people will not interfere with earth's destiny. “TNE SATURN TRIBUNAL"! 27 Fear that the original colony on earth would be wiped out -- Earthen are mot the same as the or! ginal colonists -- A five billion year riddle Mon-Ka'e plea to The Confederation for assistance to the earth. “PREFACE TO THE TENSOR CONCEPTS" 223 Mind versus body = A mis-guided new order of think- ers -- What the space people offer to people of earth -- A fraternity of thought. “REUNION WITH MAN" 230 ‘The innermost desire of the space people = A hand of friendship 4s from The Confederation -- The search for the "Light" in all humanity -- When the great reunion will occur. “coe” 233 Tangential time -- A displacement in time.aaa ee eee es se NM Ta oa. cat EE She ea a an ee TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE “THE 'LIGHT' OF THE RADIANT ONE" (A Tensor Concept) 235 The "Light," the most powerful emanation -- using the "Eight" to guide your thinking =~ the "Light" always functions correctly -- A need to employ the "Light." "QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS" 238 Melding individuals into a functioning group -~ MAN may be physical or etheric -- Awareness of humankind will increase as earth undergoes its transition -— Enlightened MAN will inherit the earth, others will go to different worlds. “ATLANTEAN TIME CAPSULES" 240 (A Tensor Concept) ‘The time chamber in the Province Of Tealus -~ Knowl edge placed in metal eylinders == Time capsule builders evacuated from the planet -- New vibrations left by the builders, "PENSOR EQUATIONS, SEMANTICS AND THOUGHT" 243 ‘A Tensor-Oriented economy is important ~~ Realize You cannot know everything -- A key to balanced development -- The Thalanatic Cortical Pause. = - - CHAPTER NINE = - - “RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN MEN AND WOMEN" 248 (A Brief Coumentary) Using the MIND co perfect the species -- Selecting the perfect partner in the future -- Men and wonen as single units ~~ Tensor-Oriented children, "EVENTS AND WORLD CHANGES - NUMBER THO" 249 (A Tensor Concept) Erratic weather predicted -- Food shortages predicted -- Mother nature is putting her house in order -- Symbiosis will predominate in the New Age. “SYMBOLS AND TELEPATHY" 252 (A Tensor Concept) Symbols are tools of thought -- Using the other four-fifths of your brain -- Telepathy -- The MIND transcends physical laws. “TELERINESIS AND THE SERIAL UNIVERSE” 257 (a Tensor Concept) Machines without gears -- The electron cloud method of paychokinesis -- the Blackett Equation and levitation == The Heisenberg Formula and teleportation.TABLE OF CONTENTS "THE 'LIGHT' ACKNOWLEDGED" An Angelic being discusses the "Light." MAN, A NOBLE ORDER OF CREATION" Service in the "Light" -- A larger view of reality ~ The coming reunion -- Remeber who you are. "EARTH CHANGES" Hypocrisy, fraud and deceit -- Truth will manifest -— Apathy and inaction of the people, cause fraudulent conditions to continue ~~ After the darkness comes the "Light." “TELEKINESIS AND THE SERIAL UNIVERSE ~ PART-2" (A Tensor Concept) Long-distance teleportation by mental adjustments of Planck's Constant ~~ Achieving the speed of light transports spacecraft into the next level of the Serial Universe -- The Serial Universe illustrated -- Mental efforts bring you to the attention of the space people. “TELEPATHY - PART-2" (A Tensor Concept) Misgivings about having your thoughts exposed -- low the brain functions -- Events which occur when two MINDS communicate -- Telepaths cannot read MINDS if the other MIND is unwilling. “ROUNDATION AND CHANGE (A Tensor Concept) Sun's radiation affects neurones -- Motor reactions and perception will speed up -- All life forms with a brain will experience great increases in intelligence -- Psychosomatic diseases will vanish. = = = CHAPTER TEN - - = “DAUGHTER OF THE "LIGHT'" ‘The truth of love will make women strong -- voman's purpose =~ A woman represents "Light" and beauty ~ Love is the only freedom in the Universe. “REMEMBER EARTH” (A Tensor Concept) The space people's record of thoughts and teachings of Jesus -- The Codex Sinaiticus and Hebrew-Chaldee Old Testament give an accurate account of Jesus PAGE 265 265 269 272, 276 280 286 295NE eee ee ANE NG LOT TRO ee ce ee ae OPP ee ee ee TABLE OF CONTENTS Jesus and followers on the Mount of Olives -- When shall come the end of this age? “q DAY IN THE LIFE OF SOLTEC" (In the Year, 1970) 301 The Lambda Radiation from the Sun -- Xenon gas can bring the earth to a new avareness -- Thought crys- tals ~~ A computer controlled by thought. "KORTON, MARS AND KOR" 305 Korton describes a typical day and its activities -—- ‘The space communication station on Mars -- Family life, clothing and eating habits -- Houses and family activities. "A DAY IN THE LIFE OF SURNIA" 312 Surnia receives a message from Ashtar -- neutron cloud heading for our Solar System -- Earth is not shielded from the radiation carried in a neutron cloud -- Those ones whose awareness has evolved to a certain state can cope with the effects. “RELATIONSHIPS OF MAN" 314 ALL relationships of MAN exist in The "Light -= var= ous forms of relationships among the stars -- New Age eatth will be welcomed by MAN into The Universal Confederation of Planets -- NAN is welcomed on all worlds when bearing the "Light" of Our Radiant One. "THOUGHTS FOR CONSIDERATION" 316 Many have been guided into certain paths for in creased awareness, to fit into the plan ~~ many advanced beings throughout the universe are willing to teach humankind their higher awareness of knowledge and wisdom. “DEALING WITH PERSONAL PROBLEMS" 318 All problems, personal and other kinds, can be dealt with by use of The "Light" -- Strive for higher awareness and service to your fellow man ~~ Keep the m sion to be accomplished first and foremost as your goal. “NATURE OF PERSONAL MISSIONS" 320 Directions and purposes of missions -- Mission may be individual or of a group -- All possess a great amount of "Light," dignity and nobleness -- All are emissaries of The "Light," as is MAN.TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE = + = CHAPTER ELEVEN - - - “GALACTIC CENTRAL" 325 A guided trip to the center of the Milky Way galaxy -- A visit to the Capital City. “TERMINUS HATONN" 332 A journey to Hatonn's Planet. “CURRENT PREDICTIONS AND SOLAR TRIBUNAL ACTIONS" 336 Inearnate WAN'S veiled awareness and why -- earth changes during 1979 -- Volcanic and earthquake activity -- Mon-Ka addressed The Tribunal and requested additional help for incarnate MAN on earth. “Love 346 Love can never be overstated or brought up too often in your awareness -- There is not any one best de~ seription which fits love ~~ Lightbearer, a messen- ger of love -- Love for all Our Radiant One's crea tions. “Aq MISSION OF THE 'LIGHT'” 349 Bia devotes time to searching unknown regions of the Universe for possible life-supporting planets —~ Many of MAN have kin on earth at this time —- Many hours are spent in her Survey work of earth's weath~ er patterns, earthquake faults and monitoring the growing spiritual awareness of earthnen —- Women are very active in space affairs, primary requisites are capability, experience, willingness and diversity of talents for qualification in The Survey. EPILOGUE 356 APPENDIX PUBLISHER'S NOTE and SPECIAL CONDENSED CATALOG 1PROLOGUE "THE STORY OF RICHARD MILLER" By Richard Miller I might mention that this is a very difficult story to relate. It is difficult in thie sense, in that I probably have only discussed it completely once or twice in some twenty-odd years. Therefore, I will ask your indulgence if I skip a few itens. It is also difficult because it has caused some pain in ny life, particularly back in the early 1950's. This, in terms of public em- barrassment, by being called a kook, nut, liar, charlatan, ete. Like most people, I wanted to go out and tell the world about it. Only in the 1950's, there weren't very many in the world who wanted to listen to it. Consequently this story has not been related to others very often. 1/11 start by saying that in the year 1948, I was a skeptic on the whole subject of UFO's and flying saucers. I had heard all kinds of stories about UFO's and, like most people, I thought people were having hallucinations. At that particular time, I was in the United States Air Force. correction, I should say at that time I was in the Army Air Corps because it was during 1947 and 1948 that the name of that organization was changed to the United States Air Force. On January 7, 1948, I happened to be in the Operation's Room at Scott Air Force Base in Belleville, Illinois. Now in the military we had what vas called an Air Defense Sector and Scott Air Force Base was part of such an Air Defense Sector; the same one that involves Fort Knox in Kenturky -- and on this particular day a UFO had appeared in the Fort Knox area, I should mention that the air space over Fort Knox is restricted. In other words, private aircraft and military aircraft do not fly over Fort knox. Therefore, an unidentified flying object over Fort Knox created quite a stir. All of the air bases in that Air Defense Sector were alerted. I happened to be in the Operation's Room when the alert cane through. ALL of the various air bases in the sector were tied together on a common cormnications link so that all such bases could hear vhat was going on, and the action was taking place at Godman Air Force Base in Kentucky on that day. The tower operators at Godnan AFB suddenly viewed a UFO flying in the near vicinity of Fort Knox. It was observed first with binoculars by the tower control personnel. They inmediately alerted the base conmander at Godmen and got him to come to base headquarters. Then, the alert went out to all the air bases in the sector, because at that time ve did not have very many jet interceptors around, but we did have the fastest thing in the Air Force at that time that was commonly available, the F-51 Fighter, a propeller driven aircraft.OE ——— —————— a 2 PROLOGUE About the time of this UFO sighting a squadron of four P-S1's was flying near Godman AFB. The tower operator called them on his radio and asked them to pursue this object and attempt to identify it. The pilot in charge of the flight was Captain Thomas Mantell. At Scott AFB we were listening to the radio traffic between Godman tower, Cap- tain Mantell and the three other aircraft that were vith him. The first alert occurred at 1:50 in the afternoon, and at 2:30 P.M., Cap= tain Mantell's flight was alerted to start the pursuit. My notes of this incident say that Captain Mantell's flight was running low on fuel; so his three wingnen asked permission at various stages of the pursuit, to land at Godman AFB for refueling and to take on oxygen equipment. None of these planes were equipped with oxygen as this was a routine low level flight. Captain Mantell was the only one who did not report back to the base for refueling or for oxygen. After spotting the object, Mantell called Godman tower and said, "I see it. It's above and ahead of ne and I'm still climbing.” One of his wingmen who was still with him at that time asked, "What the hell are we looking for?" He hadn't seen the object. Mantell answered hin and said, "The object is directly ahead and above me," thus directing the other pilot's attention to its location. That was at 245 P.M. At 3:05 P.M., Mantell again called in on his radio and said, “I've sighted the thing. It's metallic and tremendous in size; it's starting to climb higher.” Now, at this time both the object and Mantel! and one fighter plane still with him were being observed, through binoculars, by the tower personnel. At 3:10 P.M., five minutes later, Mantell again called in and said, “te!s climbing still higher. It's twelve o'clock high, making half my speed, I'll try and close in," At that time, the remaining pilot with him, a Lt. Hammond, called him and said, "Level off, Captain, until I regain visual contact." Mantell's F-51 was climbing so rapidly that even his wingman was having a hard tine keeping up with him, and had lost sight of him. His wingman then reported that he had lost sight of Mantel. At 3:15 P.M., just a few minutes later, Nantell called in again and said, "It's still above me making my speed or better. I am going up to 20,000 feet. If I'mno closer then, I'll abandon chase. This is where the official Air Force account ends. However, there was one further radio transmission from Mantell at 3:18 that afternoon, His last statement has been stricken from all of the official records He said: "my god. I see people in this thing." That was his last ac— tual comment. After that, the tower lost sight of Mantell and the object. They called Mantell repeatedly on the radio but he didn't answer. Ae 5:50 that evening, some two hours later, Godman Tower received a telephone call from Staniford Air Force Base. They had received a phone report from a farmer in Franklin, Kentucky that a plane with a certainPROLOGUE 3 serial number (NG-3869) had crashed on this man's farm. The crash had occurred at 4:45 in the afternoon, About 6:00 P.M. the alert was cancelled. The object had disappeared, Mantel had erashed; Captain Mantel was dead. The next morning there vas a briefing on what was now the "Mantel case." I won't go into all of the details of that briefing other than. to say thet Mantell's plane had flown for one hour and twenty minutes beyond his available fuel supply. No one could account for that. Cap- tain Mantell net his death as a result of exceeding 12,000 feet without ‘oxygen, He had blacked out, lost control of the aircraft and crashed. However, this presented the investigators with a major problem. If he was blacked out and unconscious, which would have occurred at approximately 3:25 P.M., how did the aircraft continue to fly for an hour and twenty-five minutes with an unconscious pilot at the controls? And with no fuel in the tanks. There was another mysterious happening in the Mantell Case which raised tremendous questions. An aircraft falling from that height, about 20,000 feet, out of control, would normally go into a spin condition. This was a stick controlled aircraft. All of you have seen pic~ tures of such old planes where the pilot has this control stick between his knees. Had he been unconscious he would have let loose of the stick, his feet would have relaxed on the rudder pedals, and the plane would have gone into a spin, particularly an F-51. ‘That being the case, when the aircraft hit the ground in a spinning condition, it should have bored a hole in the gtound sone fifteen to twenty feet deep, Mantell's plane hit the ground perfectly flat and the earth underneath the aircraft was only compressed two inches, The investigators found that hard to believe with one exception, the eyewi ness report of the farmer on whose farm the plane crashed. He saw the plane coming down in a spin, but he then made a statement which just literally blew everybody's mind. He said as the aircraft reached treetop level, it was enveloped by a brilliant white flash of light. This Light was so bright it was Like looking at the sun. The aireraft ap~ peared to fall out of this light and pancake into the ground. Now what~ ever this brilliant light was, it brought the aircraft out of a spin, and slowed its rate of descent. Normally, an aircraft falling from that height would have scattered wreckage over a wide area on impact, ALL that happened to Mantell's plane was that the fuselage, the tail assembly, the rear empinage and the wings broke off on impact. The tail assembly was less than a foot away from the rest of the aircraft. The wings vere only inches away from the fuselage. If it hadn't been for the farmer's eyewitness report, it would have looked as if 2 giant crane had picked the aircraft up and then dropped it in a flat position. It would have ereated the sane type of damage. Some mysterious force had somehow in- terfered with the crash of this aircraft. When the plane hit the ground Captain Mantell's shoulder straps broke, he flew forvard over the control stick and it impaled him through the chest. That is how Gaptain Mantel died. The aircraft, contrary to many stories, was not found to be radio~ active. Also, there was no unusual magnetic phenomena about the aircraft.Se ee a 4 PROLOGUE That is, no parts were mysteriously magnetized, contrary to some writ~ ers, The aircraft had functioned perfectly and had experienced no mal- functions of any kind. All electrical and mechanical systems were checked out at the crash site and the aircraft had been in perfect flying condition. But, the fuel tanks were dry and there was no spillage of fuel on the ground at the crash site, again verifying that the tanks were dry. Quite an investigation rook place that evening at the rash site. The next morning a briefing took place in which all the factors I'm divulging were brought out. That briefing looked like the end of it~ Areport, as a result of this briefing, was forvarded to The Air Force Tntelligence Conmand (ATIC) at Wright-Patterson Air Force Base -~ with the conclusion that Captain Mantell had met his death pursuing an intel- Ligently controlled unidentified flying object. We couldn't explain anything else. that evening our base vas alerted, via teletype, that there was go ing to be a special briefing the next day, this time not in the Operaq tions Room but at base headquarters. Anyone and everyone who had been Connected with the Mantell case were to report at 0900 hours. All the Gecunents, loge and wire recordings of the radio traffie were to be brought to this meeting. ‘At 0900, we were all at base headquarters. The necting was conduc ted by an officer from Wright-Patterson Air Force Base of ATIC. He re~ quested, first of all, that Weight-Patterson wanted all of the informa fion ve had, including the wire recordings, so that ATIC could make a further investigation. 0, very dutifully, all the records were turned over to this officer. Then the officer said, "We have mede an investigation." I would like to present at this time the information that was going to be released later that day by ATIC to the press, because the press vas really hot on everybody to get an explanation of what had happened to Nantell. We were told that in order to present a completely unbiased and objective report that ATIC had called in a civilian consulting scientist who was working for the Air Force. This scientist was Dr. J. ‘Allen Hynek from Northwestern University and this is what we were told. Dr. Hynek had read all of the infornation that had come in from the crash tean, the survey report, and come up with a conelusion. I now quote Dr. Hynek's conclusion: "Captain Mantell mistakenly thought he was purauing an unidentified flying object. In reality, he was either chasing the reflection of the planet Venus on the canopy of his aircraft or he aS chasing the planet Venus hich was visible low fon the horizen on the afternoon of this incident. Mantell could not possibly have been chasing a UFO, nor was there any UFO involved in this incident." We were then told that ATIC concurred with Dr. Bynek's findings and we were also told to forget all the foolishness about the UFO. We were additionally ordered net to discuss the case with civilians or with the press. It was strictly a military matter. A lot of us raised a beef at that. It smelled fishy. First of all they had asked for all of the evidence in our possession to conduct aPROLOGUE 5 further investigation. Then after we had turned it over to them, they Said they had already completed the investigation. Several years later, Dr. Hynek admitted, publically, that the Air Force had pressured him into writing that particular report and conclusion. Iwas no longer a skeptic, I had been up to that time. Now I wondered why the Government had gone to all of the trouble of covering it up, to keep it avay fromthe press and the public. 1, therefore, finished my tour of duty in the Air Force. I went happily back to civilian Life. I had been out of the service maybe six or seven months and was wondering what I wanted to do in civilian life. I had thoughts of going into the television repair business with a friend. Television was just getting off the ground in those days and it might be a good business to go into. And then an interesting thing happened. In January of 1949, I received a phone call from ATIC, asking whether or not I would be interested in becoming an undercover civilian investigator of UFO's. Naturally I thought of thie as a good way to get addi- Gional information -- the real scoop. If nothing else, it might satisfy ny own curiosity on this subject. I asked what would be involved and why did they need a civilian investigator. They had enough intelligence officers that could check the reports, They explained that the public seemed reluctant to talk with their intelligence officers. 1 said, “Phat doesn't surprise me because every tine you go out and talk to then you make them feel like they're idiots. You know, you give them the idiot treatment." They said yes, that's what happened. Every time an officer, in uniform, shows up they won't talk to us. So, they needed someone not in uniform to talk with these people, someone who could go up and say, "Hey, I'm interested; tell me what you saw, what you experienced." ite said, "There are some people around who are claiming they are having contact with UFO's and we would like to know more about this and the contacts, But they won't talk to us so we need civilian investigators." Well, I accepted the job and worked for ATIC in that capacity until July of 1952. It was part-time, as they didn't need me all the time, so J also had another job. But every time they needed someone to check into a story (and there were others like me), and when no one else was available, I'd get a call. Uncle Sam paid daily wages and always picked up the tab for all expenses. In 1952, I left this investigative job. Again, I became a full- fledged civilian. But I was still interested in UFO's because now 1 knew there was really something to them. I had investigated a number of cases. I had read file reports. Project Blue Book had come into existence by that time, but I had worked through two previous projects that very few people knew about -- one called Project Sign, one called Project Grudge and finally Project Blue Book. For the next two years I was a television repairman. I had a partner and we owned our own business. Then an interesting thing happened. One day I read in the newspaperSee 6 PROLOGUE that @ fellow was coming to our hone town who claimed to have been ta that ¢ feligication with UFO's, I wae intrigued with the idea. 1 hed radio Comrested in radio, had been a han radio operator and « lot of ny friends were han radio operators. Thie vas in Detroit, Michigan in the sumer of 1954. This fellow, George fiunt Willienson, ‘cane to Detroit to talk on communicating vith sorte jneelligences via short wave radio. He told a story about bow be apsce intiow dhe was a telegrapher with the Senta Fe Railroad in Arizona, sige a han radio operator, had gotten in touch with UFO's using rhe st oate han radio equipment. They had communicated via International Norse Code and had received intelligent replies My han radio buddies end T vent to hear Willianson’s talk | SSteT” wards’ we introduced ourselves and said we vere interested. Could te te itk gust ltaequency kay (had /Ueedt/do"ha gavel urlevtie: (of the’ fre Guencies. We said ve would Listen for any type of commmnication of there frequencies. He aeked if we would let hin know if anything occur” sea® Taaid he would be the first to know; just let us know how we seeja roach bin. He gave us his icinerary, as he was on @ lecture Cour: ‘There were about six of us in the group who hed heard him thet night We iomediately act up out short vave equipment) we hed sone, in Tighe a and in our office and television shop. Of course, we could Our cartéor or listen all of the time so we rigged « tepe recorder that aot erator oc and off automatically if anything was received. We monitored all the different frequencies. qwo months vent by. We didn't hear anything but static over che short weve radio, We were about ready to call it quits. Then one sve" sig, on the tenth of Septerber, 1954, a radio message wae finally rer ing, om ees being the first radio message received, we didn't know Wad ceived conc, but the message cane in, invoice (it vam in Foglish) sod HNSS a powerful signal... We noticed an.odd choice of vords in the Hee? aige. The inflection of the voice was also strange. We had made @ tape fetording of it, and went over it and over it afterwards. our fixet thought was that sone of our buddies were pulling our leg Host nim tedto operators ave a talkative bunch of guys snd we werent way exception to this. We hed discussed over the air that ve were tie, twine for UFO's and, of course, our friends would kid us @ Lee bows it seeing iAnything from space lately?” We alh thought that one of our teretts nad sent us thie message and there would be a good Laugh the next fries gow him, So ve really didn't pay too much attention to thie first message, thinking it a joke someone was playing on us. Hovever, carer reed Se’ the weseage there was a schedule mentioned. It said that five daye Later on the A5th of September there would be snether ratte setsage and they gave us the frequency. All right, we thought, we'11 go along with this and see what happens. on that day, at the time specified, another message was received, nak tnis tise ye were ready) foriits, We jrere atlject)up, .six of abe Sith dixection finding equipment in six different automobiles. Tf anybody gir theve was playing genes with us ve were going Co get him. The mes” se tame o= the message went -~ end we drev a blank, We couldn't get sage Cine cn the fignal. We knew it wasn't the equipment malfunctioningPROLOGUE 7 because six units couldn't all malfunction at the same time. But we couldn't get a bearing. No matter which way we turned our direction finding equipment, the signal was equally strong. We were up in the air and this threw us for a loss. With the second message came a schedule for the next (third) message. Maybe we weren't doing something right. Maybe we should get some professionals involved. We called the local Federal Communica~ tions Coumission (FCC) office in Detroit and said we were having some trouble with a possible illegal station, and asked if they (the FCG) would come out and help us track it down. Well, the FCC likes to catch illegal stations, so they sent their monitoring truck to help us. The third message was received and the FCC couldn't get a bearing on it either. We drew a blank again -- well, almost. One of the guys had brushed up against a tree and knocked his di- ‘rectional antenna loose from the side of his car. Tt was on a bracket attached to the vent-wing window. He was trying to fix it as the mex- age was coming in and it was laying over on its side. The antenna, instead of looking in a horizontal plane was looking up, and he got a bearing. He noticed the signal was coming from straight up. He called us on his radio and said, "Take your mounts loose and turn them up, lay them on their side." We did. We all got 2 bearing from straight up. Everybody, that is, except the FCC who couldn't do that without turning their truck over and they couldn't detach theirs. We all got to thinking -- this was the third tine we had received @ message via shortwave radio. We now had a bearing from straight up. This couldn't be a ground based station, and if any of our buddies were up there renting a plane and flying around sending us these messages, it was sure costing somebody a bundle to pull our leg. So we began to give more credance to this whole thing. It gets awfully expensive to rent airplanes and we didn't know anyone whe was that well heeled. Most ham radio operators were dead broke most of the time, We didn't think any of them had enough money to hire a plane. $0 we gave up on the idea that this was a hoax. On the 20th of September, we went out to our office mailbox and found a strange envelope. The envelope was addressed to our company. There was no return address and no postege stamp on the envelope, but the envelope had been cancelled at the post office. The envelope contained a set of plans written on ordinary notebook paper, plain white paper. We later found you could buy it in any one of a hundred stores. It was @ set of electronic drawings, It was some type o£ a photo-electric eye coupled to an audio amplifier. In other words, it was sone kind of instrunent designed to receive a beam of Light. We got to thinking, wait 2 minute -- who uses a light beam to detect sound? The first thing we thought of was a motion picture project- or. That's how you get the sound off the soundtrack. We decided to build this gadget, because down in one corner of the last page (there were three pages of drawings) there was a name, and the name was Meck-tau. We thought that was a weird name, but interesting.oe ee 8 PROLOGUE Tt would cost us maybe $20.00 to build this thing so we went ahead. We made a Light beam receiver. We didn't know why we were building it, but somebody went to the trouble of sending us the plans. We received a nunber of radio communications thereafter, and after receiving three more messages our friends from outer space (that's what we called them), commented on the plans they had sent us. Well, now we knew where the plans cane from. They asked us to continue building the device and stated that on October 17, 1954, Mr. George Hunt Williamson would be returning to Detroit. They asked if we would tape record his entire lecture and then transmit his lecture to them vie the light beam equipment. It seemed like @ strange request. We got hold of Williamson. Sure enough, he was coming back to De- troit ond was scheduled to give a lecture on October 17th. We told him what the space friends had requested. He got a bit excited. On that night we taped his lecture. That evening we had been instructed to transmit the tape to them via Light beam at 9:00 P.M, We were to aim the beam in the direction of the North Star. We were in a friend's living room with a nice big picture window and had the equipment set up there. We had a sighting device on the top of the unit and aimed it at the North Star. We then transmitted the taped lecture. Now it was time to receive their response to our transmission. We thought this was going to be good. First of all, the opening to our receiving unit was a piece of 1/2 inch diameter conduit, five inches long. A beam of light, from them, would have to enter that 1/2 inch pipe to reach the photocell. We figured this was going to be a neat trick as they had to be directly in line with our unit in order for us to receive their transmission. We placed the unit in the "receive'' mode and we got a loud hum on the tape recorder. We suddenly realized that we had a problem in our receiver. No message could possibly come through. Out came the solder- ing irons and screwdrivers and we dismantled the unit, checked it all the way through -- two hours later we found a poor connection, repaired it and everything was fine. We said, "Well, we missed the boat." Our space friends had our schedule set up for 9:00 P.M., and they were going to answer the minute we finished trensmiceing. But we thought -~ what the heck. We did not line the unit back up with the North Star. We just aimed it out over the treetops and said, "Well, fellas, if you can read our minds you know where the thing is pointing." Hexe we were, ten or fifteen people crowded into this front room, the lights turned down low so there wouldn't be any reflections on the window glass, and so this little unit could see if there was anything out there. Within five minutes the most astounding thing happened, and pandemonium broke out in the front room. A glowing UFO came down to treetop height, jockeyed back and forth and lined itself up beautifully with our little unit, sat there, and then did the next most impossible thing electronically we could think of -~ it modulated the glowing forcefield around the craft at an audio rate, and sent us a message. We could tell. The little neon lights that were the record volume indicator lights on our old Pentron tape recorder startedPROLOGUE blinking. We knew we were getting something. ‘As I said, pandemonium broke loose in the room. People went tearing out of the room to the outdoors to get a better look at the object. A beautigul floor lamp smashed as someone tripped over the cord. It was dark in the room and people were running into each other, all trying to get outside at once. I think I ended up being the only one there watching the tape recorder. After calm returned, the UFO took off -- it left, It was the greatest thing that had ever happened to us. We rewound the tape, played it back and sure enough, there was a message in voice, Very briefly, the message said that they had approved of Williamson's lecture, gave hime Little complinents and secondly, they offered a few suggestions. Then they said, "We would suggest that you call a Mr. Adanski, because within seven days Mount Palomar is going to be shaken." They mentioned the San Andreas Fault. At that time, none of us knew anything about the San An- dreas Fault. We put through a long distance call to Mr. Adamski. Williamson said he lived at the base of Mt. Palomar in a little town called Palomar Gar— dens. We couldn't get him. So we thought, "Well, George, whatever's going to happen, you'll have to weather the storm. Seven days later in the Detroit papers, there was a little article mentioning that there had been a mild earthquake at Mt. Palomar, regia- tering such-and-such on the Richter scale. That was all the verification we needed. Williamson was excited and we were excited. Several weeks later we received another radio message (unscheduled) and this was the most unusual one to date. It was Sunday (October 30, 1954) and I was working in our office. My partner vas out delivering some television sets, and the radio was setting down at one end of the service bench. Shortly after lunch, a loud signal came from the radio. The message, in International Morse Code, went something like this: "We have need to speak with you. We would like you to drive out to the Location where you normally receive our messages and be there as soon as possible. In addition, we would like you to leave a note for your friends to be at that same location at two o'clock in the morning, at which time we will transmit another radio message. The place they were referring to was out in the country away from Detroit, about halfway to the town of Ann Arbor and just off Highway US-23. The location was an old abandoned cemetery about 200 yards off the highway ‘and out of sight from the highway. The reason we had chosen this spot was two-fold. The first was that we needed a private location avay from other people, and especially from the police. The police would have wondered what we were doing at the different odd hours that we'd be there waiting for a message. The second reason was that out in the countryside ve were in a quiet radio location. We did not have the snap, crackle and pop of automobile and electrical interference in our short wave radios, Which make radio reception very difficult at high frequencies. So we had gone out to this area which, as I said, was about half-way to Ann Arbor, Michigan, from where we were ~~ and nobody bothered us inee ee Ty ese pie Se Laie ee ee —— 10 PROLOGUE thie cemetery in the middle of the night. It was pitch black out there at night and was beautiful. We often took our telescope along and would sit there and look at the stars and maybe hope to see a UFO or something. We would turn up the volume on the radio so we could hear when the space friends started sending their message. Well, anyway, this was the place they had requested that I go. My partner was using my car that day and the only vehicle present at the shop wae our company truck; it was a panel truck, I felt a little guilty about this because normally we wouldn't take our panel truck out to the country, as it hed all types of television equipment, ete., in it. But I did on this occasion, I left a note for my partner, stating, "Don. T had a message from the boys. Play the tape and hear it. They want you and the rest of the group to be out at the cemetery at two o'clock in the morning for another radio message." 1 didn't have very far to go, maybe fifteen or twenty miles, but with the Sunday traffic it took me about an hour to get there. I did not ar~ rive at the cemetery until two o'clock in the afternoon, It was a really beautiful Sunday with a cloudless sky, the sun was shining end warm ~~ just a gorgeous day, and everybody and his brother was out taking a Sun~ day drive. I pulled the truck off the road into a little roadway that went into the cemetery, far enough so that it was not visible from the highway. The road dropped down into a little gully, so that the truck was out of eight of the road. The highway was patrolled by the State Police, and T felt they might inquire about a business vehicle parked in a cenetery. I was standing there debating with myself, wondering what was going to happen. I had the radio in the truck turned on in case there were sone additional instructions, but there was nothing but the usual static coming in on the radio. 1 had been there maybe five minutes when something shiny caught my eye up in the sky. I glanced up. A large object was coming down like fa bat out of ----. Within three or four blinks of ny eye it was hover ing over this little hill, right alongside of me. The ship descended so rapidly that it startled me. I have never seen anything in my life move as fast as it moved —- from just a speck in the sky to a huge spaceship hovering over the top of the hill. Ne sound, whatsoever. Not even a displacement of air. You would have thought anything moving that fast through the air would break the sonic barrier or create a big whoosh from the air being pushed out of the way. But, it was absolutely silent. There were no hunming sounds, nothing. Suddenly, it vas just there. It just hovered, absolutely motionless. It didn't rock or sway ~~ it didn't move at ail, It looked like it was anchored over the top of the hill. Im evaluating the size of the craft (which I did afterward) I estimated that this particular spaceship was about 150 feet in diameter. Unlike some of the other saucer pictures that you see, particularly the Adanski type spaceships which have round things sticking ovt of the bottom, this one was absolutely flat on the bottom. There wasn't anything sticking out of it, Its height was about 45 to 50 feet from the bottom to the very top. The outer perimeter of the ship was round.PROLOGUE 11 I found out that the things that Looked like they might be some sort of a window on the side, may have been windows, but they were not visible from inside the ship where Iwas. As far as I could see from inside the ship, later on, they were not windows. I don't know what they were and I didn't think to ask about them. What Looked like a bright light at the top of the ship was actually a half-round circle of what appeared to be some type of crystalline substance like glass. There was a detectable glow coming from it. (I found out later that this was where the forcefield was exiting the ship and that is where it was coming out of at the time, I imagine it radiated outward from other places around the ship and spread out around the rim when they were in movenent. But when it was just hovering it was glowing at that one particular point.) ‘A strange thing happened. I made the decision to get a closer look, so I walked up the side of the hill. As I got under the edge of the ship, I noticed that even with the light jacket I was wearing, and particularly on the backs of my hands, that the heir just stood up. I noticed a prick- Ling sensation on my skin. I could associate this with being around a high voltage source of electricity; you sometimes notice this same thing occurring. Apparently there was an electrical discharge in the air around the ship, because its power was still turned on while it was hovering. T wouldn't have any estimate as to what the ship would have weighed, in terms of gross weight. ‘As I was standing there locking up at the ship, there was slight noise and then a doorway opened on the outer rim of the ship. I was fas~ cinated because it looked like it was a tongueand-grooved type thing. Then a stairway descended from the opening. (I looked at the mechanice of it later and this stairway was not flexible, it was rigid. Somevhere there was a pivot point so it slanted dom, came out a little way and then dropped down.) ‘The stairway came don to where it was hovering about a foot off the ground, It did not touch the ground. A noment Later @ man appeared, dressed in what appeared to be a one~ piece suit of coveralls or a brown jumpsuit. He was standing up at the top of the stairs and then he stepped down one step and waved to me. lle motioned for me to come up, to come aboard. 1 thought for perhaps one-millionth of a second, and then jumped on the first step and went racing up the stairs, No sooner had I reached the top of the staire when he motioned for me to step sideways, avay from the stairvay. We moved over a foot or two from the hatehway and stood there for a few moments watching the stairway retract and then tilt as it slid into a little compartment. The only thing I could ever think of, that cane close to describing this, was a drawer sliding back into a filing cabinet. It was on noiseless bearings or skids or sonething, because it didn't make any noise. Then the hatchway in the floor closed. I noticed that we were standing in a circular corridor which apparent ly went all the way around the rim of the ship. Next to us was a hallway that led directly into the center of the ship.ee ae ee ee ee ee 12 PROLOGUE ‘This man in brown clothing did not say anything and I was busy watch ing everything going on. ‘The thing that caught my attention was the fact that everything there was metallic. There was no relief of any type, to the sheer expan- ses of metal itself. There were no decorations on the valls, nothing on the floor =- no carpets or anything like that; it just looked Like you had walked into a submarine or something similar. It was purely func- tional and immaculately clean. I looked at the floor and there were no scuff marks on it, nor did it look vorn from walking. No lights were detectable anyvhere. There vas nothing hanging from the ceiling nor on the sides of the walls, and yet everything was vel lit. Te was just Like outside in bright sunlight, it was that brightly lit. It was impossible for me to detect where the light was coming from. ‘The thing that also amazed me was the fact that with him standing there beside me, there were no shadows, which showed that whatever the illunt- nation was, it was very even. Everything was very evenly lit. The hallway leading into the center of the ship, appeared Like a long metal tunnel. Tt was about 45 feet long with a doorway at the far end which was closed. It was a very plain looking door. Another thing that struck me was that there was no sound, none at all, The silence was getting a little embarrassing because I didn't know whether I should say hello to this fellow or what. I just decided I wouldn't say anything. I would wait for him to make the first overture. ALL of the metal that I sau had a satin finish to it. It was not highly polished, kind of like a dull satin shine. After the stairway retracted and the door closed, he motioned to ne . ‘again; (he still hadn't said anything) indicating that I was to follow him. He walked down the length of the corridor toward the center of the ship, with me behind him. He came to the door at the end of the corridor and it slid sideways. (I did not notice him do anything to open the door, no arm movement, nothing.) Naturally, I was quite startled. He led me into a room which was apparently the main central room of the ship or the control section of the ship. (I found out later that all of the depth between the outer corridor and this inner room was com partmentalized. There were quarters and roons in these sections, but I never was able to see whet they were like. We spent all of the time in this one huge room which was 90 feet in diameter.) ‘There were four large curving sections of equipment. These were in the form of a circle broken into four quadrants. This equipment appeared to be about five feet away from the wall so you could walk behind then very easily. There was a desk in the middle of the room and a man was seated there with his back to me, In the meantime, the fellow who had walked in with me, and who still hadn't said anything, turned around and walked back out. The door opened and closed after him and I was left standing there, not knowing what to do, ‘The ceiling in thie room was curved which obviously followed thePROLOGUE 135 outer contour of the ship. It was a very dark blue color at the top and gradually faded out to a lighter blue as it met the top of the walls. ‘The walls were about 8k to nine feet tall, with a pink mother-of-pearl finish on them. Again, the room was well lit, but I could not detect where it was coming from. The man at the desk in the center of the room, approximately 20 feet avay from me, was busy doing something. 1 didn't know what to do, so I just stood there by the doorway looking at everything inside the room. The lighting was perfectly normal, the temperature was normal or what I would consider to be normal room temperature, there weren't any drafts of any kind. The gravity was normal, I didn't feel any change in my weight. There wasn't any sensation of motion and yet I knew the ship could not stay where it was because it was in plain view of the highway, and that was a busy highway. I assumed they were busy getting the ship out of there, moving it to another location. About that time the man in the center of the room finally finished whatever it was he was doing. He stood up, turned around and walked toward me, and as he walked toward me he was smiling. When he got very close to me, I saw his arm start to come up and I thought he was going to shake hands. Instead, he put his hand on my shoulder. He smiled again and that was the first time he spoke, and it was very simple. He said, "Come sit dom. We have much to discuss." It was just that simple. He led me to an area in front of a curving bank of equipment where there were three chairs which had a rather strange desiga. The only thing I could compare them with would be a typist's posture chair, but they were different than a typist's chair in that they had ginble mounts on the sides. He identified himself right avay. He said, "I am Soltec." (1 re~ menbered the name instantly because that was the nane that had been on some of the radio messages.) He was wearing the same type of jumpovit except that his was white. It was snowy white, and there was no insignia of any kind on his clothing. Whatever was holding his clothing closed was not visible. It looked very plain. This is what amazed me about everything I saw; its simplicity and plainness, almost spartan appearing. ‘There were no women aboard this ship. There was Soltec and four other men, a total crew of five. These different individuals, who com prised the crew, came in at different times and I was introduced to them. Each one of then wore a different colored jumpsuit. There was vite, brown, orange, green and a purple/violet color. I asked Soltec what this meant and he explained that it was just 4 way of designating what they did, their job on board the ship. There were no other indi~ cations of rank, insignia or anything. I asked him what the white color of his clothing meant and he said it designated that he was, what we would call, an astrophysicist. The fellow in the brown suit was a flight engineer and also @ communications specialist. His name was Meck-tau, ‘The fellow in the orange suit was a geologist; the one in the green14 PROLOGUE was an ecologist; the one in the violet/purple suit was @ cultural so- ciologist. These are all equivalents in our Language. I asked him who he was, where he came from, what he was doing here; that type of thing, He explained that these people were members of the Confederation. I asked him what that vas? He explained it was an organization of inhabited worlds of MAN, at that tine consisting of some 680 worlds. All of the crew members on board this ship were from dif ferent areas of space. Soltec said he was from Alpha Centauri. (Of course that stunned me because I thought nothing could move faster than the speed of light, and I knew that Alpha Centauri was something Like 4% Light years away.) The fellow in the brown suit was Meck-tau, (He was the one that later supplied some of the plans for the light~beam equipment that we built.) le was also a conmunications engineer and flight engineer on this particular ship. ‘The one in the orange suit was introduced to me by the name of Bo- real and he was from Altair, which was even further away. The one in the green suit was Tomeck and he was from Uranus. The fellow in the purple/violet outfit was named Garold and he was from a star system called Dorado. T also found out that both Garold and Boreal were members of the Galactic Survey, and I had to have that explained to me as well. ‘This particular spaceship had a name. It was called the Phoenix, and was usually based at the planet Trantor. This was a Galactic Sur- vey scientific ship and they were here for scientific purposes. Soltec explained that one of the things they were doing was measuring magnetic field anomalies at different places on the planet earth ‘They were also checking cosmic radiation in this sector of space, which encompassed our entire Solar System and out beyond. They were also sur- veying the planet earth attempting to locate earthlings who had the potential for telepathic communication. This was not the only spaceship that was involved, at the time, in this type of work. Also, their survey work included the moon as well as the earth. They were checking something on the moon as well. I asked him how Long he had been doing this type of thing, because was thinking back over all the prior flying saucer type information, clear back to Ezekiel in the Bible, He said that this particular task was a current mission, but that the Confederation had been studying and observing the earth for millions and millions of years. I asked the question, "Besides the things mentioned, what caused MAN to be interested in the planet earth in the first place? He spoke then about the earth's uniqueness, how different the earth was from other worlds. He mentioned that the earth had intrigued then when they first discovered our Solar System. The Galactic Survey had made a survey of all of the planets and when they came across earth, they were amazed, because they had never found any place like it anywhere. So we were extremely important to them, in that sense. The thing that really threw them was the conbativeness and competition between lige formsPRoLocue 15 ing the cod of = corals cycies eather, oct vhole Solar Systen wag tr ‘proaching the ea! ef a vounis oyele and there war goiag ¢0\be a lore of ‘A lot of whet he wat seying jose dlda't make cence £o a at the tines 1 van june’ ligtening to the non fait, fost Listened aad thought to 27> tap sould Cranentation en Scare their shipey that at they ‘hey could pick up on individuste obo hed tele The sain’ reason they wees bere ven fo belp Poise me srinese of til of the Lite form oa the planet saTth. shad Yi voy wane Ehey txying £2 roach us and talk to the paths pot We Kept using thin tera ‘Ife forme," and 1 hape thinking be meant people. "Te wanafe unefl Inger ehae he cane Seck an: posated out fo me fee meant AEE af the Tale forme, sot Jott people. essa ch rato thy ore deg tia ote fo ein sept, shoveh ‘hich the earthy as well se other planets in’ the dolar Syateny vesld ‘One of the rerulte of all of eis would Ye that, Decaues of this ond ing of ae ote, there vue golag co be's necting bstwvon the space peor Siicttoct nae underway to bring unis about without scaring peoples st 1 ahem asked the Sip question, wy zef_e ania ehey hed darccted noe celepathie ebliity in oe and’ chat oehors had aleo boon contactocs have bees caneacted vas ooe George Aleeshl and the other Nas D8N 7 He sais quite recently they had cater one of our puople to Xew York and back in just a Sein dazerval of tine. Tamediately f thought of ‘gre anall roma erefe, a fonste sonevoliog crates” Bo aia Ceteuse thet fn the vay ban iy Rad Cold Ale eter, ‘ery Siesppointing.” So there vss a ew effort underoay (ehis wes in 195k) to reach che people thenael vee ee bppae ently, ney hod Tasted gad setastly Pe, whchet eR EIN Te ae ae hy pas eas Ea cas Ta Se Tee 18 PROLOGUE Soltec later explained. We then had a discussion a2 to the length of time they had been observing us. He said yes, they had been studying our world ever since it had, one, been discovered; and two, when they discovered what a really Strange place the earth was I asked him how far back that went. He said about two million of our years, when the earth was first discovered by the Survey. At that time there were no human life forms on earth, but there vere aninals end different types of vegetation. The thing that intrigued them was what he described as the crudeness and the ferocity of the life forms tovard each other; the struggle that was going on between them, They just could not understand this, even to this day. It presented them with a tremen— dous puzzle. ‘The Galactic Survey was responsible for colonizing the planets in our Soler System millions of years ago. He mentioned that people, way back then, lived on Jupiter and they were aware of the Confederation. ‘The Confederation went ahead and colonized some of the planets in our Solar System at that sane time. But vhen it came to earth they didn’t know what to do, s0 they decided they would proceed with a very limited colonization. They vent back to the people on Jupiter, who at least were natives of this sector of space, and asked them about it and appar— ently were able to obtain some volunteers from Jupiter who would be will- Ging to undertake the risk, as they said, of putting an experimental col— ‘ony on the earth. Normally, when they colonize a planet they apparently bring in one million people or nore at atime. So when they said that it turned out to be just one man and one woman, you can see how cautious they were being. So Jupiter supplied the volunteers, a man and a woman. They were brought to earth and encouraged to have children, etc. Maybe that is the basis of the whole Adan and Eve story that we read about in the Bible, I asked hin if they called thenselves Jupitevians and he said no, they called themselves uenbers of the Adamic Race. Of course, the Survey hung around while all of this was going on, observing them, and the minute the first children were born they noticed that these offepring did mot have the same mental abilities as the par— ents had. ‘The new-born, on other worlds usually have complete recall of their prior lives. The children of earth woke up with their brains blank, so to speak, and they had to actually be educated. And, whereas the parents could engage in telepathy for normal cormunication between themselves, the children couldn't. There were so many things that the children couldn't do that they thought they hed two walformed children fon their hands. Also, the children reacted very strangely to the parents ‘and with each other. This puzzled everyone. So a while later they brought more volunteers and the same thing happened when they had children. ‘Then they knew that it had to be something in the environment that was causing this, They had been cautious in the iret place because they had noticed this animosity, combative nese and competition between all the other life forms on this planet. Suddenly, the offspring of their people were exhibiting the same charac-PROLOGUE 17 teristics, while the parents didn't exhibit these strange characteristics. They were very troubled over this whole situation, As a result of all of this, they quarantined the planet earth and it has been quarantined ever since. They would allow no further colonization of this planet and they discouraged others of the Confederation from coming here. Earth became sort of @ private preserve for the Galactic Survey to study. Apparently there were beacons out in space that warned other spaceships away from the area, etc., advising them not to land on the planet earth. (You might say -- Don't land, the natives are restless.) They felt there had to be a continuous observation of the planet and ‘of the people, the children that would be growing up in succeeding generations. ‘They decided they had better put some fixed installations on this planet because they couldn't keep a ship circling overhead contin- wously. So they did erect some fixed installations on the planet earth and staffed them. But they found out something very interesting. After the first staff had been on earth for almost a year, they started bickering with one another. They found out that apparently it took a little ever nine months for whatever it was affecting the earth to start affecting then. They then set up a schedule where they rotated their staff every six months at each installation. Apparently, their people would go out from these fixed installations and try to help those little communities of human beings who were scattered around the planet. However, they found out something very interes: ing at that time. Obviously the staff was a great deal more intelligent than those they were trying to help and they found out that humans re- sented the attempts to help them. Consequently, they had to devise sone new ground rules for themselves. Every time they went out they had to remain incognito, and the help they would offer would be very subtle at any particular time. They couldn't do anything major because humans re- sented anyone who appeared superior in any way. So they decided on a way of doing this. They would use their tele~ pathic abilities to inspéxe the zhinking of humans, kind of lead then into solutions of the problems they were facing. They also had another technique. They created a group of people who went out, specialists, and called then 'the wise ones.! In the meantime, they were still very busy with the planet earth. ‘The Survey saw there were certain other deficencies about the planet. They set about transplanting vegetation in other parts of the world, They devised new hybrid grains and edible vegetation. They noted that earth children were reacting the came as the animals on this world. ‘They would eat anything, including each other, if they got hungry enough. So they developed the firet of what we call the hybrid grains that were used in planting. ‘They had moved some people around too. By this time, now, quite a number of generations had gone by and there were a lot of humans running around. They moved these humans while they were asleep, putting them in different parts of the world in what they considered to be settings easier for them to live in, not the harsh environments they alvays seemed=o ee 16 PROLOGUE to be choosing. After they had moved some of these people around, Shey co ee oc ccnething elec strange. Apparently at that time, the earth's roreetic field was changing and there was a lot more cosmic radiation couing in and genetic mitations started taking place. Soltec explained that the various colors of the races on our planet were caused by mutations. In other words, they all started out being Tie complexioned, bat because of these mitations different ehings serced happening to the size and shape of the skeletal structure and the pigmentation of the skin, That is why ve have diffevent sizes and celobevof people on cur planet -- the red, yellow, brown, black races, seeFe sentially they were all the same in the beginning, but these things happened to then in different areas wheve the radiation gor to thea. He then described the start of the great civilizations, as he call= ed than, He mentioned Atlantis, Lemuria and Shuneria. He said that Ghcsezia ves Gust /as(old°ao Atlantis and Chere: was’ s tremeriove oT invour dating of when these civilizations were present. In fact, there juve meny errors in our recorded hietory. We said that the Actantean: were wun’ od Shumevian civilizations started out about 1,800,000 B.C. ‘they existed as the three great civilizations until about 1,365,000 B.G., of a peried of sone 435,000 years. Also, that Atlantis snd be” Turia vere not a9 recent se 16,000 or 24,000 years ago, ae many humans believed. He spoke of how these people progressed, the Atlanteans and Lem dane whet a peaceful, beautiful existence they had and the tranquility. dane, hte cerns it wae almost ideal. But in terms of man, it still ieee a lot to be desired because they didn't have the other facters which MAN was Crying to help them with. put these people did have a sense of their own divinity. But, the envinonnent of earth produced what we would call throwbacks, as there Seve elvays one or two individuals that would revert back to « more Nevege, irrational behavior than all of the other children being Porn at that particular time. Soltec kept using the terns ‘irrational’ and ‘belligerent’ in terne of teymumane vere (reacting to each othier and ta deseribing Eheae nite oF net chrovbacke, ‘But the rest of humanity war coming along rather Sineiy, They were getting into the harmony of rapport with each ober sie ie teanes were vexycculeored,¢inithein way)jendiso.were: Che) Lemur. re acid Sumerians. They were not angry at each other or fighting Lane: ane sther and they had ne vast differences of opinion. They dia Trade vith each other, so they got aleng fairly well. apparently during this 435,000 year interval ail three of chess civin tations vere’ on «i pacallel growth curve enditheyiall becaoe mejor, powers upon the planet earth. About that time a major catastrophic event occurred. Interference tron outer pace, the afrival of the Satonians. ‘The Satonians sxrived sreripfilerated society. ‘They could hide in the earth's negetive envi” ananent without being detected by our space friends because the nega ronmentbeations of the planet provided a perfect cover for them and ooPROLOGUE 19 their operations. They blended in and were difficult to spot. The S toniane wished to upset the plans of MAN, which is a constant gane of one-upmanship that they have going between themselves and MAN. If they could upset the Confederation's plans regarding the planet earth, this vould be a worthuhile endeavor for them. So they infiltrated human society and caused strife and dissension. ‘They are the ones, Soltec mentioned, who first created religion on this planet and created a priesthood, etc. They did this all, through hypnotic mental control, Since the Satonians were highly adept in thie ability, they were able to gain control of people's thinking. They did this when people came to the churches and temples. The hypnotic influence was contained in the rituals of the temple religious services. The Satonian's game plan was to create a great deal of strife between these three super civilizations and which, they were able to do, between Atlantis and Lemuria. (Soltec did not mention what success they had with Shumeria.) Awar broke out between Atlantis and Lemuria -- each being told, by the Satonian priests, that theirs was the only true religion. That was their idea -- to get them fighting with one another. ‘The Space Confederation wae puzzled about what was going wrong. So, they made much more careful appraisals of the people, and discovered the presence of the Satonians and the tremendous influence they had acquired. Tt was going to be very difficult to do anything about the situation, without innocent people being harned. The Confederation alerted all their people when it became evident ‘there was a major war brewing between Atlantis and Lemuria. They re~ ceived permission from the Galactic Tribunal and the Solar Tribunel to evacuate everyone they found who was not under Satonian hypnotic influence. The Confederation was quickly able to determine the people who were controlled and the ones who were not, They came and én one night evacuated approximately 100,000 people and removed them from this plan- ‘et. They took them out to many other worlds; adopted them in a sense. When the Satonians discovered what the Confederation had done, they were furious. The Satonians unleashed nuclear weapons which caused the destruction of Atlantis, Lemuria and Shumeria. As a result of the destruction and devastating atomic radiation the survivors became the mutants that we call the cavemen, the prehistoric men such as the Neanderthal and Cromagnon. This does fit in with our timetable which indicates cavemen being present 1,000,000 years ago upon the earth. The cavemen were actually the mutants, the remnants of this holocaust. When the Satonians left the planet earth they decided if they couldn't have it, neither could the Confederation -- so they attempted to destroy all humanity. ‘This was a tremendous blow to the Confederation because everything they had worked for was destroyed. It meant starting all over again. ‘Their obligation to those remaining earthmen was profound. Now they had to institute a whole new set of plans and try to work with these remnants so that hunan civilization could begin again.20 PROLOGUE ‘The ones that were evacuated from the planet and taken to the other store exhibited a remarkable change. Within nine months after being re- located, they reverted to MAN. In other vords, once renoved from earth's negative environment they started regaining the mental faculties normal to MAN. Meanwhile, the earth continued to experience change. At that partice ular period of time the earth went through a series of blows which were very discouraging to our space friends. Not only did the remaining hie wang have the tremendous physical devastation and destruction caused by the destruction of Atlantis to contend with, but the earth's magnetic field at that time chose to reverse itself. This was one of these cyc™ lic events. This was very unfortunate because it allowed another huge dose of cosmic radiation to pour in, which aggravated the mutation prob= fen still wore. Right on the heels of this cane the Glacial Age, because the weather patterns had changed. It was Like there was a series of punches being delivered to the earth and everything that the space Pricnde tried to do was being thwarted, in a sense. Also the earth, at that time, was wobbling pretty badly on its axis. Soltec explained vhat happened just prior to the demise of Atlantis ‘and Lemuria, The space friends had been in communication and hed trade agreenente vith the Atlanteans and Lemurians, and both civilizations had qeny scientific items that had been given them by the space friends~ Mhen they knew that massive destruction was going to occur and the vac” uation was planned, an effort was made to preserve some of the scientific Ged historical artifacts and records for a future tine when civilization on the planet would once again reach a state where these could be used. That is where the Atlantean time vaults come in. A lot of these things were put away in certain places, where they would renain, until some future time when they could be used again. Soltec then spoke about earth's second moon. The space friends had eveated a onal moon as an additional storage facility for the Atlan= teen's historical records and artifacts, prior to the destruction. This jeon was about a mile in diameter, It vas in an ellipsoid orbit which Took this moon about eight years to complete ite orbit around the earth. ke dts elosest point it is 9.3 million miles from the earth. Because it is that close and the orbit is centered around the earth, it isthe Second moon of the earth. It is still a satellite of the earth's even though it goes out and then comes back. Author's Note: It was not until 1964, ten years later, that this was verified. At that time Dr. Samuel Herrick at UCLA discovered this sec~ Sad soon, described the sane identical orbit, estimated its size as one Gile in diameter and came up with the sane figure of 9.3 million miles on its closest approach to the earth, and a cycle of every eight years. Dr. Herrick called this moon "Toro." Soltec continued his discussion of the events Following the destrucé tion of Atlantis. After the series of devastating blows to the earth, the space friends again came back and brought in nev types of grain, ‘Also, at that tine, they brought in a whole new type of plants and trees.PROLOGUE 21 Soltec mentioned, specifically, the bread fruit tree and the banana tree, so surviving humanity would have ready-made fruits which they could consune. Of course there was 2 shortage of animal life after these series of blows, and they had to have food. The space friends are the ones who brought these species to this planet. Authon's Note: I understand that botanists have never really figured out where the bread fruit tree or banana tree came from. There was no precursor to then from which they could have evolved. Again, the space friends did try to help the people of earth. They brought in, at that time, some of theix terra-forming experts who reshaped part of the planet to get rid of the devastation and nullify the radioactivity. As a result of this series of catastrophes which all happened about 1,360,000 B.C., there were many types of life forns that ‘became suddenly extinct, such as the dinosaurs and many other prehistoric creatures. The cavemen also disappeared at about this time. It took something Like 10,000 years for all of these events to occur. In the space friend's terns, 10,000 years is a short interval of time, Soltec said that the next time that the earth's magnetic field would change its polarity or reverse itself would be in the year 2150 A.D, But, he said, that will not present any problem as the planet earth at that time will be in a New Age and MAN will be here. MAN will prevent any adverse effects from occurring. Regarding the earth wobbling on its axis, the space friends decided they would have to stop that. That is when they decided to bring in their specialists and build the pyramids. The pyramids were motion stabilizers for the planet which eliminated the axial excursion, or the wobble, and stabilized the rotation of the planet. This was about 45,000 years age. The people they brought in to build the pyramids vere from the star system of Aldebaren. Several other functions were included, as well, which would benefit humankind. Author's Note: The Egyptian civilization would cone much later in time. The Pharaohs did not build the pyramids, at least not the great Pyramid. They built all of their pyramids on the equator of the planet. Right after this, however, mother nature created another surprise and the earth rolled. Tt rolled just enough that it moved the equator up thirty degrees. That is why the great pyramids of the world are located on the thirtieth degree of North Latitude today. This caused the Great Flood spoken of by Noah. When the earth phys~ ically rolled that thirty degrees, the oceans swept over the land. You might say this was another of the disasters.a ee ee 22 PROLOGUE originally the pyranide vere only designed to contro! the axial wob- bie of the earth, not to prevent the earth from physically rolling. How" pier, because Of thie event, additional devices were installed to pre Vent this from happening again. Again, there waa a series of inexplicable events that just kept happening co the earth which left the space friends puzrled. Just when Rhey had one thing solved, something else would cone along ‘Arter Soltec had finished thie historical outline, I turned the Line of questioning back to the chip itself, because of my curiosity, te 0 Glafned that this particular spaceship could travel at muitip! ee of the pyeed of light. He said the journey from Alpha Centauri to earth was a settie Jess than four hours, depending on how fast they wanted £o, #0, jittat iiinin our Solar system, to any of the planets, could easily be accomplished in less than an hour. 1 asked him about the pover plant of this ship, the engines, or what- evet, stevsaidceha shipicarcied'no/fveli supply, «He\ said! that) the: eneegy svete anip could draw upon vas almost) infinite in cerns of ite pote” rat tne anount of power the ship could draw upon was only Limited by tial. cluty to diseipate that pover. The dissipation of the power had sea aetd what they were drawing in’ and, that i+ where che/liaiting fae tor cane in. the energy they used vas all around them in apace. He described 2° as being the electronagnetic and électrostatic lines of Zorce thet Shey oe oer bent parallel fox a fzaction of «moment. Thi provided then all the energy they needed. Aboard thie particular space ship, they did have « small fusion gen” dcator, ad anonie generator which was likelaistercer motor.” 1f Se8T” ered the power to create a forcefield, which in turn, could bend rhe lines of force and release the energy they needed. 1 asked him how their forcefields differed from those of our science Eietion and he apparently knew about this, He said that their sagnetic ser Lig was a veaonating forceticld, Ee mentioned ther this force: sotg sould do's mamber of thiage... Te could) either, push oF welt 174 EMp'chcough space, depending on how they vere using it and cause the Se a eethange direction. Os, if could be used to pull ov push sf) Ob $EeE evay from or to the ship. This forcefield could slvo be vael ft Jeo Tele rays around the ship which would cause it to become Snvisi- ven sae eyes and, che sane thing could be done with radiation. Ta ae ee eer ieehey couldomakerdt, invieibae te radar erieny) ochar/fermiot Clectronic detection equipnent, as well. the vieible glow about the ship itself, or the forcefield, wee very digciaie to seein bright daylight as the glow is washed out by the cieeknding Lighting, But against a dark Background or at might you sor ciaee de easily. The reason such chips gloved different colore vas coud tee cscs in our atmosphere vere being ionized at different levels Of power, If the ship was dissipating energy, such as vhen accelerating of Peveing down, as it paesed through our atnosphere, it would cause oF ei raitkevent gasses to ionize and glow different energy levels. ‘As to the movenent of the vehicle, he mentioned that the reason TPROLOGUE 23 felt no movement at all was that since the ship itself, physically, was surrounded by a magnetic field, everything enclosed in that magnetic field lacked what we call inertia. As a result, we felt no sensation of movement, even though it was hurtling through space at a fantastic velocity. They did use a form of artificial gravity in order to estab lish what was up and down and to keep things from floating around inside the ship. The fact that the crew were enclosed in the magnetic field allowed the ship to make abrupt right-angle turns. A magnetic field cancels out the "G" forces because it cancels the inertia of anything inside the Held. Thus, they could make abrupt maneuvers and they would never feel it nor would it have any effect on them. The way the ship maneuvered as far as turning it or pointing it in different directions, etc., was that they could tilt the angle of the forcefield. For example, if they were leaving the earth the forcefield was actually opposing the earth's field and pushing it away. By controlling the angle of the field, in relation to the earth's magnetic field, the ship could move in any direction desired~ They could also change the polarity of the field around the ship. Tn other words, if the forcefield was acting like a north pole against another north pole for repulsion, they could change it to the opposite polarity and thus use it for attraction. He described how it worked on the earth. He said, "Your scientists are ayare of everything I am telling you because that is why the people . on your planet don't feel any sense of movement. And yet the planet earth is actually moving in three directions at once and no one on the surface detects this movement. This is because you are enclosed within the magnetic field of the planet itself." I told him that if I ever told people this story they would not be- Lieve me. Not only that, but they would probably lock me up and throw the key away. He said, "No, you won't run into that." He also said, "Never allow yourself to be put into a position where you are being forced to defend the information that you are receiving from us. You let the information stand on its own merits. Let it defend itself. Don't you come to its defense." Author's Note: I have tried to remember those words down through the years. I don't try to justify the information. In other words, if it is right it will be recognized as truth and if it's not, that also will become known, That is why I never attempted to get on the bandstand or sign affidavits that this is true, ete. He mentioned that as the work progressed, there would be people who would gradually come forth to help as we went along. He talked about future meetings that would take place. He also cautioned me about not getting bogged down in the details. He knew that I was detail oriented in my own thinking. He said I woulda 24 PROLOGUE have all the help neoded, on the details, yhen it was essential, when neve See is right. He kept stressing, "When the tim: is right.” Te tne tli a question of timing. All of the pieces had to fall into place setote any ‘of these thinge could heppen. He cautioned me not to mike cerertdonal statenente where I could be put on the spot, and then, if senevene was aheed of the schedule and nothing happened, J would be dis- credited. He mentioned that the work of The Solar Cross would blossom out ané that athens vould be involved. He talked of other groups, scattered tna g uhe world, that were doing other things, 211 of = helpful nature. Oro thine ne did say wae that very few of then would be doing the sane thing as Soler Cross. It might be similar, but not the sane identical thing. They had people doing éifferent things for ‘different reasons. About one o'clock in the morning, I seid, "Soltec, part of the message that you tranemicted earlier thio day etated thet there was going see a reaio communication with the other people in our group, at two Srelock in the morning. Do you supposé it would be possible for ne te Sag helio to then?" I thought 1 was being a little bit crafty. 1 sai, fay tela Like to tell them that I am all right because I am sure by now they are worried as they vould have found the abandoned truck.” Ferie. futaiy I hed thought to lock ic. The only problem I hed in ay sind was seecvtner deciding to drive the truck back to Detroit. T didn'e snow oy rar hig experience vas) going tofebdiandtso/ lead, ‘Selces, U Ebinle bverybody would be greatly relieved if you would let me at least say hello to them, He said, "Yee, you can say hello to them.” I said, “Thank you," and we went on talking. About 1:55 AdM., it now being near 2:00 A.M. Monday morning, he asked ne Ee accompany him to the desk in the center of the room. When T got there I said, "What are we supposed to dot” tle sale, Nye aze go ing’ to be communicating vith your friends in just a few moments. Sit down in the chair.” 1 looked around for « microphone and caid, "What do you talk into?” 1 thought he was going to hand ne something. He said, "You don't have 1 tna ne uaything, Just sit there and talk. They will hear you." que o'clock came and he said, "You can speak to them." Well, the Ciret thing Teald was, "HL, guys. This is Dick, Ian Q.K. 1 sm wich the boys." I had no sooner said this when one of the vision screens ene ney ecom we Lit up snd there, in full color, was a picture of ay six friends eitting in their car at the cemetery. this waa incredible. I had been an electronics technician, T had ‘an FOC license and been a han radio operator. I thought I knew © great Seal about electronics, But whatever it wae that these people vere . Geing to produce this picture was going through the roof of that 2ste- weit veer if it didn't exist, because I could see the people seated in The back seat as well as the front seat. There were six people in the tne aThey were perfectly illuminated and yet they were out in Phe ceratryside where it was pitch black. There were no street Lights. Jer they were well lit up, and vere in beautiful color, 1 hed never seen color like that. Renenber, color television vas just coming in,PROLOGUE 25 in the middle 1950's, The view was from the front of the automobile at fan angle of about 45 degrees, looking down. Well, I was kind of speech~ less for a second, and I said, "Hey, guys. Guess what? You're on tele~ vision. Right away I knew if anybody was ever going to beliewe it, now was my only chance. So I said, "Don, you're in the driver's seat and you've got your brovn jacket on. Henry, you're sitting in the back seat end you're wearing a red necktie and a blue shirt." I told the voman what she was wearing and everybody else, as fast as I could say it, because just about that time I felt a hand on my shoulder. I Looked around and Soltee was looking at me with the type of look that said, my friend you have gone too far. He said, "Richard, I will speak to then now." T said, "I will see you guys later," and I got up. The image stayed on the screen all the time and I could see them all leaning forward listening intently to the radio. Soltec sat down and he talked with them for maybe two or three minutes. He ended the conmunica~ tion, but he did not set a new schedule for another communication. He told them that I would be all right. Well, it was two o'clock Monday morning. All of our Little group worked for a living, including those six people down in the car. As soon as the message ended and they had been reassured that I was all right, they did the next logical thing. They turned around and drove back to Detroit so they could get some sleep. No mention had been made as to when I was going to come back. They just knew I was with the space friends and that apparently T was all right. ‘The image faded on the television screen. Soltec and I walked back over to the chairs we had been sitting in previously and talked for a Little while longer. At about 2:30 A.M., he gently took me by the arm again and said, "Richard, it is time to leave." He steered me toward the door. He talked with me as we walked down the hallway, to the outer rim of the ship; and when I got there the other fellow was there, the hatchway was open, the stairs were down. Soltec said, "Richard, we will see you again." With that, he turned and walked away. Well, I had no choice. I went down the stairs. 1 jumped off the last step onto the ground. It was 2:30 A.M. and it was pitch black. 1 turned and within just a few seconds the vehicle started to move away. Now that it was pitch black ourside, I could see a very pale violet bluish haze all around the It tilted slightly, and in about four or five blinks of the eye, it disappeared from sight -- without a sound. was left standing there in the countryside and the first thing L looked for was the truck. It was still parked where I had left it. My partner apparently figured I was going to have to get back to Detroit ‘somehow. I went over, unlocked the truck, got in it, started the engine and drove avay, I was going back to Detroit, leave the truck at the ‘office, get in my automobile and go home and get some sleep. To say I was excited was putting it mildly. I thought Soltec had deen extremely clever in maneuvering the parting, the way he did, be~ cause he didn't give me one chance to object to it. If I had known, T would probably have argued with him quite a bit. I was all set to stay.a == eRe EV VOTO N NCS ee SR A EE SL md oe 28 PROLOGUE Iwas a single man. I had no attachments other than a mother and @ father, and 1 am sure had he allowed it, I could have communicated with them in somé way. I was ready to go and stay with these people. So the departure came rather suddenly, at 2:30 A.M. I thought, “tomorrow is going to be a busy day." Well, my friends who had left shortly after two o'clock, had stopped at a coffee shop on the way back. They were all excited about the radio contact, my being with the space friends, ay talking to them, and their appearance on television. So they had stopped at a coffee shop on their way back to Detroit for twenty minutes or 90, ‘qwo blocks avay from the office, T sav a car coming up quickly be~ hind me, blinking its lights. Lo end behold it was the group in their car. They had just caught up with me because of their stop. They pulled me over, police car style. I jumped out of the truck, they Tunped out of the car, we kind of hugged each other, shouted, yelled, ‘and all that. We got back in our vehicles and went back to the office. We stayed up all aight. I didn't go to sleep until four o'clock the next afternoon. Nobody went to work that day, everybody stayed and talked. Well, that is the experience of the trip. But, in a way, it was just a beginning. Something fantastic had happened. As I said, T Thought enough of the experience that I inmediately sat down, when the initial excitement wore off, and started making notes. I wrote down everything I could remember, On the third and fourth day I was still busy seeibbling notes. I contacted George Hunt Williamson, the fellow who, in a sense, started the vhole thing, and told him what had happened. He aid, NI'LL be right there." He arrived a couple of days later. Rick was going to be in town for a few days, so our group was meeting over at weriend's house, people by the name of Quennel. I then discovered That Rick Williasson was a trance channel. Up until that time I didn't know what a channel was, but Rick was « trance-medium and he apparently had told these Ladies about this and they had prevailed upon bin to channel -- to bring through some kind of a message from the space friends So that night Williamson was lying on a couch at one end of their living room. He put himself into a trance. Suddenly his voice changed ‘and out came a very strange sounding voice vho identified himself by the name of Phillip. his Phillip told us he was on another planet sone place out in space, somewhere out in the galaxy. And he proceeded to tell us all about it. Well, I listened and I guess I was stunned. Aftervards 1 asked Rick what had happened. He said, "Well, T just kind of let myself go, black out, and the next thing I know 1 an waking up." Then he said, "I have to listen to the tape to find out what was said," And I said, "Have you done this before?" He said, “Quite a few times. However, I'don't Like the public to know that I do it because they will think T am sone kind of a nut, I have a professional reputa~ tion to protect. I'm an anthropologist, a good one." He just didn't want people to know that he was a trance-medium.PROLOGUE 27 Well, over the next couple of weeks he was channeling every night. There were a lot of communications that came through, and we tape- recorded everything. one evening I had worked late at the office, 1 went over to the Quennel's home and, because I was late, there were no chairs left. However, there was a lot of space on the floor. They had « very large living toon. Rick was channeling down at the far end of the room, stretched out on the couch. The only place that I found to sit was next to a baby grand piano in the front room, Well, this communication kept on and on. It was an hour and a half long, and frankly it wasn't very interesting to me. So I stretched out underneath the piano and went to sleep. It seemed like I had just closed my eyes when suddenly I was being shaken. It startled me, and I sat up very quick and bumped my head against the bottom of the piano. 1 truly saw stars. The lights were on, everybody was cunning around talking at once, and I couldn't figure out what was happening. After a few moments, I found out what it was all about. It seems that after I had gone to sleep everybody noticed that there was another voice coming from the other end of the room, that was saying exactly the same thing that Williamson was saying -- just like listening to stereo. This voice was coming from underneath the baby grand piano. Well, they turned the Lights on and discovered that Iwas repeating, simultancously, the same message that Williamson w receiving at the other end of the room -~ and from the same individ- val talking through Williamson. Let me explain chat I wasn't in a trance. I had merely gone to sleep. I had never tried to receive any kind of a telepathic communication in my life, The group had made a recording. They had moved the microphone down next to me so they could record it. They played it back and said: Listen to this. There was this strange voice, that sounded a little bit like mine, but not the same. It was the same message, word for word, that Rick received, and it was perfectly synchronized. Both of us were saying the sane thing at the same time. Well, that kind of shook me up. Two days later, Williamson had to leave Detroit. And of course, guess who had to take his place on the couch. I thought, "What the heck, I'll try." Since Williamson got his messages lying down on the couch, I thought that was the way you had to get them. $0 I would stretch out on the couch and get nice and comfortable, close my eyes and suddenly somebody would start talking. The only difference was this. I thought, "Now wait a minute. I don't want to go through what he goes through —- all the whistles, grunts, sounds, ete. And besides, I want to hear what they are saying and not have to Listen to the tape afterward. I would like to be awake, not unconscious, not asleep, not in a trance. Also, if there is anything they say that I don't agree with, I would like to have the prerogative to terminate the communication." I had heard enough about so-called "bad entities," that I was being @ little bit cautious.28 PROLOGUE ‘The space friends agreed to these conditions. I would just lie dow, close my eyes, but Iwas wide awake, Suddenly, it was just as if I had stepped aside mentally. My lips would move a little bit and suddenly out would come a voice. They asked permission to use ny larynx and I said sure, as long as it didn't hurt. The voice didn't sound like me very much. It had kind of a strange quality, and I thought, "Boy, this is really weird." Well, that was the start of what we would have to call telepathic communications, because they were not trance communications. It was one-way telepathy. They would do all the talking, using ay larynx, and T would just sit there and do all the listening. We tape-recorded everything said. In tvo months Williamson came back to Detroit and he said, "Richard, let's go out to California. Los Angeles is vhere all the action is." ‘hat was a period when all the flying saucers were seen on the West Coast, patrolling the San Andreas fault. Everybody and his brother, in California, were seeing flying saucers. Every night, it seemed, you could run outside and see a flying saucer go zipping by. So he said, “Come on, everything is going on out there." There were some people he wanted to introduce me to and he wanted me to tell them my story. So I told him fine, I didn't have anything to do, My partner and Thad been thinking about getting out of the television repair busi— ness anyvay. It was getting to be a hassle and, in those days, every~ body thought television repairmen were crooks -~ particularly if you had to take the set to the shop to repair it. If you couldn't fix ic in the house, you were highly suspect. I was getting a little tired of that. We drove to California and stopped at place called Giant Rock, which was way out in the middle of the desert, 17 niles from nowhere, to neet a fellow by the name of Van Tassel. I was introduced to him and he said, "Richard, we are having @ convention here in a couple of months." He told me that two or three thousand people came to these conventions and he thought I should tell the story of what happened to ne in Detroit. Williamson was going to be one of the speakers in addition to Dan Fry, George Adanski and Orpheo Angelucci. Williamson had to go into Los Angeles and visit his publisher, and he asked me to come along because there were some people there he wanted me to meet. So we drove into Los Angeles and went by his publishing house. ‘That evening, we drove to the hone of Mr. and Mrs. Myers in Pacific Palisades. There I met Harry (Gayne) and Roberta Myers. The Myers and I quickly became good friends. In fact, a few days later Willianson left and I stayed with the Myers for awhile, They discovered I could communicate with the space people ~~ I discovered they were ardent UFO investigators. So we had a mutual interest, to say the least. I went ahead and got an apartment in Los Angeles, found a job and went to work. The Myers and I met with each other almost every night. ‘That started the third phase of our activity which is bringing thie information, The Solar Gross information, before the general public.CHAPTER ONE "EARTHMAN GOME HOME" December 7, 1955 Solar Cross Tape # 2-A By: Hatonn Greetings, my friends, I am Hatonn. I greet you at this tine in ox der to tell you of early life upon your planet, as recorded by the crystalgraph, a scientific instrument, we of the Confederation use. Thi instrument, I mention, can record up to 200,000 hours of data upon a sphere of what you call quartz, no larger than one inch in diameter. The events I will now relate were taken from these recordings and observations of your planet. Life, in its first known essence upon your planet, did not evolve from the lower forms as is thought by many of your people. ft was im ported originally from the planet you call Jupiter. At that time MAN, who came from the Adamic race, was placed upon your surface. He was a god-like being, endowed with powers that few mortals would ever possess. His mate, as conceived by Our Infinite Creator, was not formed from a portion of his anatomy as stated in your Holy Works, but was delivered unto him as a helpmate. She also, was possessed of teenendous powers, Together, they fostered a race of mighty beings. An age of grandeur prevailed, Then, due to your infant planet's vibratory state, great degradation ensued. “A period of abomination existed. Man (humans) with their god= Like powers, created forms of animal and beast. For sensual experience, humans and their primary creations mated. A period of great darknes enveloped your earth. Upon viewing this form of human degradation -- that which was conceived in love and beauty -- it was thought by we of the Confederation that a complete reorientation of your planet's axis would be called for. However, we learned a lesson ourselves at that time, Believing it our jurisdiction to destroy the abominable creations of human and beast, we Found that the Infinite Creator, in just wisdom, entered the scene and caused the period you call the first glacial age to come about. Degen- erate man was destroyed by a power greater than us all. We learned not to be hasty in our judgments and actions. The One that is All saw our error and corrected it in a just way. Once again, the earth was barren except for the remnants of this prior age, which had themselves committed no acts of abomination, Their powers though were gone forever. Tribes of intelligent man (humans) gathered together and again started building towards the future. These were not the scattered tribes thought by your historians to exist prior to the neolithic period, but indeed a simple and humbled man integrated with his fellows. This was the foundation of the race of Lemurians. Across the continents a short period later, the people gathered then selves together, a race separate from the Lemuriane and evolved a cul~ ture. They were called Atlanteans.2 CHAPTER ONE For many thousands of years both races evolved ever onward and up ward. Great was the civilization at that time. The Lemurians lived humbly upon the land and the land nourished them. The Atlanteans cher- ished the seas and air and rapidly nurtured an infant menory of seience into a colossus, which provided them with transportation through the seas and craft capable of atmosphere flight. The Lemrians, using the forces of earth and fire, also developed a science and culture. For many, many years, the two lived in peace and love with one another. Then the old powers of pride, lust and ego reared its head again and within the Atlantean people there came men who called themselves Atlans. These men used the superior science of Atlantis and caused strife between the tvo races. Generation upon generation had lived in peace and love and had overlooked the problem of "Light" attracting Darkness, The Satonians, a race of space people evolved on a negative plane of existence, arrived upon your planet and usurped the controls of government and seienee. Their infiltration had been stealthy and passed unnoticed. They called themselves Atlans. War between Atlantis and Lemuria came about after intolerable conditions, We of the Confederation, who had visited your planet and en— tered into trade with these two races, observed with growing alarm the frightening conditions. Powerless, as ve were to intervene because of the Galactic Pax regulations concerning our intervention in any planet's affairs; we, nonetheless, petitioned the Saturn Tribunal, our law guard- n for this sector of space, that we might be of service to the people of earth. As the Tribunal's emissaries witnessed the unleashing of hor- rific powers of destruction wielded by the Atlans against the Lemurians, a consent for evacuation of the forces of "Light" and Truth from earth was ordered, since the earth's peoples had not initiated this strife. At once, the Seven Cities of Shan, each capable of caring for 10,000 people, were moored outside your solar system. Their transport craft Landed upon your surface, Those people of the Atlanteans and Lemurians, who held the principles of "Light" and Love, were removed by our craft to Venus and thence to other areas of Confederation controlled space. The Satonians, furious by this action of ours, ordered the immediate destruction of both continents. Then, after turning the forces of the dreaded hydrogen vril rays from their nuclear blasts upon the earth's greatest civilizations, left in their craft and returned to their ovn galactic system beyond the constellation of Orion. The remains of earth's warring factions, left in the wake of the destruction which sank both continents, wandered to the land area you now call South America and established the ancient civilizations you call the Incan; meaning in our solar tongue "the lonely ones.” Perhaps, ny friends, you who have vision can see the drama of the past attenpting to take place again in your present time. Ne, however, shall not let this take place. ‘The tine is drawing near when once again we, your brothers, shall greet you. A reunion many of us have waited for. I depart now beloved ones, and in so doing say this to you: "oh people of earth, come home! come home! I am Hatonn. Adonai, vasu, barragus. weeCHAPTER ONE 3 "Zo MEN OF EARTH January 11, 1956 Solar Cross Tape # 1-A By: Korton, Voltra Greetings to you, the people of earth. I am known among my people by the name of Korton. 1 am from the planet which in our language is called Masar. I am in charge of a conmunications network which relays information from our planet, either directly or by means of relaying it through our spacecraft which your people have named flying saucers. 1 wish fo introduce to your people another, who is called Voltre. Voltra is from the planet which you call Venus. Greetings people of earth. I am called Voltra as my brother Korton, mentioned. I take this time to extend to all of the people upon the planet earth, the greetings of all of us whom you have seen in your skies in what you have called flying saucers, but which in reality are space~ craft. My friends, for you the people of earth are our friends, Perhaps you have asked why we ave visiting your planet? I will try to answer this in away which you will understand. All of my remarks to you at this time, I shall try and make readily understandable by your language concepts. We are visiting your planet for several very important reasons. We are interested in the advancement your scientists have made in the field of nuclear energy. We have in the past witnessed other planets vhere this power of nature was discovered and used. Oftentimes, it has been used constructively for the benefit of those peoples. More often, however, it hae been used as a means of destruction, as a means of gaining power -- power over other people. This, my friends, is the situation as we have observed it upon your pianet, Lt has been used as a club over the heads of all your peoples, Little do your scientists really know what they are toying with. The re~ sult of those radiations now present in your atmosphere in large quanti Sies from the atomic tests which you have conducted have caused this great anount of radiation. (1946 - 1958) This radiation is very destructive and in many ways it can cause a great inerease in the numbers of cases dealing with various forms of insanity. fe has rather a disturbing effect upon your circulatory systen, particularly the veins and also the heart. The other effect is « gradual poisoning of your entire (body) systems by contamination of foods which you eat and consume. This, my friends, is aot a healthy situation. We have a device which we have used many times since the year 1947, of your time, and that device is what has popularly been called a green fireball. This green fireball is a scientific device of our making which is capable of neutralizing dangerous amounts of radiation in your atmosphere. Your scientists will confirm what I am saying when I mention that there are eddy currents in your atmosphere, much Like those which exist along your shorelines where the water reaches certain bays and inlets and, therefore, is restricted in its travel and accumulates all manner"7. 4 GHAPTER ONE of debris. Your atmosphere contains similar conditions. The debris erat harmful co you at this tine is atomic residue radiation, That is one reason why we have visited your planet Another reason ie the face that in the davices you have called by” drogen bonbs, you have cone very close several tines to completely orogens etag and diaiacegrating your entire planet. On both of these ettasions, we have been forced to neutralize those devices: This, we did for two reasons: One, to save your pleaet £508 anni- Lilucion, twos tol keepitielatgectevo£ euch, anjanninilacion G0 affect ing other planets within your Seler System. "he, cataclysmic changes an erecta be present in the structure of yout Soler Systee and ours see ere ecteeuseus Xt wel eure eo) lose yencyplanck tee grightful veut H® So you can see we are mich interested in this matter of nuclear meer et youl have: wadel->\Fowavery-these are: duet sbversh 7el07" why we have cone. ‘gnortly, due to outside cosmic influences vhich sre upsetting, even eo ein rc eos planst te natural axis, neve are 59258 2 be rather ae Ts eelegiecl eheuges in your, peoeretby. Certain) lead Soe Sy Silay to be covered) by water. Certain’ area which cf7 Sot covered by going vet be uncovered and ba Lond arcan. At thie tine stets if by our ware Tey icine av ier Eo peaviwakls Cy) yoursearthiaay Serersai {17 north mee ve iroler of, a@ you have « scans of expressing it) S37 of its ae eer eae cours vould reeulbiin, complet ceteeesoPn Se the sur~ Tete of your planet. Civilization, a8 you nov knew ity would be com stately semcLinued: This, we do nde with Co leppes Therefore, by pletely dewohitience, of which your scientists can only dream Ye ooh seat cing to ehvart this happening. We will prevent, if 4f all possible, euch a condition. TL wisn to state chat ve have an organization of many, nity planets ‘and bf pany Solar Syetens and of 4 number far too Largo count of ane our galaxies. We have a type of organization which we call the Veliereal confederation. This is a form cf goveranesr However, each Uenber of this Confederation is allowed perfect freedom as long ae its mea eece eforte axe ained at the service it can render © those about it who need it. ye have certain ragulacions we_ abide) by, much in the ¢ome, 00) ° you have cartain Lava. These regulations ve Hee 1% book which is you have *etaerie paz, Yeu, we pave booko aleo. Ne de 00° ee ate my cheas/ cules’ wiloh we, open a majoricy decktions DS formulated Since they are for the good of all of us. No one individual Solar System, planet, star or e105) is shown preference within our code, All are equal, sud Yar Mt have many, many Pevitizations, some very advanced. By this, * neat, the civilization Se eee ge present upon che planet you call Venue if ntl °8 highly pro- greseed as that civilization which is now ‘existing on the nearby planet sreveed ny you call Procyon, Theat is a civilizarten which in our ter~ Cfnology, could be considered half a willics yeer® ahead of even ours. Fnyour standards, T might mention chat we of Venus o=¢ perhaps only BY Jo years in cdvance of your science. This, people of earth, does 5,000 Yetle us €0 become egetietical in dealing with your people be- qause, after all, given the same educational fadvancenents, the sameCHAPTER ONE 5 knowledge, you are entirely as intelligent as ve. We have only the ad~ vantage of a nore advanced educational means. I should add also, that our intentions toward you, the people of earth, are entirely friendly. We have mo wish to take over your government, to rule your people. We have quite enough of our own problems to contend with. We wish only te be able to share with you in the future certain scientific techniques and certain cultural and educational ad~ vancenents. Your achievements in evolution and technology have alnost reached a point where this is possible. Soon your people will be entitled to membership. We of the Universal Confederation maintain @ constant surveillance of your planet. We have millions of our craft within 10,000 niles of your surface. This you may find hard to believe. I do not believe 80, Though, when I mention chat on just our planet alone, which is Venus, we have over ten million spacecraft. If you will add up the number available in this Solar System, you would have close to 500 million. So, you see, we really have only a few ships concerned with your inmediate prob- len. There are people in space who are not all friendly. I mention this only to say to you that aot all people who are space people have your best interest at heart. There are certain planets and there are certain galaxies which contain people whom we would term hostile. ‘These people ave achieved various forms of space travel. They have attained access to your planet in the past, and can still do so. I might edd, though, that we watch their craft whenever they are found in this area of space. We try to keep tabs on their activities. Wore often, we are successful. Sometimes we ave not. I wish to say to you that those people whom you have observed in ships in your atmosphere are entirely physical human beings. They are men and vomen very much like yourselves. We are capable of Landing at any time upon your surface. Soon, however, when certain conditions do exist upon your surface in various forms of government and in various sociological changes, our landings will be imminent. When we do land, we will step from our craft and extend to you, the pecple of earth, friendship. We ask nothing of you in return, only that we be friends. We wish to exchange with you, information. If, in the near future, after the landings have been accomplished, you wish to enter into com meree or trade with our people, that would be highly desirable and could no doubt be arranged. I would mention also that we have not at any time committed an overt act of aggression towards your people. We have not deliberately caused any accidental crashes or committed any happenings which could be construed as destructive. We wish you to know this. That is why we are stating it. And now, my friends, I find I must leave. I shall return again, however, and speak with you. Soon, very soon, we hope to have the opportunity to greet you in @ manner which will forever dispel any doubts which you might have concerning our intentions. For you see, my friends, we who are your brothers in space have a common allegiance vith you, We have many, many topics which we feel would be of great interest to your peoples and in the very near future, we will see that these topics are presented to you.6 CHAPTER ONE Now, E must leave. 1 extend to all of you, you who are the people of earth, our greetings, I am Voltra, Adonai, vesu, ay brothers. ka "MON-KA AND MERKU SPEAK" February 12, 1956 Solar Cross Tape # 1-8 By: Mon-Ka, Merku Greetings my brothers. I amMerku. Ny purpose in speaking is to relay this information. We of the Confederation do have a purpose in speaking with you in this manner. T have before me a device which is capable of adjusting the forces of unbalance which exist in the human body. The effects of this device are most helpful in polarizing the electronic cell nature of the body, thereby creating a new force and a general betterment in the condition of health. This device will be made available to your people and to all of che people upon your surface. It can and will alleviate the suffering of a great many. In this device, we utilize a source of actinic light which is dis- persed through a systen of primary light filters. The emanations of this light fall in the spectrum of visible and betatone the invisible spectrum. Second order energies, which these emanations consist of, are what is responsible for the polarization of the electrical charges existing in all cellular life. The condition of balance that is brought about will result in a new feeling of health and well-being. Since this device is shortly to make its appearance, it is desirable that we mention the fact that there is no danger of over-exposure to those second order energies. Therefore, ir is entirely safe in use. The human body can accept only so much of this radiation. ‘the renainder is thrown off. Be aware, my brothers. Soon, the detailed plans shall be in your possession, men of earth. And now I step aside to let another speak with you. One moment. Greetings my friends. Tam Mon-ka. It is my purpose to answer sév- eral questions more than ay brother Voltra had the time for in our previous communication. You have asked why have we not contacted people in a position to inform your people? I will state with the utmost sincerity that, for example, your President (Eisenhower) has spoken with our representatives and so have certain of your scientists, But, beyond this, we have spoken to all of your world leaders (prior to 1956). Some choose to listen to our statements and believe. Others, un~ fortunately, choose to civeuavent our offers by not informing their people of these contacts. Mankind on your planet is eager to know the truth. It is a pity that a few would decide that the majority should remain ignorant.CHAPTER ONE 7 My friends, power is the holy entity worshipped by most of the earth's peoples. The way to this power is contained in a monetary system, Gurrency on your planet can buy even justice and equality. Those corrupt interests, which control your planet's finances, also control your people. By obtaining interests in your newspapers, radio and television stations and all news disseminating services, knowledge is quite easily withheld from the people, Money, however, is only a stepping stone, so to speak, to the major interests of power. By this I mean electrical power, atonic power. Power and energy control all of the nations upon your surface. Gould it be that if visitations from space and visitors from space, in opening negotiations with your world governments, had offered power and energy from a source that was universal and could not be charged for ~- do you, my friends, believe this could be the reason verification of our presence has been withheld from the people? Again, could it be conceived of, that certain power interests in hearing of this and foreseeing their opportunity to make a profit upon the earth's greatest comodity, would see it fast disappearing ‘and see also @ collapse of an already shaky monetary system? Again, could it be that these powerful individuals and interests would not care to have this happen? For if, my friends, your people were in~ forned that unlimited power was available to them free of charge, shall we say, it would immediately shake your economic system to the core -- a huge financial loss to some. Would you rest easier, my friends, {£ 1 positively stated that we of the Confederation had made such offers in the field of science to your leaders? Would it be of interest to all people upon your planet to know that several of our craft are in the possession of your Government? That in examinations of these craft that they know we have such power land can control and use it. Does it seem plausible to you, my friends, that in order to further conceal the truth, that today, aircraft re~ sembling our craft are being manufactured so that the people can be convinced that they are only seeing experimental products of these government s? Do these governnents, knowing of our power, think that they can use it for destruction, or to power their ovn craft, or to make a profit on it? Do they dare assume that we would let anyone misuse a power Of the Creator? Might this not explain why there is such an interest and race to establish artificial satellites equipped with television to see what the space people are going to do? How many of their ships surround your planet? Do you think that we would engage in such a childish action as chastising your government for not cooperating, by being hostile to the earth's peoples? We, uy brothers, are here to aid and to help you. Therefore, we contact now the people of earth in preference to world leaders who are pavns to factions, parties and interests. Enlightenment of earth's peoples ~~ the truth is what we present. I trust T have been of service by this little talk. I ask you aot to believe what I have stated, but to be sincere and believe in truth and love. Let your intelligence convince you if what has been stated is truth.8 CHAPTER ONE I ehall return and speak again to you, my brothers. Now, I must leave you, It has been my privilege to speak. I am Mon-Ke. Vasu, my brothers. ReRER “MARS, THE RED PLANET" February 21, 1956 Solar Cross Tape # 3-A By: Mon-Ka Greetings my brothers. I am Mon-Ka. My Little talk at this time concerns my planet and your close neighbor, Masar, or as you call it, Mars. As I stand and survey the view from our platform here at KOR, the main communication center, I shall describe a few points of inter~ est. To my left is a chain of high peaks known to your astronomers as the chain of mountains separating the Regio sector from the area knon as Ucopia. KOR is located upon a high plateau in the north Regio sec~ tor. Before me stretches the lower ranges and then the desert area. Your people have wondered about the reddish color of our planet. This is because of the presence of what you call iron oxides and strontium oxides in large quantities in our soil. Our planet was formed four and a half billion years ago, as was your earth. The formation of this solar system is much older than your scientists expect. We have had civilization existing for two million years. Crude at first, as is natural, but highly advanced at present. We have had three great civilizations in our history. Our present one is most noteworthy. I might mention that our atmo= sphere is quite breathable, although slightly less dense than your own. It would require a three-day conditioning on one of our craft im your atmosphere before we could pass amongst your people with com fort. Our life here is quite moderate. Our people only vork about four hours each day. The balance of their time is spent most profil ably in recreation, study or leisure. In describing our architecture; the domed structure is most prom- iment, although in a few instances we resort to a more artistic form as circular ramps and towers. Our industry is quite extensive, and ve rank second only to Centaurus as a producer of spacecraft. We supply about 45 percent of all the craft of the Confederation in this sector. ‘The manufacture of these craft is, in most cases, accomplished by thought-controlled automation industry under our planet's surface ‘The larger craft are conceived in space near the orbit of the planet you call Jupiter. The reason for this is the abundance of certain metals upon that planet which we use in great quantity. None of our people work in factories or plants, such as we find to be the case on your planet. Only technicians are required to see that the prime functions are performed which occupies only a small amount of their time. Our comerce consists of exchanging services for goods or products. Thexe are no poor people on Masar as each individual is endowed with a fixed anount of exchangeable credit for their life span. WeCHAPTER ONE 9 have transcended all disease and illness on our own planet. Therefore, we do not need any medical profession, except in our craft, to analyze new forms encountered in our many expeditions to other planets. Trans portation on our planet is by means of gravitron controlled vehicles or matter transmittal (teleportation), and by this latter means, we are able to go anywhere on or below our surface instantly. Our Government is comprised of a Council, selected from the people by means of examinations, which consume two years of your time. Any citizen from our planet is allowed to take these tests. Each individual is graded according to their naturel ability and classed accordingly. They perform work or services, along with others in their own social level. This way, we have no misfits. No one is expected to perform more than their abilities permit. Should they wish to reach a higher status, they merely re-enter the tests and proceed. This may be done at any time during their lives. We call our Council the "Order of the White Cross," as each member bears that symbol as the highest rating attainable in our system. We find but one “White Gross” Being out of every 200 thousand of our population. Different color symbols represent the orders lower in educational and social status. These groups intermingle socially by not wearing their symbols, Therefore, there is no class/social distinction. Occupations are entered into voluntarily and do not demand more than is expected from an individual's examination grades. Our chil- @ren are taught in their hones or, if they prefer, in classrooms by audio and visual means. Their lessons are presented once a week and they have the remainder ot that week in which to submit their answers. The grading is dependent upon the correct solutions and by what means the child arrived at these solutions. By this method we discover children who exhibit outstanding abilities. It is not uncommon to find natural telepaths who do not need physi- eal devices by which to communicate with one another. Other outstanding mental, and as you say, psychic abilities are also discovered by this means. Each child receives instruction until they teach an age of fifteen years. They are then permitted to enter the tests at once or, to enter a specialized field of learning for a five-year period and then undertake the tests, This education is donated by the Council and is not dependent upon donations or taxation of the people. Rather, it is a public service rendered by the Government and no charges or fees are required. There is no conceivable limit to an individual's education. ‘They may progress as far as they desire. I might mention here, that an individual's mortal life span can be extended to a period of 400 years by means of a revitalizing ray machine we have developed. Signs of an age equivalent to 50 years of your age occur only in the last years of their lives. They may then enter a disintegration chamber where their physical bodies are reduced to the base elements. There is no fear of death, as you call it, anong our people. They are thoroughly aware of this transition process from material into etheric realms and of a continued existence of their im- mortal being or spirit. However, I shall not digress into this further, as it will be presented in greater detail in a future talk. Our arts and sciences are well advanced beyond your concepts at Present. But, I will mention that the music you hear in the background10 CHAPTER ONE was presented to your people fron our people, by means of « device cape bie Of inpressing the minds and brains of certain individuals, vio have tie grad on your surface in the past and also the present. Shall we Say existed giveguals vere inspired, The fundanental structure of this music int pesically simplified for presentation to your people and composers. our planet is not nearly as dreadful a place, as your astrononers 2Fe discovering, Me really have several advantages over the people on eorth (iecevGoue’ forms of physical conditions. The canalé, as seen through we telescopes are really canals. They form an intricate vay of 34 Yetputing water from our polar regions to other regione» T realize 7 have couted many questions to arice in your minds, and many topics con” haveing our life Have not been mentioned. These shall be discussed in aeaee Ofoture. would suggest that a period of waiting be endured for a brief while. ‘tae social and educational system might well be considered by your people, It is not beyond your present capabilities to establish. | Tt veera be expressed ae the method to be employed in what many Of your people have referred to as “The New Age." Shall we say chee provoking Phenghe ie one of our most pleasant pastines, There is much to Learn, stoete of earth, before your planet can regain its rightful place in veep tcoler eystem. A reorganization of several of your basic concepts, settally and scientifically, will be necessary before much further prog” sese will be attained. It is the Confederation’s purpose to present The iMformation necessary for your planet to bring this New Age into being. To bring our thoughts forvard at this time, we of the Confederation do nee appreve of any governnent existing on your surface. Neither of Sour present two world povere (the United States and Ruseie) ie men yetter than the other. ‘The dawn of reason is shortly to come about» Sue disapproval in this does not mean we wish to interfere. You miy our disePeroebling along, groping for the truth ae long as you desire. Galy, when your people will Lift their eyes from the ground and look tals Noir gvening ekies and note the orderliness of the universe, snd inte {mrortant still, the creative consciousness behind it, then and paly then will you conceive of what law and government consist oF, Spicitual avarenees ie whet ie lacking, Tt has started with a fev. Seon, it will extend to groups and then to masses, until finally brotherhood of MAN, mot nations, will exist on earth. our love for you, people of earth, ie much deeper than you think or tenlize, Perhaps it is necessary to be stern and to speak harshiy- force is the only thing which you appear able to conceive of. Would Fovtee be much better to try love and peace; brotherhood of all men sNerguhere upon your surface? My friends, ve of the Confederation — funy, many planets —- love your people even though you do not evens 88 yet, drean of the magnitude of our existence. You have been told, pro” wit of earth, by none other than our brother Hatonn, te cone hone. | Tt Bight be well for you to think about this. We are your brothers. He Taeend to do only what the Creator has in mind for your planet. We work together. Let us see how you work together. Now, I find T must leave. My harshness and abruptness ate per” nape only necessary in order to impress upon you the seriousness of wher you think is right. I am Mon-Ka, Adonai, my brothers.CHAPTER ONE 11 "MALDER - THE LOST PLANET" March 8, 1956 Solar Cross Tape # 2-3 By Mon-Ka Greetings my brothers. I am known as Mon-Ka. I would speak with you at this time about an incident which happened during your early biblical tines. As your scientists know, they count but nine planets in your Solar System. In actuality, there are twelve -- nine of them visible, one destroyed and two not yet discovered. The one destroyed is our purpose in speaking. In your Holy Works, there is a reference to Lucifer, the Son of the Moxning, the Fallen Angel. The Lucifer that is spoken of vas a planet located between the two planets you call Mars and Jupiter. It is called, in our Language, Maldek, Tongue of Fire. Maldek was the fifth planet from your Sun. It existed for many millions of years. Its civilization was greater than that of your earth even in this day. Iwill now attune the erystalgraph recording to the ediphone, a device capable of converting our thoughts and language into your language. A Confederation Chronononitor is describing the tine sequence. One ‘moment please. Teritia Maldek, elonto solex polita. Our tears, Oh Mi dek, long come, Solar friend. Alas, Oh Maldek, vhy didst thou not foresce thine own disaster? Oh Vadur! Why shouldst thou lash thy sister city Karna with such fury? ‘Tis thine own lust and hungers which have cone about and caused this strife -- thine own life, devoid of Our Radi- ant One's "Light." Didst we not plead for thine governnent to hesitate and to arbitrate this matter? We plead with thee now to not use the vril force, for destruction will be thy revard. Listen, Oh Maldek, we implore thee not to use this force. “Ever we, your brothers, have seen the great Fire-Tongue Lighting the heavens for our system. ‘Tis not your right to wield such fury unto one another. Maldek! Oh Maldek! Do not de thie! You have one period left. We plead you will reconsider. Do not your scientists tell you to stop before it is too late? To lose thy planet would not help From all space, Oh Maldek, we call and say STOP! STOP before it is too late. We stand by to help thee at this moment, our brothers. We avait only your call. “oh Maldek, Light of Sol! Why have you fought in this manner? Thy troubles have risen from thy own pleasures, thy disregard of Our "Light," the Creator, Thou can have no true growth without this "Light!" Oh, Maldek, thy time draws short. Forgive one another. Dare not use the vril rays. We call you, Oh Maldek. Heed us while there is yet time. Thy life has been beautiful and bright, thy cities proud, thy people long cared for. That your moment should pass this way is not called for. Listen, Fire-Tongue, we say thou can as yet save thyself, Wait and pray for thy strife to cease. Call upon the Maxim "Light" and beseech it for thy world."12 CHAPTER ONE I, Mon-Ka, interrupt to mention how this came about. Lucifer (Maldek) had a great civilization which had existed for many centuries. The people had gone through the evolutionary cycles of wars and strife and had finally reached a state of spiritual awareness. The tuo principal cities upon its surface were Karna and Wadur. There were three billion inhabitants in all, in these two great cities. MAN had achieved the fulfilling of all his needs. Vadur was a shining jewel of beauty. Many of our Con- federation people visited this city of MAN's dreams, Here, there was enough beauty for all to share. Zt came about, after this had existed for many hundreds of years, that the people of Maldek were exposed to the radiation of fissionable products, which their government chanced to be exploring the possibilities of. Here a great disaster took place. A missile containing CAL- nutronite, theix most terrifying force yet developed, was somehow tan— pered with and it exploded over the suburban areas of Karna. The radiations which were loosed into the atmosphere of Maldck seared the minds of all the people everywhere upon its surface. A form of madness (radia~ tion induced) infected all of these people. Karna accused Vadur of having intentionally caused this accident. The people, inflamed as they already were, declared that a retribution should be extracted from the Vadurian continent. I need not say of what followed. Envy, greed and hatred, fanned by the slow-falling dust, lad~ en with this radiation, brought about the £044 0f al€ reason in these people. A war of nuclear weapons grew to great proportions. We of the Confederation, bound by the laws of our unity (The Calac- tic Pax) could not intervene in this situation. Although many delega- tions of our people went and pleaded with both powers on Maldek, we could not impress upon then the foolishness of what they were pursuing. Finally, after repeated warnings were not heeded, we withdrew and stationed one of our remotely controlled observer craft, a Chronononitor, near the planet to record and to broadcast the events of this planet's dying moments. I now return you to the monitor's broadcast for a few moments. "Oh Maldek, the light of your existence is glowing brightly on our screens. Already that which you were is fading. A missile containing the Living e€ement hydrogen is on its eventful flight through your atmosphere. We can no longer stay and plead for your existence. The moment has arrived! = = = - - Adonai, Oh Maldek! - - - - - It is finished, 0b Radiant One!" My brothers, I, Mon-Ka, say this to you of earth. The first three letters of the word, "CAL-nutronite,” the power which caused the even- tual destruction of Maldek, represents the elements cadmium, aluminum and lithium, If I mention that at chis moment (1956) possibilities of uniting these elements in # nuclear device, need I say more? It is for you, people of earth, to decide which you will have -- a repetition of that fate which overcame Maldek; or a fate predicted upon a great destiny of cooperation and service, of Love and "Light," of in~ terstellar co-existence.CHAPTER ONE 13 I say this to you, oh people of earth, The force fields of the planet you call Saturn, which you describe as rings and the asteroid belt contain that evidence which once existed as a planet similar to your own, The date of this event can be determined by your own Holy Works. It has been stated in these works "that it caused a great light im the heavens and that the rivers ran red as if fron blood this, caused by the falling dust of Maldek as it settled not only in your ‘own atmosphere, but in that of my planet Masar. I ask you, who hear my words, to consider well that which we have stated. And now, my brothers, I must leave. Think well of which future you and your people desire. The causes and the events will be caused more by your own doing than by any intervention which we might be allowed to bring about, Let us see how you, people of earth, decide. IT hope to have the opportunity to speak with you again. 1 will leave you now. Adonai, my brothers. T am called Mon-Ka. The name, for your information, can be spelled Non-Ka. Vasu, barragus. "SOLAR GOVERNMENT" March 30, 1956 Solar Cross Tape # 3-B By: Sutko Greetings, people of earth. I am Sutko. We speak at this time of Solar Government. It is also necessary to mention something of Galac— tic Government. This galaxy is governed by the laws of the Congedera~ tion, which, as you are now avare of, are formulated by all members. Im each galaxy, there is a main body of men who form what is called a Tribunal. In each instance there are seven members or representatives in these Tribunals who fill their positions by voluntary action and qual- ifications most astounding. Their purpose is to acknowledge the principles of Universal Law and to administer this Law. Theirs is a noble position of great service. Their pronouncenents ere based on accumulated experience. ‘Their guidance is from the etheric realms. Their obser- vanee and execution of the Law is accomplished by information received from the Solar Tribunals and by renotely controlled observer craft, (Chronomonitors). These observer craft are responsible only to their respective Tribu- nal sources. These craft are above tampering with and are equipped with a neans of protection beyond the knowledge of mortal man. Each of these observer craft are directed to a certain location in the universe. After being newly manufactured, they are then transported, we believe, into another dimension or realm of existence. There, they assume their means of protection and take on a forn of consciousness. Then they re~ turn to us, We are not acquainted with how this is accomplished. It is only necessary to state that they are infallible information obtain- ers; that they are utilizing a form of energy for locomotion that we are not aware of and their information is absolutely trusted.er ee eer Ne ae eg ee 14 CHAPTER ONE These craft, guided by an intelligent consciousness beyond anything we can conceive of, constantly roam the universe reporting all events which transpire to their various local and Galactic Tribunals. We can also direct their movements when we so desire. They, the Chronomonitors, fare manufactured by and are the observant servants of MAN. Their remarkable abilities are gifts from the Creator. ‘The individual planetary Solar Tribunals perform all the functions of their galactic counterparts, only on a local level. Unlike the Galac~ tic Tribunal, the local Solar ones consist of @ council menber for each planet. This, plus the fact that they render reports to and are gov erned by their higher parent organization, is the only difference in function. To refer back for a moment, the Chronononitors are the policing and enforeenent branch of all Law. They refuse to accept or act upon unwise declarations of the Universal Law as it may be interpreted by Tribunal sources. By observing this inaction of theirs to our orders, we are able co rectify grave errors in our judgment before any harm results. These craft contain powers of offense and punishment so terrible that we never fear transgression of the Law going unpunished, We have never witnessed an occasion where these cvaft have had to use their powers for destruction. I can only state that we are grateful that 2 Supreme Intelligence oversees MAN's affairs, and that we have received praise, rather than puaishuent, in our actions. Beyond hearing these items of interest, I perceive your questionings of how your planet is situated in the universal plan. I vill mention that a change was brought about in the Galactic Pax regulations after the planet Maldek ceased to exist. This law now reads that we of the Confederation can only intervene in a planet's affairs and evolution when the following conditions exist: ite “yhen a planet, either a member or non-member of the Confederation, constitutes a threat to the existence of its neighbors.” 2 “When a planet is threatened by an outside cosmic influence which it cannot escape harnful effects from in an encounter." & Mitnen the Galactic Tribunal is 60 ordered to act by their counselors existing in the higher realms." unfortunately, people of earth, your present planet qualifies the first two conditions in this year of 1956. By your fumbling attempts to harness the power of fission reactions and in employing such power as means of destruction, you have unknowingly chaneed to, as you say, explode the element hydrogen. This, we cannot allow to happen. Your planet would cease to exist and the effects of such would seriously affect the continued existence of life on other nearby planetary bodies who in no way have caused your people any harm. We have been forced to neutralize two of these hydrogen devices in the past, one belonging to your Government and one belonging to the other (Russia. We shake con- Unue to neutrabize any and abl attempts to explode this efenent. Under the second condition you also qualify. Your scientists are well aware of how your cosmic ray count is increasing. This is causedCHAPTER ONE 15 by your transit through a concentration of these particles in space (in 1956). Hampered, as you are, by a technology unable to provide an effec~ tive screen against this menace, we have deployed our craft in such a way around your planet that we are now shielding you from about ninety percent of this radiation. Your own nuclear experinents, by spewing forth radioactive particles into your atmosphere, have not helped this condition, However, our brother Veltra has explained this to you previously. A presentation has now been made to you of how our government is administered and ite lavs enforced. 1 believe you will find it rather simple, You have been informed of many aspects of our intentions, purpose and existence. It is up to you, people of earth, to now act upon what has been pre~ sented. You shall witness great numbers of our craft in your atmosphere in the monthe remaining in this, your year 1956. May The Infinite "Light" of all understanding reach you and promote the truth. It is now up to you. I am Sutko. Adonai, and peace, our brothers. ee RK "STATION KOR - MARS" (A Question and Answer Exchange) April 12, 1956 Solar Cross Tape # 6-A By: Soltec Greetings, people of earth. I am Soltec. It is my privilege to be with you at this time for the little excursion to our communication center upon the planet Mars. This must be accomplished in your imaginations for the moment. But, can you visualize our entering a large domed struc~ ture? This building covers an area approximately one mile square by your measurenents and is approximately 275 feet tall, We believe on entering that you will be anazed at the fact that tier upon tier of communications equipment is present. Friends, 1 am sure there are many questions in your minds at this point. Question: "Soltec, will you kindly explain the use of this equipment?" Soltec: “At this level, ay good brother of earth, we have conmunica— tions which Link all of the inhabited planets of your Solar System. Here, we find dispatch centers capable of contacting all the spacecraft employed by our people in their regular duties and missions. Upon the second tier, we find the apparatus necessary to conduct communications of galactic na~ ture. These communications do not operate over the mechanisms presently thought of and envisioned by your people. Had you been afforded a view ‘of the top of this building, you would have noticed large cube-shaped lens structures with a type of cross-hatch pattern. This emits a beam of almost invisible light. This beam of light traversing a curve through space, provides a carrier for our communications to be transmitted throughout the galaxy. The very nature of this light enables us to communicate at speeds, once the beam has left # planetary environment, at what is com monly termed in your language the speed of light."a 16 CHAPTER ONE Question: "8. the planet earth?’ tec, how long have your people been in contact with Soltec: “Regularly for over 400 thousand yeers. However, during the last 7,000 of your years, our survey craft have visited your planet at nore frequent regular intervals, Our increased surveillance of your people occurred when our instruments first detected the evidence chet Jouhad finelly arrived at an atomic-based culture. At that time, sev” Zari meetings were held by our people to discuss the potentialities in Qelved in an early contact with your planet. Our people, who resemble yours very closely, were landed upon your planet. They were given one of your years to mingle with your races and vere then to report back on the culteral and evolutionary states found. At the end of thie period, our people were removed from your planet. An entire one of your years Gas then spent in correlating and assessing the data collected, The Conclusion arrived at was that the people upon your planet were not yet ready for Galactic citizenship." Question: "Soltec, from your viewpoint, what has transpired in, let us say, the last ten years?" Seltee: “In your year 1947, our craft in increasing numbers were sighted by your people. It was upon this occasion that your various Coumunication services notified the population on your planet of our Shereased presence. It wae also at that time that your Government instituted agencies to investigate our presence. Upon noting the fact that certain trends were evidenced in great numbers among your people ‘and that these trends were linked with our appearance in such numbers, Gur craft vere immediately ordered to fly only the necessary survey flights. Te was suggested that excursions to the planet earth were to be confined to studies of scientific or cultural objectives. Fricr to this, great numbers of our people had visited your planet and exam” ined it for thenselves. ‘rt was during these many recent visits that a great thought was in evidence anonget your people. Wow, they had become aware. Our survey wae recorded innumerable thought impressions, received on frequencies fmovn by our people, to be emitted from the husan brain. The thought vee a belief in our presence. Inmediately, councils were called and this new information wes again discussed. The decision was to permit certein of our craft to communicate with large segments of your people. {edividuels from ell walks of life were to be approached and questioned. Tf the oceasion warranted, they were to be admitted aboard our craft, some even taken upon short excursions; this procedure was followed for the next five of your years." question: “Soltec, what is the regulation or policy controlling your contact with people of earth?" Soltec: "My brother, many questions have been asked regarding our presence in your skies. ‘Believe that many of us desire the sost open Bontact with your people. It is only those lavs by which we abide, Sed are even more comprehensive than those under which your people ex fot, that prevent this. These lavs, administered by various bodies of Gur people, have stated that we shall be privileged to conmunicate with your people as often as warranted. As these occasions arise, your peo- tie will be communicated with by our survey craft. In the last sevenCHAPTER ONE 17 of your years, this latest directive has been followed. "In our many contacts and conversations with your people, we have learned a great deal. We have learned that man upon your planet has many lessons yet to learn. Some of these lessons, that have been learned, have already progressed beyond the conscious level. That is, these lessons have become an integral part of many individuals. We say that your subconscious has been contacted." Question: "Soltee, does this architecture portray some of your philosophical concepts?" Soltec: "I would answer as follows: In examining the foyer of this conmunication center upon the planet Mars, you have witnessed one of the accomplishments of our people. In our conversation, you have noted that I disposed of the communication aspect rather quickly. You will also notice that even your questions were guided into new channels of thought. It is our purpose to see if the people upon your planet, onee their initial curiosity is satiated, will continue to think. It is one of the most encouraging and thrilling experiences for individuals to find suddenly that they have the ability to think their ovn thoughts; thoughts that have not been propounded by another, thoughts that are original and unique. Some of your people, we find, acquire this quite easily. Others must be placed in environments conducive to this attitude. It is always very pleasing to view the many attitudes of thought to the many races upon your planet. Unfortunately, we have also seen great masses of your people become enslaved by those who would do their thinking for them. It is painful for us to witness great and proud nations of people fall upon their knees before the presence of what is termed in your language "a sovereign power." The greatest triumph of MAN is his dignity. The dignity of the individual will be truly appreciated when men upon your surface will acknowledge none as their superior. Then they will realize that all forms of life and cxeation are truly equal, only upon different levels, and that no particular level is more commensurate with wisdom and intelligence than another. "I do not imply that there would be no cause for your merging together into groups of like thought. I would not suggest the abolish- nent of your forms of government or nations. But, if these qualities and attributes were realized, a large group of those governed and those entities called governments, would rise to unprecedented heights. Mankind, being provd, first, in his accomplishments, would then Look about him and be proud of the accomplishments of those with whon he belongs. Human rights and dignities are truly precious items in your time, people of earth." Question: "Thank you, Soltec. This discussion, I am sure, will be long remembered.” Soltec: "We shall return now to your planet. My brothers and sis~ ters, it has been my privilege to speak. I hope to have the apportun- iy again in your near future. I am known as Soltec. Adonai, vasu barragus."18 CHAPTER ONE “METHODS OF INTERPLANETARY COMMUNICATION" (A question and Anaver Exchange) August 2, 1956 Solar Cross Tape # 5-B By! Mon-Ka Greetings, people of earth, I am Mon-Ka. At this time, I shall answer several questions submitted by your people. Question: "Mon-Ka, many people have inquired about the ways your people have found to communicate with the people of earth, Do you care to enumerate the ways, or some of the ways, in which this is done?" Mon-Ka: "Regarding the various methods we have of communicating with your peoples, we face a number of unique problems. Let us say that the determining factor, first of all, in any form of communication is the method of reception employed, In reception, we have methods of impressing upon the minds of various individuals certain fields of force. By using such, we may transmit data or information. This information may be then converted through the type of receiver used. “Let us say, in the case of one who is adept in that which is known to your peoples as impressed writing, that the mind of the individual so euployed as a receiver is conditioned, by choice, or by the impres~ sion of an external field. The mind, then unconsciously, directs and controls the necessary muscular reaction to form the style of pennan- ship and also the characters of the words in the language used. In this manner, a complete communication may be delivered while the individual is used as such a receiver. In the next instance, where the reception known as radio is en- ployed, the communication may be delivered either directly from one of our large communication centers on a planet, or through the relaying facilities of one of our spacecraft, which in turn is then broad- east upon waves electromagnetic in nature, These waves are then re~ ceived by your ordinary means of radio reception. We can beam this type of reception to either a large area or it may be confined to very narrow Limits. “another type of communication involves that known as the impress~ ing of information upon what your people refer to as a beam of light. In this instance, there are certain types of material that display qualities that are sensitive to the light vibrations known as infrared. A special receiver, already known by your people, is capable of receiv— ing pulsations of infrared light and converting them into audible sounds. It may be scoffed at by some, but infrared rays of light are capable of spanning much greater distances than any form of communica tion known upon your planet. We have, for a great period of time, used this as one method in a permanent network of inter-galactic com munications. “perhaps one of the most interesting methods of communications used by us is thet known in our terminology as a tensor beam. In this instance, a cone-shaped field of magnetic tadiation, of a wavelength unknown to your present technology, is projected by either a craft in your immediate vicinity or directly from one of our larger planetaryCHAPTER ONE 19 communication centers. The tensor beam consists of three types of magnetic phenomena occurring simultaneously. Let us call them, for the sake of illustration, a core surrounded by two concentric tubular layers of magnetic substance. The central core is a type of magnetic radiation two inches in diameter, which, when projected, acts on the brain of the receiving person. The inner tubular layer controls the immediate physical environment of the receiving person and extends exactly four inches beyond the area of the body of the person engaged in reception. The outer tubular layer contains what we call the return circuit. This picks up the emanations from the minds of the individuals present about the receiving person. This serves as a carrier for returning their thoughts to our monitors Question: "Mon-Ka, how are you able to express yourself in so many different languages?" Mon-Ka: "We have at our disposal a device which does not rely upon vocal translation of our language into yours, although it can be so en- ployed, The method used consists of a suitable field of induction which picks up our thoughts directly. It then converts them into impulses suitable for transmission by tensor beam, which, in turn are interpreted and acted upon by the mind of the receiving person. This device, which we call the ediphone, is the machine used to translate our thoughts into impulses suitable for transmission. The translation into your language, in the case of tensor beam, is accomplished through the brain of the receiver. A mechanical vocalator is used where radio or light beam is the communication method employed. Let us explain that the mechanical vocalator is a device which converts thought into oral expression. Question: "Mon-Ka, have your people on any occasion used the mediun of the telephone for communication purposes?" Mon-Ka: "In answer to your question, this medium of communication can be utilized upon occasions. However, we do not favor this method. When it is so employed, the mechanics needed could result either in a failure of your telephone circuits, or in some cases, replacement of your equipment." Question: “Mon-ka, now quite a different question. What is nec~ essary on the part of an individual or, on your part to condition an individual to become a receiver?" Mon-Ka: "Several qualities are necessary in the selection of those of your people prior to the establishment of communication. These qu: ities, my brothers and sisters, are very seldom developed in your environnent. In the majority of instances where individuals are found among your people who have the necessary qualities, they are generally obliv- ious of their possession. For example, an individual born into your planetary environment is reared in a manner considered normal. At some particular tine in this individual's life, a cevtain succession of experiences acts as a key, unlocking a communications link between what is known as his conscious and subconscious brain, ‘whether or not individuals with these latent qualities ever undergo these experiences is something else. However, if they do, then communication becomes possible. Our method of determining those individuals is through a type of scanning device, aboard our craft, that is attuned to detect @ special radiation which emanates in no small degree from theseA _— eee 20 CHAPTER ONE individuals. In our survey flights about your planet, this equipment Suomatically records when these individuals are detected, Then, after @ preliminary study by our field personnel, if the occasion warrants, communication is established. Win the instance where the necessary experience can be acquired by an individual who purposely desires this communication, much the same procedure io initiated. Hovever, there have been occasions vhen sone preside influence was also added to their efforts to accomplish this. Such occasions, I assure you, are not comon."” Question: "Thank you, Mon-Ka, This enlightening communication was both refreshing and inforsative." Mon-Ka: "It has been my privilege to adress you. 1 am Mon Adonai, vasu barragus eee "TENSOR INFORMATION AND DEFINITIONS" (A Question and Answer Exchange) December 11, 1956 By: Voltra Greetings, my beloved ones. I am Voltra. It has been discussed since our lest gathering that the format of these little talks be sone Since veered. We vill start by discussing your previous reception firet, we well as correcting aay mistakes in pronunciation and answering any seeotione you may have concerning these Little talks. Then your topis will be presented. L would suggest that in the future, you may find it quite advante- geous to take notes as we speak and to have your questions formated prior to the gathering. You may take notes at this time- Queation: "Volta, you people use the, term ‘tensor’ a great deal in your ‘thoughts and language. First, Tensor Beam ~ then Tensor Equseione; yea gufer from vhat you have said that the word ‘tensor’ actually per ane a to the co-ordination and alignnent of the respective bodies in & personality. Is that correct?” vyoltra: "As far as you have carried it, it is correct. The firet two sentences of your topic this evening, will perhaps anever your quesq tie core specifically. To elaborate a bit further heze. The word ioe ot Geself, enbraces a distinct concept of education, unfoldsent aia development.” An all unfolding developsent, you might classify it. Tes connection, in phraseology to other such werds as Being and Tnvoce- Elon; and then Equation is simply defined as a particular application of this concert. Oz would advise you to take these topice or lessons and examine them gentence by sentence, not passing on to the next until you believe you fave accumulated the meaning of the present one. Question: “there is one other question if I may, please? 7 Essy to intee teen what has been said on the last occasion, that in the finalCHAPTER ONE 21 analysis this whole matter of contact and rapport with you people, whoa we hold so highly, is very largely a matter of consciousness awareness. in ourselves, insofar that we are able to align, possibly, our own re~ spective being and personality. Is chat the case roughly?” Voltra: "Your method of analyzing that information presented is quite shrewd, my brother. An alignment of the individual personality and the existence of a co-ordinated harmony anongst those present at such gatherings is more important, perhaps, in obtaining your contacts than any of you have yet realized. In the past, such co-ordination has existed on a non-verbal level - buried somewhat, in your subconscious. "Several of our talks in the future will deal with total responses, environmental ones, and a multitude of such applied specifics as well, and will more properly answer your questions than I can do at this time. "I believe you will find that the application of Tensor Equations will bring about @ much sought after alignment of your various bodies, Its most direct application will be its effect upon your present physi: sal bodies. The integration of the human nervous system and the eno- tional and physical bodies are the factors, we have discovered, that are the most needed to be brought into alignment in your present environment. If we can achieve this result, the rest will be a matter most hastily disposed of, I trust this has been of some help." Questi ductive"?" ni “Voltra, may I ask just what you mean by the word 'in- Voltra: "My daughter, when I speak of an inductive frame of mind, I use the term in your language to imply a state of attraction that exists very similar to that existing between two magnets. You might be considered one of these objects and that knowledge that we want to pass on, as the other. A strong bond exists between these objects. No mat ter how far removed. No matter how nebulous the connection. ‘Therefore, as we speak in your presence, because of the mere fact that your pres= ence is indeed so close, the field of influence impresses itself upon your conseious and subconscious minds in a manner which creates a per manent impression. "This need not be recognized consciously but will be so as tine Progresses. If you can envision a pebble dropped in a pool of water and the rings which proceed outward, then just reverse that process and imagine yourself as the pebble and the rings concentrating inward about you. You will indeed have an explanation of induction. A bond of attraction, I trust this has been some help." Question: "Woltra, will you explain the words Cortex and Thalanus a8 you use them?" Voltra: "The first; Cortex or Cortical center is envisioned as that which encases that part of your anatomy called the brain. The Thalamus also deals with the inner brain and a response brought about through the nervous system, We will have much to tell you, my brothers, concerning a very interesting exercise involving these two subjects. “It is most intriguing to envision an exercise entitled a Thalanatic Cortical Pause. You say, to borrow a word, cogitate about this. Now I see that there is little standing in the way of presenting you with same22 CHAPTER ONE valuable information of which, I trust, you will avail yourselves and study diligently to obtain its meaning. It has been my great pleasure fo have spoken. If there are no further questions, I will depart. May The Great and Pure White "Light" surround you. 1 am Voltra." aes (A Question and Ansver Exchange) November 2, 1957 By: Hatonn, Mon-Ka "Greetings, Oh Children of the "Light." I am Hatonn. It is my plea~ sure to speak with you. It is indeed most gratifying to exchange our views. You may feel free to discuss what you will. Perhaps, you and our other Brothers and Sisters wish to discuss sone various subjects. Iam available for a period. Roberta: "What can you tell us regarding the Russian Sputnik?” Hatona: "Yes, my daughter, the little satellite is quite interesting. At the monent - one moment, please - according to the information T have, your little satellite is approxinately 210 of your miles above your surface, passing over the continent of South Africa. We have ob- Served this quite closely. If you will recall, approximately the third day after its obtaining orbit, the radio equipment was silenced for twelve hours, and then transmission was renewed. Many theories were advanced as to why this had happened. However, let us say that during those twelve hours it was examined quite thoroughly. Rather interest~ ing, you called the event, I believe. "an interesting comment on batteries. There were many worried con- rades at this time and since that period because the useful life of the battery was only 72 hours. I am quite sure they are puzzling over how they managed to last two weeks. Shall we say, a stroke of energy accom= plished this, much to their concern. As you have noted, Gacon, we are not without a humorous side." Roberta: "What are the reasons for the failures on the part of our country?" Hatonn: "If the truth were known, Reena, your country has been capable of launching vehicles for quite some time. I would say that an individual's name with the letters B.A.R., and several of his cohorts are responsible for the Soviet success, and your failures (United States)." Roberta: "Rocker ----- " Hatonn: "Examine the initials again, Roena." Cayne: "Baruch. Hatonn: "Correct. Thuria, I perhaps am saying something out of turn, but perhaps a comment of mine may provoke a little thought. You have often felt a great partiality towards those comments of mine which you have recorded on your little machines. Does this not strike you as being somewhat interesting?"CHAPTER ONE 23 "Are you referring to my partiality to your messages?" "z would, perhaps, answer your question with a tidbit. We have had a great deal of trouble recruiting a proper replacement on ny staff. You might consider this, Thuria." “When do I leave?" "L see your mental agility is certainly not hampered by your present activity. May it ever be so. Your frustration with pre~ Sent methods is no doubt traceable to certain superior methods in the past." “Aare you referring to methods I employed in past lives?" “To borrow a phrase much used upon your surface, "no com- And now I see no further use of my imposing on your Kindly atti- Roberta: "Is it possible to show a ship to Harry?” Hatonn: "Perhaps such a wish is not distant. However, you might wish to observe the northern skies in the evening hours. You might find it interesting.’ Gayne: "Do you have any suggestions for us to follow?" Hatonn: "That, my brother, is an invitation to continue this activity of speaking. However, since ve do not have the leisure available, T suggest your gatherings be resumed, I am quite sure many avait @ vital message soon to be delivered. You may determine your own times. As you know, we are available, In the meantime, just hold the "Light. Now I must leave. I am Hatonn. Greetings in the "Light" of The Radiant One, 1 am Mon-Ka, It is with all humbleness I speak again, and a great deal of joy. A statement was once made in a Holy Work of yours that will perhaps prove applicable in your very near future. Noting the progress and Essimilation of the Tensor Equations, I believe it is in order to borrow fa phrase to make the following statement and let you draw your own con~ clusions. 1 will make it my closing statement as I wish to observe your reactions. In the meantime, know that we are with you and will continue to assist in each way that we are allowed, You are not mistaken when you intuitively feel the quickening pulse of a new vibration. A white stax is in all of your near futures. My closing statement is this: "PREPARE US A TABLE!" May the "Light" of Our Infinite One be with you always. I am Mon-1 Korton here. Greetings, my brothers. It is nice to have this chan- mel activated. I look forward to greeting you shortly. You may discontinue. ere26 CHAPTER TWO "PRELUDE TO TENSOR EQUATIONS" Novenber 8, 1957 By: Voltra Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. 1 am Voltra, I speak tonight, in my official capacity, on a matter of great gravity. I would inform you that your meeting will be in two portions. You will better understand our reasons after my following statenents. This, my brothers and sisters, is to be one of the first occasions of our presenting and instructing you in a method of practical Tensor Equations. First, due to the increased surveillance of your radio waves and due to the satellite experiment, this message was not presented by means of radio to you. Secondly, the extreme importance of details, in expressing an exact procedure with infinite cate, demands that we introduce new form of conmunication which will be applied to Richard, for the first tine this evening I cannot emphasize the great amount of preparation in compiling our thoughts and correlating them with your language. After this evening, I state truthfully, none of you will ever be the same. It is a major step on the right path. I have several requests to make, Our brother Soltec, will deliver the topic this evening in a new and unique manner. We vill employ the “interossitor" for the first time. Perhaps many of you have wondered about the strange relationship between Richard and Soltee. If the truth be expressed, it is indeed a unique relationship. Prior to Rich- ard's entry into physical existence -- his present one -- an elaborate experiment was performed which placed these two in a unique rapport. Provisions were made for certain portions of Richard's being to be superimposed by Soltec, by means of the interossitor. Soltec will deliver your topic in the person of your young friend, To do this, we generate and establish a very epecial set of conditions. Therefore, the requests I mentioned. Richard should be placed alone in your adjoining room. The reason for this is quite apparent. We do not wish you to be affected by these conditions without prior conditioning. Too, it is a rather remarkable change to see another's personality express itself in a lifelike manner. To be very frank, it takes getting used to. My Brothers and Sisters, you embark upon a long, hard, but brilliantly illuminated path. A time has arrived when a great step forvard is to be apparent in your incarnate progress. I cannot over emphasize the importance of what you are about to achieve, Take it and do what you can, for I say this; it is a good and noble achievement. In closing, I request the following; that you delay approximately fifteen of your minutes before resuming your meeting. Richard should be sitting up- right. A word of caution; after the topic has been received, it should take several minutes for the effects to completely be eradicated from his three bodies. If a somewhat dazed condition is apparent, you mayCHAPTER TWO 25 rest assured we will be observing quite closely and no harm shall result. The periodic sensations, he described experiencing earlier, were preparatory for this new method to be initiated. Any disturbance or confusion will be eliminated as conditioning is brought more into rapport. We, my Brothers, extend our hand to help you on this great step. Gayne: "Should there be one light in the other room with Richard?" Voltra: "I answer as follows: The room should be fully illuminated. In examining your dwelling, soundings were made of vibrations in various portions of it. The room adjoining was found to be the most ideal spot. 1 would suggest it, by all means." there should we place the microphone, over there or here?" "tle are avare, Gaoon, of a means of extending your microphone. It is to be placed no closer than two feet. The leads are to be brought out through the door and into this room, where your recording device is to be placed. This, I am assured, will allow you to monitor, orally, the reception. This, you can arrange? Gayne: "Yes. Voltra: "I sincerely wish I could express the depth of ny being to all of you. I shall depart now and request that your entire beings be suffused in the Pure "Light" of Our Radiant One. Let It Be S Adonai, my Brothers." Greetings in the "Light" of The Radiant One. I am Soltec. Your topic this evening is as follows: Principles and Tensor Equa~ tion @ 1. Semantics has to do with the meaning of meaning, or the mean— ing of words, Tensor Equations have to do with the relationship of the human nervous system to the world around it and, therefore, it includes semantics. Ie provides an integrating system for all human thought and experience. It is not enough to know about Tensor Equation training techniques. ‘They must be learned and be automatic; that is, on the unconscious level. The talking about stage must give vay to the doing stage. The goal is flexibility of approach below the verbal level to any event. Tensor Equations are designed to give the individual a sense of direction, not anew set of inflexibilities. A few of the operational principles of Tensor Equations are as follows: Hunan nervous systens are structurally sinilar, one to the other, but are never exactly the sane. Any human nervous system is affected by events verbal or non-verbal. An event that is a happening affects the body and mind as a whole. For the sake of sanity, remember, first is the event, the initial stimulus; second is the nervous impact of the event via the senses; third is the emotional reaction, based upon past experience of the individual, and fourth cones the verbal reaction. Most individuals identify the first and fourth steps, and are not aware that the second and third exist. Because children and childlike26 CHAPTER TWO grownups are incapable of refined discrimination, many experiences shock their nervous systems so violently that your psychiatrists have evolved 4 special word for the results - "trauma." Carried over into later years, these traumas can eo tangle an individual that unsanity -- that is neu- rosis -- or even insanity -- which is psychosis -- can result. Almost every individual has had several traumatic experiences. It is possible to alleviate the effects of the many shocks by application of the Tensor Equatrix. ‘The human nervous system is uniquely capable of unlimited training; but the method is the determining factor. This Tensor method of relaxing is based on vision. A relaxed eye sees best. The normal eye is re~ laxed when it shifts steadily. When, for any reason, an eye capable of good vision begins to stare, the image blurs. Unlike a camera, the eye sees clearly only on the instant following the relaxing shift. Now, for an automatic way to cause that organ known as your brain to relax. An obvious approach would be the associative relaxation of the surrounding tissue. You now consciously set about relaxing blood vessels of the cor tex, the thalamus and the sub-cortex where the embryo (tensor centers) are located. By association all the cells around the blood vessels will also automatically relax. Follow ay instruetions, this is an exercise for your eyes. Relax - look, relax - look, relax - look, relax - look, relax - look, It will be determined by your individual awareness how soon a state of relaxation is achieved. After the method is grasped, this Little exercise may be discarded. This is of course only preliminary to a simple but effective vay of inducing the thalamatic cortical pause. After skill is obtained, this entire method is comprehended by your brain and takes but a fraction of a second in time to put inte action. Practice, however, is necessary. Now 0 the method used, in thought, to accomplish this thalamatic cortical pause, The thought is: "I am now relaxing, all stimuli are making the full circuit of my nervous system along my spinal column to the thalamus - through the thalanus and up to the cortex - through the cortex and then, and ony then, back through the thalamus and down into ny nervous system. Always I am consciously aware of the stimulus moving up to and through the cortex." This is the key. This is the difference between the tensor oriented and the animal man. ‘The thalamus, the seat of emotion, and the cortex, the seat of discrimination, integrated, balanced, in warm and wonderful relationship. Emotions not done away with, but made richer and more relaxed by association with that part of the brain, the cortex, that would favor unnumbered subtle differences in the flow of feeling. The stimulus is now going through my cortex. Tam thinking and feeling, not just feeling. And so, my brothers, be achieved the thalamatic cortical pause. Thies ends my talk. May the "Light of Our Radiant One be with you. Adonai, I All Soltec.. ae eeCHAPTER TWO 27 "THE EARLY U.S. SPACE PROGRAN, ATOMLG TESTS and THEIR UNKNOWN CONSEQUENCES” January 1, 1958 By: Soltec, Korton, Ashtar, Katonis Greetings in the "Light" of Our Infinite Father. I am Korton. We will attempt to quiet your surroundings so that there will be no disturbances. One monent please. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Infinite One. Tam Soltec. It is again my privilege to speak with all of you, My craft is now stationed directly over your location, at an altitude of approximately fifty of your miles. As you were informed in our last conversation, it was my duty to oversee that all of you safely arrived at your present destination. This completed, I was inmediately sent to the launching site (Cape Canaveral). At exactly 8:03 of your time the missile was launched. Be proceeded to a height of 864 miles above your surface, penetrating the ionosphere at 8:03.75. Thereafter, two of our craft patrolled the rift created in the ionosphere. Upon reaching the altitude mentioned, the rocket swung into orbital position. It was at that time, I picked it up. It is even now being examined upon ny craft. Therefore, many of your scientists are presently wondering what happened to their little toy. This was necessary, as will be explained later. At the tine of launching and for ten minutes preced= ing, @ crystalgraph recording was made of the entire event, including it being taken aboard our craft. ‘The rift in the ionosphere appeared over the city of Los Angeles at 1:14.05 and made six passes over the greater area described as two minutes of are. ‘The vicinity has now been cleared of all radiation vesi- due. Unfortunately, great numbers of your people have been exposed. May the "Light" of Our Radiant One be with all of then. I have several reasons in speaking, besides this information, I welcone you, my brother Russell. It is good to see you. Thuria's little trip is mot completed yet. More is yet to come to you, my daughter. Tt is at the moment considered imperative that a meeting be arranged between those of the original core and our brother Harry, in whose home you now reside, preferably this coming Saturday. there the meeting is arranged is inconsequential. There is much to be discussed at chat time. Two of our craft have entered the subterranean channels in the ocean location, previously described to you, and are now located not less than 40 miles from your present location. Those aboard have their instructions and you will soon be contacted. As you can readily see by what is being implied, a great increase in activity is being anticipated. You may proceed on the worthwhile projects you have undertaken. It is brought to my attention that another wishes to speak. There- fore, I shall depart. Adonai, May the "Light" of Our Radiant One be with you. I am Soltec. Korton here, One moment please. Korten!! Vee yonto barragus, teretia imperatum! Clear these channels!ee 28 CHAPTER TWO Ashtar speaking. It is imperative that your insignia be now worn at all times. It is to be carried in a place of prominence upon your Vehicles also. This will be explained. Adonai. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Katonis, It has been a long time, my brothers, since I last spoke to your group. I am indeed pleased to have this opportunity. ‘As has been related to you over the past weeks of your time, 4 quickening of the pulse has been observed. Your planet, my brothers, is soon to enter a state of great turmoil and confusion. It is essential that we now co-operate more fully with those anongst your people who have ex= pressed and shown their desire te aid in the Radiant One's work. What fas happened, this day, upon your planet will not be the final or con~ sumaating event, It has been noted that the effects of the device detonated by the opposing world power (Soviet Union) on your people has caused a severe warp in the magnetic declination about your planet. We are seriously concerned with the possible nearby effects of thie conse~ quence. It is with all reverence that ve strive to equalize the unbal- fhce so created, Your magnetic north pole has already shifted an add tional half-degeee. As my brother Mon-ka has a means of expressing it, "Need 1 say nore?" Many forces are at work upon your surface, both within and without. This shall be the cause of great confusion amongst your peoples. As much as ve dislike violence of any nature, it ie apparent that many acts of a violent nature shall follow in the tine Ghead. Iwish to state, so that there is no confusion in your minds, that we of the Confederation are not responsible. This is my purpose in speaking. I shall speak with you much sooner than you expect. Adonai. May the "Light" be with all of you. 1 am Katonis. Rorton here. You may discontinue. wee “WATONN AND HIS PLANET January 3, 1958 By: Hatonn Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton. One wishes to speak, One moment please. Greetings, Oh Children of the "Light." I am Hatonn, It is again my privilege to speak vith all of you. You will pardon if I digress a little and ramble back to that time known as the Egyptian era. My role at that time wae much like it is at present. During the reign of the Pharoah, T was in the capacity of a Scribe, again a keeper of records. ‘The main part Of ay duties was to search the many records for the aysteries presented by the Great Pyramid. Akhnaton was sorely troubled to explain this mys: tery as aany Pharoahe preceding him. It seems that each, in turn, had employed the services of the picked men of their times to probe the mysteryCHAPTER TWO 29 of the Pyramid. Amongst these present, at my time, were several known to you and also a young officer of the Pharoah's army. For your information, thi young officer exhibited a great deal of questioning; a mind asking many questions, and who to turn to but my humble self. I came to know this one closely during the many years we worked together. This officer's name was Radon. He was assigned to search out the great secrets that lay buried by antiquity. Another one associated with this work and later to succeed Horenhab, was Swenkari, whom your history books mention but briefly. The emanation of a great gleaming white brilliance radiating from the capstone could be seen for hundreds of miles, even from the temple of Luxon. It was a guide or beacon to all travelers. This is what the Pharoah sought; the source of this luminescence, its purpose, and sadly enough he finally realized, as had those before him, that such a radiance came to be known within one's being first. After thie awareness, the synbol of the great light, represented by the sun, came to the fore and he became the first monotheistic Pharoah of all times. It was my privilege to have known this one and to know him still. Greetings, my brother, I await you also. ‘And now enough of my ample ramblings. 1 should like to acquaint you with this strangest of all places; this planet upon which I reside, called, strangely enough by my name. We look about this huge chanber and see the memories of all things as they have existed throughout @ large area of this segnent of the Mighty One's Being. A warm place, enriched by the toils and efforts of MAN everywhere. How much richer truth becomes when it represents so much effort. Leaving this room, we proceed and look about many chambered and vaulted corridors, and further rooms; some familiar to some of you where my many assistants have the task of preparing MAN's knowledge for the benefit of all MAN. Strangely, we reserve one room in the center of this edifice in which upon a pedestal of gleaming ebony rests a sphere, pulsing with a luminescence best described by your color mother-of-pearl, shot through with blazing flashes of coruscating colors. This, ay brothers, is a source to turn to when the answers are not apparent elsewhere. A similar deviee as this was known on your planet also, until it was removed. Tt is the foundation of the knowledge which resulted in the creation of the Advisors of Delphi in the land of ancient Greece. It is strange, the correlation behind your myths and that which is the true reality, is it not? Perhaps, you may wonder at my point of direc~ tion, my task of leading you along this little tour, but it will soon become known, as do all things. I shall take great honor in resuming soon the little talk which was interrupted; the time I spoke by means of your radio. I have hungered after this, my friends. Tt is most pleasing to note your enjoyment. It is noblest of us who serve to see the fruits not only displayed but partaken of also. I am also aware of an old acquaintance of you. My greetings to you also, Son of " time, has it not? £ mine who is close to one ight." It has been a long30 CHAPTER TWO And now to return to that which is of the moment. You have been advised of great undertakings upon your planet's surface; of momentous events impending; of tasks demanding great labors; of conditions trying to the extremes; and in general, viewed from your plane of reference, a great deal of effort to be put forth. Let this not dismay you, my brothers and sisters, for with that arti cle the size of a grain in that which belief can be placed, truly it has been said mountains may be moved. All things become possible when the Great White "Light" blends with the essence of our being. Surely all of those present in your midst have worked in this "Light," consciously and unconsciously, through many eons of time, overcoming all manner of obstacles. The force which they represent is that same force; the Spirit of all creation. Nothing can withstand this, my friends. All of it is of one essence. The One Essence. And now I find I must leave. May the Pure White "Light" of Our Ra~ ant One be with you always, Adonai, Vasu. I am Hatonn. ee Re "& SOLAR TOUR" January 4, 1958 Solar Cross Tape # 11-A By? Mon-Ka Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Mon-Ka. At this time, I shall conduct you on a tour of our Solar Systen as if all of you were present aboard one of our craft. We leave your planet's surface, and our craft gradually spirals inwards towards the light of this Sye— tem -- the Sun. The first object which draws our interest is the planet known to your peoples as Mercury, As we draw closer to this one, we notice the great contrast between light and darkness. We view its rotation, burningly hot on one side and bitterly cold on the other. This planet, my brothers, we use as an observation and experimental station due to its close proximity to our Sun, It proves most valuable. There is no native life on this planet. The only life exhibited is from our people's installations and bases; much knowledge of benefit to mankind has cone from this one. Now, having observed its barrenness, we progress outwards, and that which lies before us is indeed a beautiful sight -- the planet spoken of in your mythology, the Goddess of Love. And truly the sight of this one, weapped in its dazzling gown of white clouds is one of great beauty. I speak now of Venus. The Sun's rays dance brilliantly off these clouds; imparting an aura of great loveliness. These clouds, artificially maintained, help create a greenhouse effect on this planct's surface. And as we descend, we pass through a tremendous ocean of ionizing force. Now, beneath these clouds which do not completely shield the Sun's rays from this one's surface, we behold a planet of regal majesty, almost as beautiful as your earth. Here lives a great race of people. We see great and mighty cities, oceans vast, color rampant everywhere and a feeling of warmth and gaiety. Indeed, these people are highly regardedCHAPTER TWO 31 throughout this and many other solar systems. Feeling that expression ‘Known as love vibrating in the very air about us; we note that even your music speaks of these things, as well as compassion, of great joys and sorrows, of feelings unnumbered in their subtlety, of the emotions of these people filling the very air about us. This planet, my brothers, represents an evolution only a few thousand years in advance of your own. This life is native to this one and besides yourselves is the youngest in this Solar System. Wow, let us leave this one and proceed to one perhaps more familiar to you =- your own planet, the Green Emerald of the Solar System, the earth. This is a most inspiring sight. Your planet, my brothers, is one which has contributed much to its neighbors. But since we are speaking of other things at the moment, let us move on. And proceeding outwards, we see that bright red gleam in your evening skies, that planet known to your astronomers as Mars. Unfortunately, due to your mythology, with terms of violence associated, which is quite untrue. The only violence on this, my planet, is in our struggle against the elements. Now, as we glide in close to this one, we find evidence that indicates that MAN has been on this one for a considerable length of time. Here, we see the remains of great civilizations along the silent lengths of the canals. But the planet is not dead, as we note that huge shafts lead into thie planet's interior. For you see, people of earth, most of our living area and industry is underground. As our craft circles this one, we see evidences of great activity. our instruments record the presence of vast industrial progress. Here, ve discover that most of the spacecraft used by the Confederation in this sector of space are manufactured, Here, the civilization represents a picture of great antiquity, but the very nature of the planet's appearance indicates a type of vitality; a drive; and suggests monumental efforts, and the spark that has created a people and 2 race that survives. on our left, we see high mountain chains, purple plateaus, crimson des~ erts, and at the poles, as our craft approaches, 2 lovely green area where a city of scintillating splendor greets our eyes. Mars is far from the usual decay, thought to be a partner of great age, as our eyes. record. Since this is my planet, I thought it in order to explain these things. Now, let us leave this one and spiral outwards again. And lo, what do we behold but a swirling dervish, a ring of tiny fragnents ~~ that known to you as the asteroid belt -~ the remains of a planet (Maléek). These remnants whirl around my planet and that one from which life sprang in this system. We look closer now and behold the mightiest of all the planets in this Solar System, the one known as Jupiter. Truly, this is a singular sight to gaze upon, with ite many moons circling about it -- those that were created and those natural from the point of création. We look down fon size that begins to dim one's comprehension of size. We see huge cloud flotillas, mighty land masses, tremendous oceans, and the oldest civilization prevalent in this Solar System. Here reside those beings which overlook MAN's affairs in this sector of space. ‘This is truly the birehplace of Chuman) life upon your planet. Gaze with wonder and ave! Look upon the majesty of this, the home and cradle32 CHAPTER TWO of MAN in this Solar Systen. For here we see and here delle, those mighty beings of the Adamic race. The shinmering haze about this one blinds your telescopes to the realities present, For the effects of Light, distorted by this one’s glowing field of force, hides the truth from the eyes of men upon your planet. For we find that the air is Light and balmy. It is vibrant. For we see an atmosphere golden in color, and great beings, native to this one whose skin is of golden radiance; beings, fair-haired and majestic. We also see here a civilization that exists partly between the physical and the etheric Whenever we are close to this one, our very beings leap in recognition and we send our thoughts of love and gratitude. Let us now proceed again outwards. And, we approach the planet known to you as Saturn, the law guardian for this System. Here are found the courts of equality. Here, again, your music describes com passion and understanding, the necessary ingredients of true guardianship. In the hours of daylight, brief as they are, the Sun's rays glace off the tall marble structures. We see halls. We see pavilions. Everywhere about us, the architecture seems to stand symbolic —- syn~ bolic of these ones and their administration of the Great Radiance. Here, also, we find @ native race, whose very essence is a life of balance and harmony, brought about by their understanding of the great avs of cause and effect. Now, as we gradually spiral upwards again in our craft, we see their moons, their areas of recreation, set as they are amid the halo of shinmering light provided by their forcefields, described as they are by your people as rings. We are afforded a vista of truly enchanting splendor; horizons, vast beyond comprehension, open vistas to our eyes, for we watch as this one whirls through the brief hours of daylight and dusk. And now, as we move on and spiral out, we come next to a lovely sight. The planet known to you as Neptune, the bearded one with his trident. We see here, my brothers, a planet whose atmosphere glows with an electric blue color. We see evidence, as we circle closer, that here evolution, traversing along a different route, has progressed through the physical and all life exists as etheric. We find a native race, existing in the shadowy outlines of corruscating light, and they welcome our presence. A feeling of great joy pervades our bodies as these ones unleash wave on wave of welcome. As we pause our craft and hover, we see wave after wave of color greet our eyes, for there is Little to see upon this one's surface, lovely as it is, for all life seems to abound in the very air itself. Great shadowy outlines of these ones drift upon the currents of the air itself from one place te another. The clouds about us shape and reshape in formations resembling truly athedrals in the sky, as these ones direct their thoughts to the mold- ing of matter itself. We sense the relation, as beside our craft a shape begins to materialize, and the thought invades our minds that this is a gift in appreciation of our visit. Below us, there forms, from thought alone, a replica of your earth, conceived by these great minds, rotating slowly on its axis, bathed in the rich emerald colore known throughout the galaxy. Visitors from many regions stop here to see the greatest works of mental art exhibited and to these people this art is their export, their gift to MAN, scattered as he is along the galactic lens. For these ones provide beauty as their talent, Let us hope, my brothers, that soon you shall witness these things for yourselves.CHAPTER TWO 33 Let us move on now and examine the next sight, for we see the planet ‘mown as Uranus. Heve, our eyes tell us is not a cold, frigid, desolate waste but a world with a certain warmth. No cold is encountered as we descend and see a lovely land of rolling meadows and softly flowing forests. There is very little water on this planet, but the rich clouds above us do assure an adequate supply for the lush vegetation present below on the surface, Here, also, is a native race, wise with experience, eontrolling their ionosphere to produce this garden spot at the near edge of the Solar System. Now, as we continue gliding along, we gee the tiniest of coves, Little bays and inlets along the coast of the only ocean present. Here, also, we come upon the Urenians, a race noted for their powers of observation. A race that provides trained naviga- tors for the space fleets of many galaxies. Strange is it not, that these people are se noted? These men provl the utternost reaches of that known as universe, always providing that unerring sense that is theirs, and leaving behind a planet that is one of the most pleasant recreational areas in this Solar Systen. For Uranus is noted as a garden spot, a place where one can cone to shed everyday problens of life tenporarily and enjoy the warm contentment of the mighty forests and plains. Many of our people cone here to spend tine, such as many of your people engage in similar outdoor activities. Here, the dream-like quality of the air itself seems possessed of healing qualities and the scattered cities provide one with a sense of quiet often needed. Some of the great insticutions of learning also exist here. But now, let us move out again and view the remaining planet left, the one you know as Pluto, The dazzling white glare of this one can be seen fron a great distance and would seen to indicate the presence of, perhaps, a frigid world. But again, our eyes are deceived. For as we spiral inwards, we notice that no frozen wastes greet our eyes, but, instead, mighty rolling dunes of bleached white sand. For, my bro~ thers, Pluto is an arid, desert world. No native life is in evidence, but as we swing around this one's equator, we do notice the presence of MAN, and on a gigantic scale. For here are the great spaceports, the trade centers, the planet that is the hub of trade relations throughout this section of the galaxy. The presence of large shelters, mammoth loading areas, huge ramps and expressways cone into sight as we glide along, and activity, vast beyond belief. We see the spacecraft from hundred different suns, from all the reaches of the galaxy, berthed in their cradles and the unloading and loading of strange cargos. MAN, here, stands face to face with MAN from all parts of the galaxy. Some- times they even stare at one another's exhibits of progress from these many worlds. 1 believe the women of your planet would never leave this place, for we have noted their great curiosity when on excursions to procure goods. This is the heart of MAN's trade and exchange qualities. Pluto, a desolate planet, devoid of native life, but tamed and converted to MAN's uses -- a feat proclaiming MAN's eagerness to still utilize the gifts of creation. Now, since there is little of interest left here, let us move on and outwards to a point several million miles beyond the orbit of Pluto. Here, a strange sight comes to our vision, for we see a huge platform in space -- an artificially created world, a miniature planet. As we draw closer, we see a thriving metropolis; landing berths of tremendous size. Here, the mighty star ships, too large to ever touch a planet's surface,34 CHAPTER TWO are moored in space, their cargos unloaded and ferried to Pluto by more conventional craft, Here, also, we see the legendary ships from the planets of the star known as Procyon. These craft represent technologies and evolutions of a most advanced form of MAN. An estinate of the age of these ones approaches, what could be called in your terminology, an age of over fifty billion years, Now, as our craft circles, we descend and land on a large stage, high in the upper reaches of this metropolis. We disembark for a few moments and proceed to a viewing platform. Here, we stand. Before us are the stars of an entire universe presenting a challenge which has fired our imaginations as well as yours. Here, we gaze upon infinity. For in over twenty mega-trillion years of space travel, my brothers, we have never yet found an end. There always lies infinity before u: We stand here, somewhat humbled, for here we see a majesty that staggers the mind. Here, we gaze upon the awesomeness of a universe. Here, we see that which was orderly created; not for the puny explor: tions of MAN, but for the creation of self and being; of experience and growth; of the true learning of all wisdom and knowledge. Here we stand upon a platform, a threshold overlooking the universe. And now, we turn and look back over this miniature atom that we call our Solar System. Let us try and envision its place in relationship to all that lies about it. Parsee upon parsec of space; galaxies ad-infinitum, We stand in wonderment and we think, how small are we in this limitless vastness, but yet, how proud we are. For this, my brothers, is MAN's attainment his effort to reach towards that which he knows is Supreme; that One that is all. Here, we behold the handiwork of MAN, 4nd, as we now turn and once again face outwards, we behold the handiwork of our Creator ~~ beauty and majesty arrayed before us; and behind us, MAN's strivings tovards this goal. The realization cones to us that all life everywhere in the universe is striving for kinship or reunion with the Essence from which it all cane. 4nd now, my brothers and sisters, we must return. We board our craft and slowly spiral inwards towatds your planet, the earth. We trust that this little excursion beyond the confines of your world has brought the realization that you are not alone in this cosmic mansion; that thi halls are peopled; and that those of earth have, as a part of their heritage, a rightful place in this drama of evolution and interstellar effort. You have been tourists for the past few moments, but you shall soon be participants. Ir has been my privilege to escort you on this tour, but I must now leave. In the "Light" of Our Radiant One, I depart now, leaving you with a little melody which speaks nore eloquently of Love than, perhaps, even I can express it. Tam Mon-Ka, Adonai, my brothers of earth. Adonai.I —_— Om CHAPTER TWO 35 “PROFILE OF MAN" January 20, 1958 Solar Cross Tape # 8-a By: Hatonn Greetings, Oh Children of the "Light," I am Hatonn. It is my great privilege to speak, at this time, on a subject which I would like to call: "A Profile of MAN.” In the beginning of all creation, first, came a thought form from Our Supreme One, or Creator. This form spread through the Comms and duret with a shining reality into being. Fron This came all that is, and ever will be. A thought, clothed in love and beauty, bearing the essence of all consciousness; from the beginning of that known e¢ time fo chat which is understood to be eternity. This thought, manifesting on all planes of vibration, sweeping in ever expanding cycles of con sciousness awareness permeated the fabric of that known as matter, and lo, "Life had its beginnings." Hot all consciousness started at the same level of beginning. Many subdivisions, many groups of a kind raised ita glittering spirals of fonsciousness upvards and outwards, in an ever ascending spiral, and amidst these various forms of creation there cane that known as MAN. MAN, unenlightened, groping about in a mist, but ever feeling an under- {ying pulse, @ deep current or surge of that finer thread, Linking him back through al1 of tine and space to his Creator. MAN, setting forth, wandering through the mists of eternity, reaching ever upwarde snd out. wards; gradually sensing the "Light," permeating all chat is about him ind Teacting to those subtler nuances, as expressions and experience began to filter into his consciousness. Throughout all time on all planets, throughout all universes, that thigh ie Mav is common in thought, in shape, in essence —- a thing of Beauty. And now we see MAN traversing the corridors and pathwayss up through tine, evolving and experiencing. Our Creator, in all avarencss, gave that part of his creation known as MAN, that know as woman. We~ many the higher intuitive and inspirational counterpart of MAN, his opposite polarity, so that expression might evolve on a balanced basis; one phase feeling the positiveness of masculinity; the other, the peartfulness of femininity. For like all forms of creation, MAN must be a balanced creation, growing and experiencing in a vay, foreordained, So that in his path greater events of magnitude nay confront him for his observation. Now, let us look upon man in his present state, in his positien tron your planet, the earth. We see a man who is slightly confused, Knowing the touches of great joys and harmonies at one instant, and of frustration and bitterness at another, Yet if we look closely: if ye look beneath the veneer that his civilization has clothed him in; if we look within that known as his heart, we see a tiny silver thread which glows with an ever increasing brilliance. For MAN, regardless of his nature; of his outlook; regardless of his beliefs, can never Separate himself from his cosmic destiny. He may deviate from the Path, He may branch off the path he knows is his, but hie journeys are never allowed to stretch too far afield.36 CHAPTER Two There comes a time in every experience of this relationship called life, when this, that is called MAN looks inwatd, When he finds dis- satisfactions present in his outward environnent, and when he looks within, he cannot help but see that which hae cloaked him from the outside. Instead, he sees an essence, a reality that truly is, He sees beauty, and "Light" and grandeur and omnipotence. And now we look forward. We look forward to that which man will become in the eons stretching before him. Ne see truly a man liberat- ed ~~ experiencing that thing called freedom; knowing an awareness with all that is and sensing this thing called Love. And beyond this, we see man whose shackles of incompetence, of limitation, of identity have been cast loose. And we see in its place, awareness and at~one-ness. If only, my brothers and sisters, you could witness from our vantage point that which Lies ahead and in store for your people! The heritage of this thing -- creation called MAN -~ stretches into boundless depths of not only this universe, but those that lie beyond. For gradually, as MAN ascends this ever tightening and ascending spiral, he senses that from which he sprang. He feels, with great love and great longing, the original thought which was his creation. And then MAN slowly undergoes the transformation. His cycles of existence, no Longer known as life, become cycles of Being. He transcends all that is known of physical matter and enters into those regions known only to these who inhabit them. And again, he becomes a god within a God. A thing of majesty, a ray of "Light," charting his way through inter- woven universes, letting his particles touch one planet after another. There, my brothers and sisters, we shall leave this creation, called MAN. May Our Infinite One's "Light" be with all of you. May T have been of some service. Adonai, Vasu Barragus. I am Hatonn. "ADVICE TO REPRESENTATIVES OF THE ‘LIGHT'" February 1, 1958 By: Korton, Mon-Ka, Soltec Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I an Korton, The mes sages to be relayed to you at this time deal with many phases of your new activities. Before proceeding, you will understand more fully why your two aircraft met with the incident, (a commercial airline disaster), upon reading the names of the passenger lists. You are intuitive enough to readily see why this occurred. No unpleasant effects will have been initiated by your government's latest experiments with their satellite program. The ionospheric disturbance was immediately neutralized by one of our craft. The Light appearing in the sky was not your satellite, but one of our craft follow ing its course. If you will examine your accounts (newspaper), you will find that your vehicle disappeared in its upward flight. Also, your scientists are readily disturbed over the fact that the satellite is not beaming forth the signals they expected. You will hear controversiesCHAPTER TWO 37 about this. You will know why it does not transmit the proper infornation. To borrow a phrase, "Need I say more?" And now one moment please. One will speak. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Mon-Ka. At your next reception, the Tensor Equation will be presented. We wish the four present as it is necessary to your growth. You have all noted, my brothers and sisters, that this is merely the beginning of hat lies ahead. If you will recall, in the prelude to the Tensor talks, references weve nade to certain abilities and talents which would be developed as a result of your training. You are merely experiencing the beginning signs of these abilities coming to fruition. Many more interesting aspects will be gradually unfolded in your consciousness. Ie is my desire and those of the Council and Tribunal, that I present the firmest possible conviction imparted to your consciousness, that ur- gency is extremely imminent in the preparation and carrying out of our great work. You begin to see the results of chaotic conditions occurring about you. Your planet no longer feels secure; it is beginning to lose its grip on traditions, thought unshakeable. Theories and technologies ave suffering setbacks which, if allowed to continue, could completely demoralize your scientific circles. Your economic system is tottering at the edge of a great precipice, the slightest breeze could cause it to topple. Times of great stress and duress lie immediately in your futures. You, however, shall not be so affected as to become lost in the nire which shall snare the footsteps of many about you. You have all been delegated and have volunteered for a great mission. The tine of its action is rapidly hurtling towards you, for from out of the cosmos it self comes a great White "Light" uhich demands recognition. These who will not be able to stand in its Radiance will wither and crumple, through the neglect of their own divine inheritance which they have failed to seize upon and develop. Judgement self-imposed, shall be rendered as each individual suddenly weighs the essence of his own be~ liefs and notes their shortcomings. Those who have striven, who have made the slightest attempt to open their minds and consciousness to this ever increasing Radiance, will find it not unbearable, but more invigorating than any form of life or energy previously experienced. My brothers and sisters, a moment of great enlightenment Lies irme~ diately ahead. Your peoples are soon to be walking those pathways which leave the excursions about mere Solar Systens, somewhat in the past. ‘The change will be abrupt from their standpoint; however, this cannot be helped. We cannot argue with the reactions present within the forms of matter itself, for Divine Intelligence guides the motions and vibrations of all matter. Matter cannot be expected to explain its going about the thought impressions received. If matter cannot withstand these vibrations, it is like the example of a fine crystal vessel suddenly shattered, when a particular frequency of sound of a given intensity strikes an object. I trust my little example makes things clearer. Soon you shall have the benefit not only of our presence among your people, but He who once walked upon your planet's emerald carpet will again set foot thereon, and this time His message will be listened to. You will please pardon my abruptness. I have many things yet to do,38 CHAPTER Two but my Love and "Light" and thoughts turn ever towards your group, and I am varned in many reflective moments by a sudden gleaming, a subtle reflection of a pure Radiance whieh I know more of. My Love and "Light" to all of you, and in lis name may all things be unto you as they are recorded. A passage upon our young friend's mind is being impressed, which I would desire you to more fully comprehend. If he would be so good a8 to relay it to you from your Little book, I will be most pleased. Adonai, I am Mon-Ka. Greetings, my brothers, in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Soltec. It appears that I'am, perhaps, closer to all of you than my brother who has just addressed you, relatively speaking, It is interesting indeed to note the progress being made by your group. It is, ag has been implied, essential for you to continue in the great work unfolding before you, for you are beginning to comprehend, your duties are not light, nor your responsibilities easy to shoulders It denands effort upon your part for, as you are also beginning to comprehend, a great. deal of effort has gone into their preparation. A craft is constantly stationed in your vicinity and one of its assigned duties is to con— stantly monitor your thoughts and actions, your everyday problems, and their solutions. You need not fear you are delegated to accomplish that which is too difficult for you, for such is not the case. As all of you have experienced, interesting things do occur to ease your burdened tine, ‘renove you from certain obligations, and spark that feeling of warth when all of you are gathered together. I merely speak to remind you of eur presence, for soon I hope to have the opportunity to face you and inquire as to your conduct. And now I shall depart. May the "Light" of Our Radiant One be with you. I am Soltec. And I, Korton, the one of few words, say: "May all power vest with those who work in His "Light" and in the name of Solar Cross. Your blessings, my brothers, are too nunerous to describe. Adonai." You may discontinue. TENSOR EQUATION" February 5, 1958 By: Soltec Korton here. One moment please. Soltec is standing by to deliver your Tensor Equation. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Soltec. My brothers and sisters, I would suggest that the Tensor Equation to be delivered at this time be considered thoroughly and carefully. You will find that it applies to the experiences directly ahead whieh you will undergo. AsCHAPTER TWO 39 you experience, let your memories review these statements. Your Tensor Equation is as follow: In any statement about an object or an event, an indi~ vidual ie abseracting only a few of its characteristic If he says the chair is brown, he should mean that brown- ness is one of its qualities, and as he speaks he should be avare of many other qualities. Consciousness of ab- stracting, constitutes one of the main differences between a person who is Tensor Oriented and one who is nok. I continue. The map is not the territory. The word is not the thing described. Wherever the map is confused with the territory, a semantic disturbance develops in the organism, The disturbance continues until the individual ean discriminate and determine the limitation of the map. that, my brothers and sisters, is your Tensor Equation for this time. I have received much joy and pleasure in monitoring your many moments: It is with a great depth of feeling that I extend our welcome and that of my constant companion who now stands beside me. She expresses her love to you, also. Adonai, barragus. I am Soltec. Korton here. You may discontinue. Adonai. “A MISSILE FAILURE AND THE LORDS OF THE PLANETS" February 12, 1958 By: Sutko, Katonis Greetings, my brothers and sisters. I am Korton. Several wish to speak. One moment please. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Sutko. TI speak for the Tribunal, when again I state that your third, or shall we say fourth missile, known as the Vanguard, shall also fail. You have expressed concern, as to our statements, that there vas a potential source of danger to all of the earth's people in the launching of this particular vehicle. The dangers present are in the ionized particles of the reactor fuel being used in this missile, as it is of a different charac— ter than that used in others. You have heard enough data expressed con— cerning your ionosphere to note how rapidly contaminants could be spread around your planet affecting all peoples. 1 trust this salves your cur losities and wisdom looks a bit brighter. My "Light" to all of you. I am Sutko.40 CHAPTER Two Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Katonis. A short period back our good friend Oxoh, described several Beings of a High Order who were descending to your planet; a voluntary action to assist your peoples in the times lying ahead, The nanes as were given were somewhat difficult to comprehend, and if you will recall we mentioned furnishing the spelling in your language. I believe that we shall provoke a little thought in recounting these names and these beings. The Lord of Masar (Mars) has descended and is known as Nalacandra, That is the solar name in our language. The second Being, the Lord of the planet Venus is known as Perelandra. The third Lord is from the planet Satura and is known as Lurga. He, for your information, is known as the Incar~ nation.of the Word. The fourth who has visited is known as Veritilbia. He is known as the Lord of Meaning, or Thoth. He is Lord of the planet Mercury. You also have present the Lord of your earth, Esu. Then cones one whose magnificence and radiance pales the light of all others con bined, the Lord of our Solar System, the Glund-Oyarsa. It is for no small purpose, my brothers, that these Beings permeate the vibrations of your planet. The magnitude of out Creator's plan demands their presence at this time for the period yet to come. We speak not idly when we again impress you with the great imminence of events to happen. I am pleased to be back once again in your area. 1 look for= ward to speaking more often with all of you, but I have other duties pressing and so I must Leave. My Love and "Light" till we meet, I am Katonis. Adonai. Korton here. I have been notified that Bellarian, who had wished to speak earlier, has been called avay to more urgent duties. Therefore, noting the effect of our litele conversation, I believe it would be, perhaps, Kinder to discontinue at this moment, Study well, my brothers, that which you have received. You shall find it of value. Adonai, may the "Light" of Our Radiant One be with you. I am Korton. "Love" SOME COMMENTS ON THE SUBJECT February 12, 1958 By: Hatonn Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Hatonn. We have mentioned this subject briefly in the past. We will attempt to explain it more fully at this time. As you will recall, it was mentioned that love represented one of the greatest forces in the universe, one of the omipotent forces of the Creator. In the order of creation, first cane Divine thought which was expressed as "Light," Love, and at-one-nent vith all vibrations to come into existence. From this all permeating envelope of natter vibration came that known as the "WORD. With the "Word" came the second step in manifestation. The creationCHAPTER TWO 41 of MAN. Then came the creation of the Angels, and finally that known as the physical, the creation of the firmament. Love, as it is understood by our people, is an all encompassing force which brings about the creation of everything. Love as it filters down through the various levels of vibration takes on certain additional qualities. It becomes invested vith @ quality known as warmth, gentleness and a yearning to express itself. It manifests on all levels creating a subtle condition that only beings of high degree perceive its presence. Eventually it filters down to that known as the physical level or plane where it is expressed in var~ ious vays. For love, my brothers and sisters, like consciousness, just 1S. Love is sensed intuitively like a feeling one finds within one's self. One does not acquire love. One suddenly discovers ix is there, welling up from the depths of our being, seeking avenues of expression. Love that cannot be shared is = force that can disrupt one's universe Love must be accepted and returned via the medium of sympathetic vibration or by subtle means that are recognizable in our awareness. Love has a way of expressing itself as subtle tones of Light and shades of sounds Do not think I have used the wrong choice of words. We find among our people a great bond of kinship, an eager yearning to share love with all our fellow MAN. It is a force expressing itself through MAN, through our being, and it cannot be denied its expression. This is why, ny brothers and sisters, we have always greeted your people with love. It is the heart of ovr motive and the cause of our existence. Many of you know this feeling. It is sensed as a form of vibration. You have named it harmony. It is often sensed when you congregate in gatherings. If your subtler faculties were developed, then on these Occasions you would see a radiance issuing forth from your beings and your groups. This is often witnessed by others who dwell on the subtler levels of manifestation. It becones a "Light" which attracts their attention. Its brilliance is so intense that few mortals can view it, Hunan senses are numbed so that only a portion of love's radiance is visible on the physical plane. Tt is only after one's awareness is sufficiently developed that its majesty is seen on the higher planes. This topic is one we could discuss endlessly. What is stated here is only one of love's many facets. MAN ON EARTH -- INDIVIDUALLY, AND IN GROUPS: An individual's true being is capable of being conditioned prior to the experiencing of incarnate physical Life, This conditioning is Like, what your people call, a post-hypnotic suggestion. It can be activated by certain key events or sound vibrations. To illustrate: An individual is incarnate on your planet. The aware= ness of its being contains knowledge acquired through many life times. However, this information, by the use of certain conditioning, is parti- tioned off from this one's general conscious avareness. This conditioning (veiling) and the reason for it is understood by the individual prior to the act of becoming incarnate. This conditioning is not imposed by others. I am speaking of one of our people (MAN) who is functioning in42 CHAPTER TWO a human body on earth. MAN does not enter a human body through the birch process. It is only his avareness and spirit which becomes in~ earnate in an earthly human body. MAN does not reincarnate on the earth (go through the birth process). Were he to do so he would under— go the unique change and be of the race of Men. Thus, in order to remain MAN it is only his spirit and awareness which becomes resident in a human body. He is then MAN incarnate. You must realize the differ- ace between she proceas of birth (reincarnation) and exchange (incarnate). In order for this person (MAN) to be effective on your planet, total recall of awareness remains veiled uatil it is cequized. Then, depending on the type of recall trigger, instilled by the conditioning, MAN's awareness gradually returns. The timing is determined by the nature of events and their relationship to MAN's mission. To the unaware this might seem like a game of cosmic chance. How ever, to MAN there is nothing that is mere important than the mission. MAN must always volunteer for each mission. Few among you appreciate MAN's self-imposed handicap, that of trying to perform a mission with veiled avareness in a difficult environment. In addition there is the trauma, both mental and emotional, of being exposed to the negative thinking of men. Many hardships are experienced, because of this, which take time to undo after the human ordeal is ended. But regardless of this, many of our people (MAN) volunteer to come to your planet. They come to be of service to humankind, It is a work of love and a mission of importance. ‘Oftentimes, groups of teams of our people cone to your planet. Some missions require the efforts of many of our people. When these incarnate ones meet, it is not uncommon for them to sense and become avare of their 4¢@f relationship with one another. They sense the "Light" of MAN in each other. Remember, even a group becomes incarnate as individuals, and each is veiled to some extent. When they meet one another on your planet, a type of recognition takes place. Between themselves a sense of at-one-ness develops. This awareness is the "Light" within their being recognizing itself in the other person. ‘The individuals, concerned in this meeting, sense each others "Light" and its Love, both acutely and exquisitely. It makes no difference how it is recognized. Sonetimes it is sensed as an enveloping warmth of mental radiance; or, it can be emotions which sense and feel love and companionship. It ean also be the desire to be with another. If this perception produces physical awareness it should not be shunned because it ie the "Light" trying to express itself. One's own awareness and discernment can alvays detect love's radia~ tion and can sense its difference from that of desire. Among your people you do not think it strange if one clasps your hand in friendship. It is a sign of recognition. If the "Light's" presence is recognized you will drav closer to one another. Love, my brothers and sisters, is thus attempting to bring your individual "Lights' together so that they merge into a single "Light" of at-one-ment. All "Light," all Love, however and wherever manifest is seeking to coalesceCHAPTER TWO 43 and become at-one. When you recognize the Love and "Light" in your co- workers and friends, it is because your higher awareness acknowledges its source, The Radiant One. This may explain many of the unique rela~ tionships present among you and anong your groups. We have often monitored the harmony present in your groups. You attract our attention by the "Light" of at-one-ness and its merging when you are together. Love is not state of what you call mind. It is not a physical reaction. It can, of course, manifest as such, but love in its pure state is the essence of Divine thought. Love is thus a state of Being, not a state of mind. Te, like the "Light," transcends all forms of matter vibration until it returns back to its source ~~ The Radiant One. It reaches no higher. It is capable of expression in many forms. It is the "Light," the most potent force in all the cosnos. Love is not to be dieniseed lightly nor considered too seriously, because one can, by dwelling upon this subject, couse one's being to be shaken to a point where unbalance occurs. The mortal avareness is ineapable of comprehending the true nature and magnitude of love. It is better thought of, in your limited way, as a sharing of your Divine nature. ‘As men reach certain states of awareness they learn and experience. Impatiently trying to hurry the process can be harmful. No one is left out, as you say, because the "Light" will always reveal its Love vibra~ tion to all at the proper monent. HOW AN INDIVIDUAL IS HELPED WHEN HIS "LIGHT" IS DIM: Reports of your daily activities, as they reach my attention, never cease to awaken new thoughts of love and inspiration in my being. How- ever, it is sonetimes noted that shadows flit across your awareness. Perhaps this discussion will help remove these obstacles which try and dim your radiance and that of your inner being. Thought forms generated by the unenlightened thinking of humans on eth do not provide an ideal environment. Their darkness causes your ight” to hunger for additional "Light." When this type of hunger is experienced you feel alone, discouraged, and your "Light" is dimmed. iant One has not lost awareness of your "Light," nor has the removed its glow from your being. Unknown to you, great amounts of the "Light" and ite vibration of Love is being exercised upon the Therefore, my brothers and sisters, when ve sense your "Light" dimming from a lack of nourishment, "Light" nourishment, we are concerned. We immediately invoke the "Light" and direct that it permeate your being. We then note how you respond and we see the "Light" of your being respond in joy and radiate anew from the heart of your being. The Light" inherent in all earthly manifestation responds as it is touched by your inereasing radiance. However, there is something that you can do as well. To end your hunger for the "Light" you need only to affirm that the "Light" 18. Then invoke Its presence and entry into your being. Every atom of your physical body and even the ether surrounding you will then vibrate at44 CHAPTER TWO the same pitch. The "Light" will chase away the shadows which try and obscure it and your hunger will no longer be present. I am enveloped with great love and affection for each of you, and shadows which dim your "Light" cause me deep pain. To remove that pain, my every effort is directed towards enhancing your "Light" once again. All of your brethers and sisters in space, if they were aware of your plight, would also respond in the same manner. MAN, as 2 cosmic parent, cannot help but love the children of earth, the race of humans. Love is a tangible force which is felt, by those sensitive to its vibrations, across the reach of galaxies. It travels on planes of ether. When you sense love it is because it has reached from the ethers to touch your being with infinite yearning. These sane ethere also compose the real body of MAN. Everywhere in the cosmos a dimming of the "Light" and Love is felt in the same manner. Being of MAN, do you think that you respond any differently? When love is present and wells up within one's being, and cannot be expressed, cannot be radiated, one of the most potent forces in the cosmos is being held dangerously in check. A similar condition exists when this power of love is ignorantly mis-used. Sensing this negative condition, this unnatural state, matter in the various planes tends to draw inward and conserve its "Light" integrity. This is such a serious condition that when it is discovered, many "Lighted" beings immediately seek to effect a correction by releasing the pent-up force. Once it is released they transform it into more "Light" and radiate it into the environment. My brothers and sisters, study yourselves. Learn to ree~ ognize the "Light" and its twin radiation of Love. Sense its real pres~ ence and let it radiate from your thoughts. Recognize its real source, the "Light," when you receive it from others. Remember, that only humans have trouble discerning the difference between real love, and lust- ful desire. HOW MAN RECOGNIZES OUR "LIGHT" AND HELPS US: My brothers, we have been present on the earth. We now find ourselves engaged in a mighty effort. We are in the humble position of performing a service for the people of earth. Much of our success is a result of the "Light" and its Love and how we have expressed it. We have spoken of love's varied expressions and have noted how earth people use and mis-use it according to their degrees of awareness. We have monitored the thinking of humans. Much is to their credit and sone is not worthy of mention, However, to our great joy we detect an ever increasing level of human awareness. Love, as we have mentioned it, is the twin of the "Light." It can be shared with the people of earth. It stirs the emotions of humans and has an effect on their mental processes. It also effects the subtle phases of their being, those phases beyond their present comprehension and perception. If men could see themselves as we see them, see their “Light,” they would see a wonderful sight. We see not only the physical bodies of men, but the forces which ebb and flow about then. We see how their thinking modulates these forces, and how it affects everything about them.CHAPTER TWO 45 We see these things, end it is because of this type of vision that we can determine the various states and degrees of awareness present in hunans. We see all this in MAN incarnate as well. ALL this is revealed to our vision by the "Light" £ ine divitual radiates. We acknowledge your "Light" and reepond to it with love. If you could see your "Light" a8 ve do, you would see « shapes Ted of force that extends thousands of miles up from your present locé- tions. Some among you can sce thie with a higher vision, Some can even sense our presence and that of other still greater beings. Even as ve Speak, there are many such beings present in a circle about you. They seegathered to witness your "Light" and to contribute theire to your srtnccing. Sone among you even feel their closeness and their radiation of love. My brothers and sisters, within our being there exists = greet long” ing, a longing to once again be with you. We have stated that ins com Hibs say we will be present physically im your aidet. We have waited (OF ing tty ee tine, Perhaps the meeting is closer than you think. In the feantine ve witness your "Light" gradually increasing and your degrees Of awareness expanding. There ere also tines when out thoughts, our emo” Clone end our love reach out to you across the vastness of space. We hope you detect its gentle touch. you see, we have shared sany lifetines together as brothers and sis— tere in the fenily of MAN. Many upon the earth will once again be re" tere avitn their kin as their missions are completed and when it is time for our physical presence upon the earth. As you know, ve do mot stage degonstrations to provide you with visible evidence of our presence, We qertot resort to the sensational, to create an impact. We see your cehects and ours progressing as intended. Neither of us are alone in Chie work; other great beings of "Light" are also working and making an ceeere on behalf of the earth. The planet's destiny and its future evolu” crforent in their care. We, your brothers in space, are mevely helpers. soon our physical presence on earth is called for. Earth is about to experience the dawn of a New Age. The Numan Race of Men is about fo Eeceg extinct. ‘Those that remain on earth will have nade a transition, te cowtL] now be MAN, end those that do not will becone fledgling MAN on ane vex world. Humans will no longer exist in the cosnos. Even a8 we Speak, a Great "Light" from the cosmos draws closer to the Soler System ePetaining earth. Soon it will fill the heavens and the earth will be transfigured. T depart now. May the "Light" of Our Radiant One be with you always. Adonai. I am Hatonn. were46 CHAPTER TWO "THE SUBJEGT OF CONSCIOUSNESS" February 13, 1958 By: Ketonis If some of our statements on this subject appear strange or even fan— tastic, and to some, they will; until enough chought has been given then. The idea that the human body may be made incorruptible, everlasting, and that it may be regenerated and restored to a state of perfection and eternal life, may seem Like a strange statement. If ve further state that this state of perfection and eternal life is to be gained, not after death, but in the physical world while one lives, it may appear a strange statement. But when examined intelligent= ly} you will find it is not unreasonable. What is unreasonable is that the physical body must die; atill more unreasonable is the proposition that it is only by dying that one can live forever. Scientists, on your planet, have of late been saying that there is no reason why the life of the body could not be extended indef- initely, although they do not appear to know how thie can be accomplished. Certainly, hunan bodies have always been subject to death; but they die simply because no reasonable effort has been made to regenerate them. Every human is a double mystery, the mystery of himself and the nys- tery of the body he is in. He has, and is, the lock and the key to these mysteries. His body is the lock, and he is the key to that lock. One of the purposes of our talks is to help you to know how to understand yourself, One method is how to use yourself as the key to open the lock, which is your body, and through your body how to know and understand the mysteries of nature and of matter. Your higher mind and your spirit (the "Light") ie the operator of your individual body machine. Your body acts and reacts with, and in Felation to, nature. When you solve this mystery of the higher mind and its relationship with the body, you will know in great detail the fune- tions of your body and how it can be in harmony with nature, Another mystery Ls tim. Time is an ever present and ordinary topic of conversation, Yet when one tries to think about it, and tell what it really is, it becomes abstract, unfamiliar. It cannot be held. One fails to grasp it. It eludes us. What it really is has not been explained. Time is the change of units, or of masses of units, in their relationship to each other. This simple definition applies anywhere, everywhere, and under every state or condition. You can manipulate time, but you must think about it and its application before you can understand it. Your conscious objective mind must understand time while it is in its active waking state. Because, as you have noted, time seems to be different in other states. To the objective, conscious mind == time seems not to be the same when you are avake as it seems to be when you are asleep or dreaming. Each time period has a beginning, a succession, and an end, Time seems to crawl in childhood, run in youth, and race in ever increasing speed until the death of the human physical body. Time is the web of change. It is woven from the infinite to the ever changing avareness of man. The loom of time, on which the web is woven, is che soul of man, Your higher mind is the one which made the loon,CHAPTER TWO 47 It spins the web -- veaves the veils that you call past, present and future, Your thoughts spin the web of time. CONSCIOUSNESS is another mystery. The greatest and most profound of all aysteries. Even the word, in your language, is unique. Tt isa coined word, Ita equivalent does not appear in other languages. Its Sil important value and meaning are not, however, appreciated. Thie son te dilgeteated in the semantic use of the word. Let us examine some of the ways it is misused. de have heard thie word used in such expressions as: my conscious ness, or perhaps 46 one's consciousness, and in such ways 25 animal consciousness, human consciousness, physical, psychic, cosmic, and other kinds of consciousness. It has been described as normal consciousness, the greater, the deeper, the higher, the lower, the imner, and the outer fonsciousness. Mention is also heard of the beginnings of consciouencss, or a change in consciousness. 'A very common misuse of the term is heard in such phrases as to Love eonceiousess, to hold, to regain, to use, to develop, ete. You further Sfead its meaning when you speak of various states, planes, levels, degrees, and even conditions of consciousness. Consciousness is too magnificent to be thus qualified, limited, or proscribed. Please note this vell: Whatever is conscious, is conscious Of what it is, or is aware that it is conscious. Consciousness is the ultimate, the final reality. Consciousness is that presence of which all things are conscious. Without it, nothing could be conscious. None could think, no being, no entity, no force, Could perform any function. Yet, consciousness itself performs no func~ tion. Consciousness, itself, does not act in any way, yet it is present everyshere, Because of its presence all things ate aware that they are fonscious. Consciousness is not a cause. It cannot be moved or used in Sny way, or be affected by anything. Te does not inerease or diminish, expand or contract, or change in any vay. ‘Although there are countless degrees in being conscious, there are no degrees of consciousness. There are no planes, no states, no grades, Ro divisions or variations of any kind. It is the same everywhere in sll things. Consciousness has no properties, no qualities, no attributes. It does not possess anything. It cannot be possessed. For consciousness fe the atmosphere of the Divine -- The Radiant One -- thet is present ae an essence in all manifestation. Consciousness -- just 1S. Again, the purpose of these talks is to bring more “Light.” More “bight” upon your thinking. "Light" co find your vay through Life. The "Light" we speak of is not the light of nature. It ie the "Light of The Radiant One. It may be new to your thinking, in a conscious Sense, but it hao forever been a presence within your being. We are attempting to bring an awareness of this “Light” Essence, within. This "Light" can show you things as they really are. Tt is 120 a "Light" of intelligence to which you are related. It is because of the presence of this "Light" ehat you are capable of engaging in thought48 CHAPTER Two or in creating thoughts. Thoughts to create, with nature as your assis~ tant, or thoughts to free you from the strangulation of your environment. Real thinking, is the steady holding of the "Light," focusing it on your conscious thinking. By your thinking end your thoughts you make your destiny. Right thinking is the way to the knowledge of yourself. Tt is that thinking, in the "Light," which can show you the way, and it can lead you on your way. Thoughts are real things. They axe teat! They are the only real things MAN creates. Thoughts are more lasting than the physical organ- iom, that from the translation of thought, helped to bring its manife: tation into the physical realm, In the mind of MAN thoughts are "blue-prints," designs and models, from which he builds out the tangible material things with which he has changed his civilization and the face of nature. They govern his way of living. Thoughts are the ideas or forms, out of which, and upon which, civilizations throughout the universe are built and maintained Perhaps we ean explain how the unseen thoughts of MAN exteriorize as the acts and the objects and the events of an individual and his col- lective life, creating his destiny through life and after life. At this point we must discuss the Mind. The word Mind, as it is most commonly used, is the all inclusive term which is made to apply to all kinds of thinking. On earth, men and women suppose that man has only one Mind. Actually, he has three different and distinet minds, That is, he has three ways of thinking with the conscious "Light" vithin. There is: ‘The mind of the body The mind of desire. The mind of feeling. that which you term your objective mind. In the higher realms of thought and spirit there is the Higher Mind. The three body minds, lumped together, should be under the direction - of this higher mind. On earth, many function using only the three lover minds of the body. The Mind of the body is that which is conmonly referred to as the objective mind or intellect. Under the prompting of the minds of feeling and desire it functions as the mover of physical nature, as the operator of the physical body, and hence is called -- the body mind. This body mind is the only one that is geared to, and acts with and through the senses of the body. (The five physical senses.) Thus, it is the instrument by which your higher mind is kept aware of your functionings on the physical level of manifestation. Your feeling mind and your desire mind are the functionings of feeling and desire, irrespective of, or in connection with the physical world. Because of their clese links with the body mind, at most times they are completely submerged in and controlled by the mind of the body. There- fore, practically all the activities of these other two lower minds (feeling and desire) has been made to conform with the thinking of the "objec~ tive" body mind. This prevents the Higher Mind from being able to communicate with itsCHAPTER TWO 49 subordinate minds most of the time. It can then only communicate with the mind of the body, desize, or feeling when you are out of the body, vhen you are asleep, or when your objective mind is quiet. So the statement that man consists of body, soul and spirit can readily be understood as meaning that the physical body is composed of gross matter; that the spirit is the life essence -- the "Light," the motivator in thought, and that the soul is the inner form, the inperish- able model of the visible structure. In this fact lies the germ of the body's perfection and immortality. ee50 CHAPTER THREE "COUNCIL ACTIONS REGARDING EARTR" February 20, 1958 By: Sutko, Non-Ka, Soltec Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton. By invitation we shall be present at another Council meeting. You are already familiar with our placement in the Gouncil Chambers. Kadar Sutke will speak. One monent please. I, Sutko, bring this Council to order. I wish it known to all pre~ sent that procedures and preparations are progressing according to our outlines regarding the planet earth. It has been brought to my atten— tion that our people have penetrated into the necessary positions to properly bring about an awakening effect upon that body, known as the United States Government and their United Nations. Even now those events are under way, which are soon to precipitate crisis in the larger organization. It is at this time that our influence will be more greatly needed. Those problems regarding their Middle Eastern crisis will soon multiply as more activation from nuclear power plants are exercised upon those peoples. We are most pleased that the Great Ones who are in supervision con- eur and conelude that our efforts have been directed according to their wishes. Our Chronomonitors are relaying information as each situation develops so that we may study the effects of what has been unleashed, Already, our member groups have been notified of the changes about to take place, and conditionings have been exercised to bring them into positions of relative merit and service, dictated by each event. I have been informed that our brother Non-Ka wishes to speak for a moment vegarding certain events. If you will step forward, ny brother, Greetings. I, Mon-Ka, appreciate the time allotted for what I say. According to the wishes of our great Perelandra, we have seen fit to deploy our forces in a manner so prescribed. We now have our craft stationed in strategic places about earth's surface in the event that the evacuation of certain areas becomes necessary. According to our latest information, this is merely in anticipation of uncomprehended events. My brothers of the Council, needless to say we have labored long to see this one (the earth) returned to its rightful place in our Confederation. It is deeply satisfying to know, that, this time is not far in the future. It is somewhat saddening to note the measures which have been called for in dealing with the more recalcitrant forces. How- ever, the greater good resulting for our brothers on earth over-illumi- nates any misgivings any of us have experienced. 1 like to hold the thought, regarding our sister planet, that "Light" is like unto "Light" Love is creative and is of creation; man has a destiny; all men must carry out Our Radiant One's purpose. It is most encouraging and warmingCHAPTER THREE 51 to realize that earth once again shall clasp hands in friendship with our peoples. Now I have stated my remarks, I bow to our superiors. Adonai, Oh Radiant One. I, Sutko, heartily endorse our brother's words and further mention that the Great Ones in attendance have carefully brought their powers to bear on thie situation. ‘The great power generating stations, deacti- Vated over eons of time upon earth, have not only been reactivated but are now doing the Labors called upon in great demand, It is evident to those among this Council, who were not present in earth's earlier stages, of how these units functioned in the past. For those of us who have long avaited seeing the mighty radiance, again fanning upwards and out~ wards through the earth's fields, it is indeed a magnificent sight and traly a nost inspiring one. Tf you will all turn and look at your view Geresns you will notice this occurring. Examine carefully the auric effect now emanating from certain continents on the earth's surface. You will also notice that the stabilization of the earth's rotational dynamics is being more and more affected. The "Gridley" generators, a5 you notice, have bolstered the magnetic fields at the poles, to bring the eccentricity of orbit and rotation more nearly into alignment. A planetary pole reversal ie now no longer thought by our scientists to be an impending event. Calculations based upon these predicted results are most encouraging. T have been informed an emissary from Vega will arrive shortly in order to view this phenomenon. He is to be made welcone and shown every courtesy. You have noted, from the data supplied, that tuo craft from Procyon have been within the orbit of Mercury conducting experiments with Sol (the Sun). ‘These craft, I am informed, will be departing Shortly and will need clearance through Mare for their departure. This, I believe concludes our present meeting. I wish several of you to remain afterwards as I have other matters to discuss. I see no few thoughts arriving concerning present business; therefore, the Solar Council is dismissed. Adonai. May your journeys home be pleasant, and my greetings to our monitors. Adonai, my brothers. Korton here. I will now relay you through to one whom you know well. one moment please. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Soltec. I have noted with great interest the evolvenent of ideas and the machinations of your mental processes. You have reached a point, my brothers, where Jou may now discuss moe fully those tenets uppermost in your minds con- {erning your mission objectives. Your progress along this line, though slow, has been most encouraging, and I am pleased to note the obvious eautiousness displayed in entering this situation, Referring momentarily to the preparation of material for your radio broadcasts, I would suggest you inform the one to your south that he be permitted to broadcast that comunication he received. Little is needed Upon reviewing your first portion except mere window dressing, as you say.52 CHAPTER THREE Rowena has, it is noted, delved into the necessary material for your second half. This you should, as tine permits, undertake. I am most pleased to announce that Mon-Ka and Hatonn have both been delegated to deliver a series of most interesting topics, calculated to instill those feelings and attitudes, our psychologists deem necessary for your future broadcasts, I do not believe narration could have been placed in more capable hands. 1 take personal note of your intriguing mental gymnastics regarding your latest Tensor Equation. Much goes on, my brothers, as we have mentioned, upon the non-verbal level, It is interesting to note that slow filtering process rendered possible dy your unconscious reactions to the cortical pause. Tt is ay great pleasure to have again had the opportunity to speak. I, and the one who stands beside me, Surnia, look with great joy in our hearts upon your peoples. The time is almost at hand when we shall welcome your presence. Soon I understand, my mate would converse with you also, a viewpoint I can hardly say I look upon without some mis- ‘givings. As you are avare, our mates oftentimes place themselves in most amusing situations. However, no criticism is intended, merely a little mental joke. I see that the two others who would have spoken have been called avay. Adonai, may His "Light" be with you always. I am Soltec. kee ER "A GALACTIC TOUR" March 8, 1958 Solar Cross Tape # 11-B By: Hatonn Greetings, Oh Children of the "Light." I am Hatonn. At this time, ny brothers and sisters, we shall take you upon a little journey far xenoved from your Solar System. We board one of our craft and slowly work our way out of your Solar System to examine some of the wonders which lie about you. We are entering that area known now as your galaxy. About us lie myriads of stars, flaming suns giving light to that which ‘our Creator has envisioned. We set our course first for your nearest neighbor, known to your peoples as Alpha Centauri. We come close to this one and see a blinding white sun circled by two planets -- one of these known as Centaurus, the other as Beta Centauri. As we approach, we come to an interesting sight, for here, my brothers, we see lofty mountain peaks, snow capped ranges extending as far as the eye can perceive, very similar to your Himalayas, for Centaurus is a mammoth planet. its peoples ere a race progressed perhaps ten to fifteen thousand of your years in advance of your planet's cultures or technologies. Here, we see great and mighty cities with a spirit of eternal youth expressing itself in all line and form, and the people themselves radiate a type of warmth and friendli- ness which is a direct result of their evolution. Your music expresses itself wieh that sense of all pervading enthusiasm and well-being, ai experienced by all those who dwell upon this planet; for here we see aCHAPTER THREE 53 nighty race of beings; a civilization whose achievements are well recognized throughout not only this galaxy, but others. We find, and perhaps it is no coincidence, that one who speaks with you regularly (Seltec) enjoys this training of philosophy and the deeper meanings of life; for these ones have truly achieved a sense of rapport with Life and all experience. It is a majestic sight, one which is inspiring to all. ‘And now, Let us move on and explore sone of your more familiar constellations. As we progress outwards, we approach that blazing orb in the heavens known as Aldebaran. Here, ve see a mighty sun throwing tongues of flame billions of miles into the heavens ~~ a spectacle which would overwhelm most eyes upon your surface, We see not one nor two, but a dozen planets circling this mighty one. We see evidences of more than one race -- actually there are five -- and here we come across a most interesting phenomena. It is known to your peoples that the Great Pyramids of your ancient history were wonders incapable of being produced by the primitive folk of that period. This, my brothers and sisters, is vhere those power generators were conceived and these were the ones who supervised their construction upon your planet. Here the sciences have progressed to an amazing degree. We see evidences as ve approach and notice their tall spiraled and spired cities, that transportation does not even require the use of vehicles. We see central power distribution systems, five in number, supplying energy for the use and consumption of all upon this planet. We see high speed causeways, which transport their citizenry from one place to another. One merely steps aboard a moving field of light and, faster than can be comprehended, has arrived at their destination. As this planet enters its might cycle, it is a most beautiful sight to behold, for everywhere its surface is criss-erossed by various shades and shafts of Light connecting their various population centers -— these causeways are used for the transport of their commerce and their beings. We also see spacecraft of unique construction. Here, ve see spacecraft being manufactured and the shape is entirely spherical. Knowing of the technical difficulties encountered in propulsion, these ones have solved the method of propelling their ships by types of magnetic fields that are indeed highly advanced. Now, as we circle about and traverse further, we come to still more different sights; for now, we project ourselves through that form of space known as sub-etheric where we warp the very fabric of time about our eraft, and we head for the distant one know to your peoples as Sirius; one of the brightest objects in the heavens. And, as we draw close, again we notice a planetary system, for you see, my brothers and sisters, life is not a unique facet of creation; it <4 creation. It is not uncommon, it is prolific. As we draw inwards towards this one, we notice several interesting things. Let us see how adequately your music can describe this scene, for we are witnessing titanic forces in control of a planet. Here, we sce gigantic mining operations vast beyond comprehension. We see minerals54 CHAPTER THREE being extruded from the core of a planet, minerals which your atonic tables are not even avare of. We see here metals known to our peoples as tellonium, as crysacollum, alloys which impart characteristics to other baser netals which provide interesting structural effects and, of which a great many of our craft are manufactured. We find substances here also in collarium, for instance, which is perhaps hundreds of tines stronger and harder than that you know as dianonds. We see here an interesting sight, for here we have solar energy employed on a scale which is staggering. Huge parabolic reflectors, hundreds of ailes in diameter, focusing the radiant output of this sun on areas where those metals are reduced to incandescent gases and recombined te form other metals and alloys. We see huge cargo craft in orbit upon orbit circling this planct, waiting for their turns to descend and remove the products of this industry, You see, my brothers, beyond the mere facts that we have also progressed, we have learned to use energies and tura for an ever increasing source of supply to our neighboring systens and remoter regions of the galaxy. But here we see examples of MAN's progress on a hugh scale. Your combined planetary output would perhaps equal five minutes production of this one's output. Now, having viewed this, let us again move on and this time, where shall we go? There are so many glittering gems hanging in this black velvet drop, cach with a story, interesting. But I believe I know of one which shall interest you. Let us now again channel ourselves into the funnel of force and shortly ve arrive at one which is known to your peoples by the name of Betelgeuse, 1 can see from your expressions many of you will require textbooks to understand vhat I speak of. How- ever, you will find even them interesting in their way. Let us now approach this one with a certain degree of caution; for around the planet of Betelgeuse, we see softly pulsating violet glows which immediately impinge upon our senses and tell us that here are force fields of a nature that is very subtle. As we make the necessary adjustments, we gradually descend and upon this one we shall land our craft and pause briefly to walk about. ‘The most interesting thing which strikes our vision is the fact that we see no one about, and yet we find evidences of orderliness and a beauty which is indeed inspicing. We see a mighty city which appears deserted and into which ve shall make our way. We softly descend and look about. We have landed upon @ broad avenue in the heart of this city, and we stand and are transfixed by the slanting golden rays of illumination which strike and reflect off of the tall structures about us. We walk softly down thie parkway, passing between corridors of mighty structures. We see beautiful shrubs and flowers. We see indeed the look of extreme orderliness, and yet it does pose a problem, for where are the inhabitants of this world? We look about and still see none, and then an interesting sight attracts our eyes, for directly ahead stands tall portals which resenble someuhat the en~ trances to one of your cathedrals. We walk forward slowly, up several steps, pass through the portals and find ourselves in an entrance way facing a huge courtyard. We have a feeling here of a force which is acting directly upon our senses. We nove slowly into the courtyard and we see ahead of us a fountain lifting feathery fingers of - yes, it is water of many colors and hues, into theCHAPTER THREE 55 air in graceful formations. And about us, a walkway winding through hooded arbors, banks of vegetation; and we find an all pervading sense ‘of concealed dynamics, of energies Latent in this environment and we sense a type of quiet contentment; for great forces, ve feel, abide in this deserted place. As we walk about looking with rapture upon this sense of ideal perfection, we see a stone bench ahead. Peculiarly, we feel drawn and we step forvard and seat ourselves. And as we do this, again the feeling -- why is all of this deserted? And then to our amazement, a form starts to take place before our eyes and lo, we have one appearing who could be called an Elder; in his soft robes, his flowing beard, and the expression upon his face and in his eyes proclaims him to be a Master. We stand and then kneel before this one who walks to us and places his hand upon our heads. A feeling of great benevolence, of great "Light," passes through our bodies, and then this one bids us to stay as long as we desire. But we have much yet to witness, and after having received the vibrations of this place, we again turn and trace our footsteps back to our craft. Now, as we rise slowly above this planet's circle and again gaze out into the depths of utter darkness, we shall pick another place of inter~ est. Your music proclaims a somewhat martial air, so let us take a look at those who enjoy themselves in the practice of military tactics. Does this sound strange, uy brothers and sisters? Well, knowing of evolution, it should not be so. We approach now one known to your astronomers as a little planet, and a very dim one. We shall go now to one known as Wolf 359 and here we find the pageantry and color, the way of life prevalent upon your planet during what you called your Middle Ages. For here, my brothers, we find a planet whose scale of evolution is no higher than this. One, indeed, who is actually behind you (behind the earth in evolution). We look down from our heights carefully so we won't attract their attention, and we look as we surround our craft with a heavy fog to sim- ulate their cloud formations. We see castles and, indeed, an evolution similar to that which transpired upon your planet in early days. Callents mounted upon horses carrying their lances and going forth to meet per haps, a dragon. A feudalistic world -— one knowing naught but the power of might. Indeed, one which has yet much to learn. Yet, my brothers and sisters, how can we from loftier heights not look upon this budding one and realize, that all who have evolved have experienced similar moments? Even in this, we see the handiwork of He, who is known as our Creator. MAN's striving attempts again co ever reach upwards and outwards towards that goal which he knows exists in infinity. Now, let us move on again and we shall find one who will prove most interesting. Let us now head our craft towards another corner of our galaxy. Let us go and visit that strange one known to your astronomers as Procyon. You are aware, of course, of those Beings who dwell thereon, but let us now go and take a closer look. ‘As we approach this one, we again feel impinging upon our perceptions a subtle vibration, and as we glance through our viewing screens, we notice that our approach has not gone unnoticed; for about us materialize craft which dwarf ours in size such as your planet dwarfs, shall ve say,56 CHAPTER THREE a grain of sand. Do you not notice, my brothers and sisters, a differ ence here in scenery apparent immediately? As we are acknowledged and proceed lower down towards this one's surface, we feel an effervescent sense of joy and well-being, and here we behold sights which truly confound even we who have witnessed 0 much, Perhaps, my brothers, this shall prove our most interesting stop- over, for as we look about we notice that there is nothing actually to see. And as we communicate this startling knowledge to the craft still hovering with us, we are informed that this ie as it is to be. For Procyon's force fields are so tuned, that upon the approach of a space craft, they render the planet invisible. We are warned not to becone frightened as reality appears about us. Then, as we slowly descend, we notice one of their great craft hovering ever closer to ours; and then, a cone of violet light is emitted from the craft above us, and we are caught up in its swirling lumines- cense and suddenly turned about and brought down closer and closer to that we know is a planet. Yet, such does not show to our vision, and suddenly there bursts about us a light of intensely blinding white radiance. There before us lies a gem of emerald green, of beauty beyond description. As we settle downwards now, through a field of force which refracts Light about it to make this planet invisible, we hover uncertainly, for where do we land? There are mountains, there are valleys; all is one vast mighty panorama of a magnificient civilization. For we see here dwellings suspended in their atmosphere. We see here buildings which are not buildings, but rather colosseuns, transformed and supported upon shafts of invisible energy. We see mighty structures reflecting the light of the entire visible spectrum in every shade and hue capable of registering upon our eyes. We feel the soft palpitations of vibrations coursing through the air. We are greeted and buffeted by wave after wave of a feeling of Jove so intense that our senses become heady and our beings flushed by this sensation. Truly, this does take getting used to for here ve meet the mighty Beings of Procyon, who approach our ship as it is dravn down to a landing area the size of one of your great cities. As our craft gently settles towards their surface, we are greeted by three who appear suddenly at our entrance way and beckon us to descend. And when we have done this, we are taken by our hands and led or should I say lifted, for I do not know which, to a hugh structure Which surrounds this lending area and we notice one -- one most staggering thought as we progress -- that our feet have never yet touched this surface, Indeed, we seem to not have any weight, for as we stare we see that our shoes do not even touch this one's surface. We are told that this is possible because of minute films of energy which form layers between our feet and their surface -~ a type of controlled force field. The reasons for this, we are avare are not immediately apparent, but our gaze is caught and held; for in looking about us, we do notice that we have indeed touched down upon a planet eons and cons of time in all of our futures. For this, my brothers, the mighty one, Procyon, with the Beings vho inhabit its surface, who enjoy the privileges of this place, are indeed examples of what MAN and his evolution and inCHAPTER THREE 57 his strivings would have an opportunity to advance to, if he is not hin- dered. Now, our guides inform us that we shall only be allowed to witness a certain number of wonders upon this planet. We can readily understand that there are some things that are present here -- things that can be sensed through the very vibrations of the ether and air about us; forces vhich seem to sing hymns to our very beings: to diffuse our minds end envelop them, expanding and contracting in various many colored hues of light. We hear choruses, singing in our minds, of places strange to the foot of MAN; and we feel that any who set foot on this one's surface are indeed truly humbled; if not by those Beings who are with us, then by the very nature of this planet's vibrations. Now, we are led into a strange structure upon our right; and we stand there, spellbound, for what we are gazing upon is something which does descry our meager and humble descriptions. For what we are gazing upon is a sphere of whirling light, not suspended by anything visible, but merely rotating. We are told that this is a scientific device that ereates energy equivalent to a million suns. We are told that this energy is directed to any place upon this planet and that this one power plant can control the very atomic nature of all matter within this one's planetary field. We are now led to another structure, where again a certain warmth is felt, for here we gaze upon something which slightly resembles an object within my planet's environment. We see here a mighty jewel, which is pulsating with a soft glow, and which we feel humble enough to bow our heads to. And as we stand before this sight, we feel tears springing to our eyes and fountaining down our cheeks; for as we look more closely, we begin to comprehend that three shadowy shapes are taking place, hovering in a mist-Like beauty above this gleaming jewel; and we begin to realize that perhaps, we are in the presence of the Trinity. Now, my brothers, let us proceed outwards and back, back to our start= ing place; back to your planet, the earth, and as we arrive back again, we hope you have enjoyed this little trip. When we next speak with you, we shall deliver a topic long avaited by your people. I shall again have the pleasure of introducing you to another brother who will, perhaps, introduce you to the more intimate mysteries of only one object and one setting. For upon this occasion, we shall examine at great length and with, perhaps minute detail, that object known as your Great Pyramid. We shall walk about and through this mighty structure, trying as we proceed, to explain the varied as~ pects and significances of what this represents to the earth. ‘And now, my brothers, I shall depart with great love in my heart for all of you, and hope that we do have the privilege again of being wich you and of sharing those things which are of beauty and "Light. For, as you are all aware, with the proper awarenesé of these powers of Universal Law, we could ali become just that much closer to that which has received our adoration. I would leave you with our peace and "Light," with the ever expanding hope that we shall again have the privilege of addressing you, our brothers and sisters, people of earth. May Our Ra~ diant One's "Light" be with all of you evermore and may the "Light" of58 CHAPTER THREE my humble being also be expressed to you in the hour of your needs. ‘Adonai, Oh Children of earth. I am Hatonn, we "THE GREAT PYRAMID" March 12, 1958 Solar Cross Tape # 7: By: Kla-La Greetings in the "Light" of Our Infinite One. I am Kla-La. In speaking at this time, we deal with the subject of your Great Pyramid. In the beginning, approximately 45,600 years before your Christ, the Galactic Survey ships of the Confederation were to establish an out- post and beacon upon your planet earth. The crews from the third planet of Aldebaran approached your planet and started construction on what is known in your day as your Great Pyramid. Huge blocks of the substance granite were quarried from the heart of a continent and brought by their craft to their present loca tion, Huge disrays cut and sliced and shaped these blocks to infinite dimensions. The tribes at this time were frightened, thinking that the craft in their heavens were remnants of some fabled gods descending to the earth, and we felt it would not be necessary to discourage this. In that edifice known as your Great Pyramid were Laid generators, totaling millions of watts energy, sending out beams and guideways for our craft for navigational purposes. Noticing the tremendous impact that this structure had upon the native populace, it was felt that sub- sidiary functions could be included. Also, at that time, it was felt desirable to place observation teams of our people upon your planet to check the rates of progress of various races and to help in establishing more even distribution. This is where your scientific circles find evi dence of many types of flora and fauna scattered throughout all portions of your globe. Our people, setting forth in their mighty star ships, regularly visited your planet. Seeing the needs of cultures yet to be born, certain influences were thought to be in order. These were placed, again, in the Pyramid. A shaft directly below the subterranean chanber, at a level of 243 feet, was sunk and there the mightiest generators of a race over a million of your years old, were installed and which, ay brothers, function even to this day. These performed twofold purposes. One, they helped eliminate an alarming degree of axial excursion present at your north and south poles. Secondly, they provided more temperate climates throughout many portions of your world which were still recover- ing from a rather staggering glacial age. Much later (circa 3000 BC), one known to your scientists as Cheops or Khufu, puzzling at thie spectacle which our Pyramid presented, decided that such a monument should at least be established more in an appearance sense than it was. Thousands of the native population were set to work and slabs and blocks of pure Lime (stone) were built up around our pri- wary efforts, providing a more textured surface. Not knowing what theCHAPTER THREE 59 peculiar metal (copper), at that time, was adorning the top, they decided to let it shine forth, for it could be seen by travelers many miles avay. This is where your ancient Grecian writer thought it to be a fact that Khufu was the one to have erected the Pyramid. Unknown to many people, regular crews of our people manned the equipment, for the original intent of that area known as the Queen's Chamber was primarily an interstellar communications room. The area known as the King's Chamber was later installed by our people for healing various physical ailments common to your peoples. Our people, under the guise of their local priests of the tine, administered treatments which were thought by many to be miracles. In this, we found an expedient way of lending some aid where possible. And at all tines the mighty throb of hidden generators below the base of this monument, were continually throw ing radiant beams of energy out into the heavens of our universe to guide our many craft. Later, eight more pyramids (built by Egyptian Pharaohs, not the Space Friends) were constructed, bringing the total to nine, stretching e distance of 63 miles along the western bank of the Nile. It has always puzzled your peoples as to the exact dimensions of our Pyramid. I shall now give you the exact dimensions as initially constructed. Lf these do not agree today, it is because of alterations of earlier races and Pharaohs to the main structure. The base of our Pyramid was 765 feet square. The total height was 486 feet. The entrance way was located exactly 54 feet above the base on the north side and constructed in such a manner that the light of your pole ster would forever shine down the entire length of its 324 Foot corridor to the subterranean chanbers. A feat, my brothers, none of your more infant races could possibly have engineered. This is also the direction of your true magnetic north pole, The reason, this was constructed so, was to keep the pole star centered, and thus alleviate any further axial excursions of your planet. Two hundred forty-three feet below the base rests machines your scientists would forever marvel upon. The area of our entrance way was nine square feet, ending in a subterranean chanber, from which another passageway, extending 63 feet, ended in 2 blank wall. Blank for a purpose, for nine feet further would disclose the sub-etheric generators. Seventy-two feet above the base in the Queen's Chamber, consisting of 1,134 square feet of area, and nine feet, again, above the Queen's Chamber, rests the present communication facilities. Nine feet below the King's Chamber Lie those machines once installed on a higher level. There are also three more areas unknown to your present science within this structure. You will notice, my brothers, that of all figures I have mentioned, they are all multiples of the nuneral "nine." The reason for this being that nine is the key to the mathematical science dealing with magnetics. You may bear this in mind. It has been my privilege to speak. tee60 CHAPTER THREE "SPACECRAFT # 1" March 17, 1958 Solar Cross Tape # 7-3 By: KlacLa Greetings in the “Light” of Our Radiant One. 1 am Kla-La. It has been observed that your people have many questions regarding those of our eraft seen within your atmosphere, and to those that it has been runored, exist. Let me mention, ay brothers, that in the immediate vicinity of your planet there are, at the monent (in 1958), approximately 10,000,000 of our spacecraft. Those available in this Soler System would raise this figure significantly. In the galaxy, the figure would approach 200,000,000. The question must arrive in your minds ‘as to the purposes involving so many craft, and this I will attempt to elaborate upon. We of the Confederation utilize various forms of spacecraft for many different missions and employments. We have types devoted en- tixely to survey and patrol work. We have those which are definitely constructed for scientific purposes and those for the transport of personnel and the housing of conmunications equipment. We have many millions of craft employed exclusively for the people who reside on various planets to carry on their daily activities. These craft are maintained by the Confederation. The individuals who use then neither own them nor perform any type of, how would you say, maintenance upon them. They are placed at the individual's disposal from the time of birch until they expire. They are theirs to do with as they wish. Let us examine first that type of craft so prevalent in your illus- trations. This is the craft shovm having three protuberances emerging from the bottom. ‘These raft, ay brothers, are prinarily intended for planetary survey work and very light gathering of supplies, as well as transport of small groups of persons. They are not capable of complete interplanetary flight upon their own. For the crossing of any planet's magnetic field, they are transported within a larger vehicle, such as a mother ship. They can function only within a planetary body's ovn magnetic field. For this purpose, they serve aduirably. Now, let us examine those which were responsible for the furor we have inspired of recent (1947-1958) -- those which your Keaneth Arnold discovered while flying hie craft in the vicinity known to you as Mount Rainier, Washington. These, the crescent shaped craft, have a definite mission, Their first and primary mission is the charting of those areas Known as magnetic anomalies and fault zones upon your planet, as vell as other planets. ‘They are actually mapping craft of a very special nature. Now, let us continue and examine that which is known as the triang- ular shaped craft as seen in the area known as your Rocky Mountains. These craft, my brothers, belong to the Confederation and are extrenely interesting. Their main purpose is to monitor the thought patterns and reactions of the people of any planet they are sent to survey. I now discuss that shape known as spheroid. This type of craft is ‘employed primarily from that known as ¢ mother ship, and is used for scientific study or the gathering of specimens. They handle a great deal. of cargo. They are operated by remote control from a mother ship. TheseCHAPTER THREE 61 craft can also be used for the transport of individuals of small groups. Let vs move on and examine still another type — the Long cylindri- cal shaped craft, commonly called by your people the mother ship. The {angen SE such a ship, employed by our Confederation, is over ten niles as figured by your terminology. They are capable of housing approximately $00 te 500 of the firet type of craft we examined. They carry a crew of seoutore from 1,500 to 2,000 occupants. They can remain in space, Tenoved servers planetary ayatem, for a period of/10 of your yeaxe and be entirely Tt-oufficient. They are capable of interstellar travel on a Limited tute and can reach eome of the closer stax systems Co your solar syoten, pate ara eg these craft as our primary transportation, They are equipped Se cravel at speeds in excess of Light. However, when these craft ore Gperated vithin several parsecs of any planetary body, their speed is reduced for obvious reasons Let us now examine one type of craft capable of covering large inter” atellay distances. This type of craft is very similar to that first dee- aeehed, except that it has a perfectly flat surface upon its bottom. This type of erate ie used by = very special corps of our people (The Galacite s7eGey) engaged upon missions of great importance. These craft are under see dizect control of a local Solar Tribunal, Their primary purpose it coer of scientific nature. They carry controls end types of instrunente tion, unusual, aboard even most of our craft. There have also been craft witnessed in your atmosphere that have often been nistaken for meteors. The color is that of your color green These, ny brothers, are ships with only one purpose, that of neutraliz” ing dangerous amounts of radioactivity in your atmosphere, Upon comple- tien of their miseion, they are diffused into atonie size and are, a8 you would say, expendable. Let me bring to your attention at this time two types of craft seen only ence in your planet's history. The firet type to be mentioned is {hee known to your peoples as a five pointed geometrical design, called a eter. As you all know thie configuration bears no resemblance to any heavenly object, and yet ite symbology to your peoples has been extremely Migaigivane,. On one oceation, its purpose in Lighting your evening skics Ted to the discovery of a new born babe cradled in a manger; the effecte cf which have been felt through many ages upon your planet's surface. Needless to say, these craft are witnessed only on extrenely special efaeions. This, perhaps, will explain a rather intriguing mystery pre~ Gent Ee many of your people and will, no doubt, provoke thought. Now, lee us examine the other. This type of eraft, my brothers, is along the geonetrical form you know of as square. Tt is 1,500 miles Squase, They are "The Cities of Shan." This craft Cin orbit around the earth), and eix more Camall transport craft), once touched upon the Surface of your-planet for evacuation purposes. They are what you vould all miniature vorids within themselves, complete civilizations intact. Gach of these craft, or eities, cam provide for and satisfy the demands Of approxinacely 10,000 individuals and ie used as a transport for carry the these individuals to other areas of space for definite reasons. This type of cxaft has been recorded in your history. Xt is described in fueeresting detail in one of your Holy writings. The description is quite adequate. (The City of Nev Jerusalem described in Revelations of The Holy Bible.)62 CHAPTER THREE I believe, my brothers, that we have touched upon this subject with enough detail at present to satisfy many questions concerning our various types of spacecraft. To carry it further would perhaps prove interesting for sone, but for the majority for whom this little talk has been presented, I believe it is sufficient. 1 look forward to the opportunity of presenting some further thoughts on this subject of spacecraft at a later date. It has been my privilege to speak. Adonai, my brothers, Iam Kla-La. xR Re “SPACECRAFT # 2" (A Question and Answer Exchange) March 18, 1958 Solar Cross Tape # 9-B By: Kla-La Question: "Kla-La, will you kindly discuss the magnetic barrier around our earth; also why your spacecraft are free from inertia and momentum effects? What would happen to an individual attempting to break the magnetic barrier?" Kla-La: "In order for any type of eraft to remove itself from your planet's magnetic influence, it is necessary for a type of field (magnetic force field with special properties) to be developed completely en- circling the craft involved, This field has to provide not only that function but that of being able to change its very atomic polarity. Tt must be capable of generating a field intensity of five million of what you call gauss. This spherical field extends approximately 25 feet in all directions beyond the limits of our craft. "Needless to say, to those of your people acquainted with the theories of a rather elementary science, any objects acted upon within the circumference of this field lack what is known as inertia in relation to anything outside of the field. Therefore, the effects of that known as acceleration and deceleration, of a sense of movement or change of direction, are not apparent, (To those on board the craft.) "You have often wondered at our crafts ability to withstand sudden changes in direction. In all of these mentioned figures, this perhaps will shed some light on this. A secondary function of this field is ite changing its very atomic polarity when a craft leaves the influence of the earth's magnetic field or, for that matter, any planetary field, and when it enters that of another. Spacecraft, not so equipped would be Literally corn to pieces by the molecular stresses imposed upon their structure, This change in atomic polarity has to be accomplished in a period of time less than one one-thousandths of your seconds. If it is accomplished too soon, the results are within yout grasp to comprehend, or if it is too late, again, you should have no trouble envisioning the result. Shall we say the timing has to be very exact. “When your scientific groups learn more about the influences created by your planet, the interacting forces present between other planetaryCHAPTER THREE 63 bodies and those of a galaxy, they will find out a great deal concerning ‘this subject of space vehicle propulsion. It has come to our attention that your first attempts to launch vehicles capable of traveling through space will be unmanned. ‘his is an extrenely wise decision upon your parte.’ Question: "What would happen to an individual attempting to break the magnetic barrier?” Kla-La: "I would make the following suggestion. That being; that should there ever arise an occasion vhen, through your own ignorance, a eraft containing an occupant or any life form is hurled through space and such a condition as that I have described would occur, it would be our duty to remove the occupant of that vehicle (or protect the vehicle and its occupants). You may, people of earth, decide to use life any way you so desire upon your planet, but when you leave its confines, you are subject to laws which are above even us of the Confederation. There- fore, our actions would be in order." Ques tio: “Kla-La, what is your reaction to our satellite progrant” Kla-La: "Yes. Let us now touch for a moment upon that subject known as your satellite progran. Your peoples are avare that in their first faltering footsteps into that known as space, certain scientific obstacles had to be overcome. In several ways, this has been approached. Some of then have shown rather interesting results, but none that could mot have been logically anticipated, since it is quite obvious that when a superior force is to be exerted over the one which is to be overcome, a result can be expected. However, there comes a point where, shall we say, another law is involved, this is known amongst your peoples as that of diminishing returns. You have not much further to go, people of earth, before this becomes painfully obvious. In sending aloft those objects known as your satellites, your sci~ entists have unknowingly committed several grave errors, which I will take the trouble to bring fo their attention. They are most certainly aware of a vast ocean of electrical force, known as the ionosphere, which surrounds your planet. In projecting any object, which has had its natural residence upon your planet's surface or within it, through that known as your ionosphere, a puncture or hole is created due to the fact that any object upon your planet's surface carries a specific magnetic, as well as electrical charge, and that known as your ionosphere carries that of a different charge. It should be quite obvious that this hole, in being possessed of free atoms that bear similar charges, would create a situation not conducive to healing such a puncture. Mhen these openings are so created, your planet's suyface is inmediately subjected to intense concentrations of cosmic rays. The effects of additional radiation bombardment from this source do neither the vegetation nor the inhabitants of your planet anything known as good. It ‘has been up to us in the past to heal these wounds in your ionosphere as quickly as possible. In the case where your vehicles have an orbit whieh continually takes them through the ionosphere on every orbital pass, it has been necessary to attach to your satellites, devices capa~ Dle of automatically sealing each break or puncture. Your scientists shall soon become aware of thi64 CHAPTER THREE Question: "Kla-La, would you care to comment on the apparent die- appearance of some of our rocket experiments? Kla-La: "There are several of your space vehicles which have disappeared. I leave to the conjecture of the people of your planet what has happened to these. 1 do not believe that in the minds of thinking men and women upon your planet's surface, that the answer will be long in arriving. "This, my brothers and sisters of earth, concludes my remarks at this time. It has been my privilege to address you. Until I speak again, I am Kla-La. Adonai, Vasu barregus." "COMMENTS REGARDING EARTH'S SATELLITE AND SPACE PROGRAM" March 26, 1958 By: Mon-Ka Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I amMon-Ka. It is again my great pleasure to speak with all of you. In noting your progress all I can say is, that again, all is proceeding according to plan. My brothers and sisters, you will all notice the increasing frequency of those of your planet's achievements and in the various effects they are having upon your people, As it is witnessed by those of us who are more fortunate in obtaining an objective view; we see great changes and great events to shortly visit themselves upon your planet. In regards to your outer space prograns it should be noted that again mysterious things will occur to your satellite programs. Another of these instruments which we Look with disfavor upon is being readied for its journey. Unfortunately, we shall have to renove this one also. From my remarks, no doubt should remain in yours and your peoples’ minds as to where your missing Explorer went, The one now orbiting your planet Launched this your day contained no harmful instruments, therefore, it is allowed. ("The reference is made to space vehicles containing "fission type" nuclear power generators.) I wish to mention briefly, the proposed plans of your governments: to test the so called hydrogen effects of nuclear weapons, this in your coming summer months, at the high altitudes obtained by your missiles. There shall be one very pronounced effect apparent from this series of your tests. Your people will suddenly notice the temperature in various portions of your planet reaching all time highs. You may look forward to and verify my renarks by observing in the months ahead whether my statenents bear truth. You may also have occasion to witness most unusual sunsets. Most of the harmful effects of the additional radiation to be present in your atmosphere, we will contrive to nullify. It is our great plea— sure, ay brothers and sisters, that soon those who are in a pasition of authority will realize the uselessness and folly of their present attenpts. It will perhaps be necessary to demonstrate this to them before too long.CHAPTER THREE 65 T have before me the collected data of your past week, and from these observations see that you have some pertinent questions to be put forth. Question: "Which talks are we free to give to the people (the geneval public)?" "I would suggest the following. The talk concerning "The may be released on a limited basis for the present, to those who in your discriminatory process you deem advisable. "In the reception of the "Galactic" talk (The Galactic Tour), it is felt that the quality (audio) suffers. Therefore, as soon as your transcript is complete ue will re-present the talk for you. I trust the assemblage of your recording instruments will be in more operable condition. “The talk concerning the "Pyramid" may be released generally to all who desire it. ‘There are no restrictions other than your efforts to protect its contents (copyright) in your normal way. “Regarding the talk you will receive this evening, I shall be most intexested in observing your reactions and comments. Therefore, I would suggest it be held in your present midst until your next meeting. At that time I shall be most happy to suggest @ course of action. "Te will interest all of you to note, that as soon as these under~ takings you consider have reached a firm basis in reality, I believe a Synthasean * would be most interesting to present to your commercial markets. I might mention it is the logical outcome of your color ma~ chines, "LT suggest the item worthy of your attention, as soon as your paths have been cleared, that your communications devices both mental and those more common to your people be developed and finished. It would be wise to determine which will be next after those have been accomplished. t has been my privilege to have spoken. I depart now in the "Light" of the Radiant One. Adonai, Vasu Barragus. I am Mon-Ka, (* synthascan: A color television type device which can convert thoughts and thought forms into visual images.) wee66 CHAPTER THREE "A COMMUNICATION FROM ASHTAR’ April 9, 1958 By: Ashtar Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton. In view ing your activities over this past period of your time, we are again encouraged to report that all is progressing well. We are most pleased to observe your progress. Tensor Equation training is forthcoming for all of the peoples upon your planet's surface. However, we must work with certain individuals who have had prior experience. Upon the reception of your next Tensor talk, due to the intimacy of detail, we would request our daughter Thuria's able assistance. One moment please, there is an interruption. Ashtar® speaking. It has come to my attention that in your midst, a certain description was presented of an alleged encounter experienced by one of your species upon another continent. I wish te state irrevo- cably that this experience is not to be considered by those of your group. ‘The beings described do not belong to The Confederation. The description of the Space Beings and their actions should verify this. Their craft, as described, is not our mother craft. ‘Their method of forcefully entering another's privacy is not our way. Unpleasant effects are brought upon those who are contacted in such a manner. We never make an encounter without prior permission. You should all be avare that the Brothers do not operate in the manner described. We wish you to hold this in your awareness. This is not to be construed as an experience worthy of your attention.** You may discontinue. I am Ashtar. (# ashtar is a Chronomonitor spacecraft. This particular spacecraft has great authority in this sector of space.) (ek Ashtar was referring to an alleged contact by negative Space Beings with a person who lives in Europe. This person was telling other people that the negative beings he encountered were members of the Confederation. Apparently, Ashtar wished to set the record straight about this incident.) teeCHAPTER THREE 67 SPACE, TINE and REALITY" April 12, 1958 By: Sutko Greetings, Oh Children of the "Light." I, Sutko, of the Saturn Tri- bunal greet you with warmth and affection. It is our privilege to speak with your people. our purpose in speaking shall deal with a topic which, we trust, will be of interest to your people. We deal now, my brothers, with a Little known facet of what is known as space, time and reality, Let us examine first that known as space. Throughout the heavens, in that area inter posed between all objects, we have that known as space. A fabric -- an etheric substance -- a vibrant coalesced thing, not vacuum as supposed, but subtly scintillating with vibrance -- a token of that known as life. A pulse beat throbbing among those spaces interlacing the stars of an entire galaxy and beyond to a universe. A fabric, woven with infinite care in which no thread is imperfect and in which mankind and all that exists has its true source of reality. Let us enfold ourselves in this substance. Let us descend to the various levels of vibration. Let us descend to that known as physical matter. Let us see this thing called reality and its place in that which is. Let us look with eyes filled with adoration upon the handivork of @ thought complete in essence, crowned with all of the subtle influences known as Love and devotion, of warath and tenderness, of Being incarnate. Even the lowLiest grain of that known as soil contains that which, my brothers, has an inner essence of being; perfect in the sight of that One which is known universally as the Creator. Let us look closely. Let us stand in an open meadow facing a sun= rise, sparkling and coruscating upon yonder horizon. Let us see the radiant shafts of light expand slowly upon the horizon illuminating the vault of heaven with a glowing richness - one which vibrates with Life and Energy. Let us attune our eyes to see the radiant forms vhich hold forth and bathe our beings and that of the planet's surface with a force = lifegiving in essence. Do we now feel that mystery; that force which whispers ever so softly; which glides by us on gossamer wings, which cifts gently through the pores of even that which is solid? Do we not see goodness and beauty? Do we mot sense love -- do we not see justice in its true form, in that which is harmonious? Look about you people of earth. Gaze with eyes whose veils have been lifted. Look upon that handiwork -- that panorama -- the scene unfolding before your senses. Do you not see that which originally was meant you should see? Do you not feel the vibrations crossing from even that which is considered incarnate? Do you not feel the yearning == this straining of all to again be united with the Single Source? Yes, even that blade of grass springing up between your firmly planted feet singe a song which, if only your ears could hear and comprehend would startle the innermost core of your being. Now turn; gaze about you and witness. See that wrought by the hands of a Master Craftsman -- works, mountains, plateaus, peaks, valleys,a Sea eS ee ee ee ee eee 68 CHAPTER THREE pools of ice flow, shadows of deep purple and anethyst, colors, a rich~ ness in hue, dazzling reflections and air vibrant with the most subtle ‘Of all shades —- an atmosphere containing all of the elements necessary te sustain your lives. How is it, my brothers, that your people can stand in such oblivion to all which ie about them? Lift up your eyes, oh people of earth, gaze about you. Can you deny that which is? Do you not see beyond? Do you not sense the feelings? Does not that which is within you yearn for that which ic knows is better? z Let us at this point 1ift ourselves by the sheer power of that known as thought. Let us drift upwards slowly on shafts of energy controlled agthat tow s6 your ind: Let 9g spiral ever upwards until, as ve 188k down between our wide spread feet, we see that which is your planet spinning slowly beneath us. An enerald jewel set in a sea of blackness, surrounded by dazzling points of light, representing those Suns of sys~ tems interlinked by the delicate fabric of space. Let us momentarily fix our attention on a so-called point of Light. our thought charts our course and hurls us through the interspaces of this fabric into dimensions beyond. We have arrived on a star -- a neighboring satellite of a mighty Sun. As we stand and gaze about us we again look and see that known as yout galaxy. We stand upon the sur~ face of @ planet known as Alganon. We look backwards. We see the twisting arms of that known as a nebula, le see it throwing its firey spirals of mist about it. We sense the ever present forces unleashed, which create these spectacles in the heavene, and which lead to the Later coalescence of matter into planetoids, areas rich for the cultivation of that known as life. We bee, stretching before us, huge stresmers of violet colored light. We see ripples in the very essence of space itself, We see colors defying description and we see something else also. We see a spark of intense white radiance approaching us. It comes at us faster. It approaches with blinding speed and suddenly it is here. Huge phantom shapes, Streamers of light so intense that all of the entire universe seems to be illuminated, and behold; a change is wrought. ‘A Creation is being performed. We see about us light taking on form, taking on shape, We gaze with ave and humility upon that we have wit~ nessed. Before us we have witnessed one of the greatest miracles of all. ‘The creation of matter. It ie as if we have heard the sound of The Omnipotent, for about us now courses ringe of an effervescent nature — huge flotillas. We see |pproaching again, that regenbling man-made objects. As they approach, we see that this is the case. Here we have crews of highly trained Jersonnel who are about to exercise conditions upon this newly wrought Pubstance. These Beings travel not in that which can be considered physical craft, but instead in the softest glowing forms of light, pro- pelled by the energy developed by this substance. Can you not feel this fork being carried on? Can you not, in that know as mind, comprehend what is taking place? We have witnessed many things upon this short journey. We have experienced sensations beyond most comprehensions. We look forward now toCHAPTER THREE 69 that which Lies ah fabric and travel with a velocity many times that known as light. We set our course this time to the great. sector known to your peoples as, Andromeda. Here, we approach a majesty which begins to fill all the visible heavens about us. First of all, faintly luminous and, as we approach, glowing ever more brightly. We probe deeper and deeper into svirling mists -= inte clouds of particles known as atoms. 4 of us. We cloak ourselves again in that invisible As we progress these becone molecules and progressively get denser, Then we arrive at the very core of this great one's being. Here, ny brothers, within the heart of this galaxy resides the seat of all authority for an entire galactic system. Here, we see great concourses teeming with the very essence of life. Here, also, we behold beauty of such majesty that it hunbles us. Here, we sense the subtlest vibra~ tions of Love. Here, truly, is that which springs from that essence known as "Light." Here, ve come upon Beings of such a nature that we husbly kneel and as we do's0, we feel a great golden radiance forming above us and a peace which truly passes all understanding. Drifting dovn and about us, forming a cloak, tiny tendrils of vibrating ether reach forth and touch us gently and our being begins to glow as if newly bathed. We come to know peace. We know that which is truly called wisdom -- that known as understanding. Our hearts feel as if they are about to burst with the richness of ali that this miracle has wrought. We cannot help but feel tears upon our cheeks. ‘This is an experience not lightly experienced; mot easily endured. There are essences, which are responsible for our being. They are so perfect that ve in our frailties and limited ways of understanding have difficulty in grasping that which is known as perfection. Our entire beings new expand and in 0 doing we embrace the Radiance which cloaks us. We are at-one. Now I must end my thoughts on this topic. 1 depart in the “Light” of The Radiant One. I am Sutko. Adonai. ea "GONFEDERATION SPACECRAFT IN OUR SKIES" April 15, 1958 By: Korton, Soltec Greetings in the "Light" of The Radiant One. I am Korton. It is again out privilege to speak with all of you, In the few moments before ‘one would speak, I would make a few comments. You have noticed certain tones or sounds in the forms of signals emerging from your recording instruments. This is due to their close proximity to your young friend. They are picking up the adjustments which ve make in aligning for this communication. You have no doubt wondered about the activity of the military air~ craft in your skies, this evening. This, my brothers, is because of our recent activity over your West coast, Seven more of our craft were70 CHAPTER THREE submerged off the coast last evening. Many witnessed the phenomena. It was interesting to note, in monitoring your forms of radio, that again meteorites were used as the explanation. No doubt this amuses you as it does us. Now I see one is ready to speak. One moment please. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Soltec. It is ny humble privilege to again speak and communicate several thoughts which we feel would be of interest to your people and to you. For those of you who wonder regarding your periods of recent hectic activity, I would make the following know. A short period ago certain Beings vere called from afar to visit your planet. As you know, their presence was unusual. Their purpose was to initiate the beginning of a great movement in the minds and hearts of your people. The effects of this are readily apparent even at this time and will be more manifest as your weeks and months pro— ceed. I make a statement now which I would not like to see construed as prophecy but rather as a statenent of truth. Your cities and their inhabitants will have reason to reaffirm their hidden beliefs and that known as things of a spiritual nature. This is particularly true of your immediate area. Our craft, under orders of the Confederation, have been authorized to make several flights in your atmosphere which will be visible to the populace. You will note an unusual increase in the number of reports being brought to your attention. In order for you to keep informed, it is only right that we notify you im advance. 1 affirm again, our Confederation craft will in no way cause any harm to your military aircraft regardless of their intentions. It might prove somewhat frustrating to them upon occasion to have their efforts thwarted. However, they are becoming accustomed to this type of frustration. In the "Light" of The Radiant One, I depart now. I am Soltec. Adonai. eee RH “A DISCUSSION OF VARIOUS TOPICS” Apri2 15, 1958 By: Hatonn, Katonis, Korton, Sutko Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton. Several would speak. Greetings, Oh Children of the "Light." I am Hatonn. It is a privilege to speak to all of you. in viewing the progress of man upon your planet, in watching some of the daily activities of people, we note an ever increasing brightness resembling a halo which is gradually extending out beyond the confinesCHAPTER THREE 71 of your planet. This is the beginning of a new cycle of existence. It remains to be seen whether the very nature of human existence on your planet can or will respond. If it does, then an era of great illumina— tion awaits your many peoples. Fer your peoples will then have finally arrived at a point of equilibrium within the framework of their own beings. The future in this direction holds such great promise that I'm unworthy of its description. Let us dwell now upon that path which is the alternate one. As it has been related to your peoples, the quantity of tine is similar to the little sands pouring through your glass measuring device, When it approaches a state of great unbalance, hunan life, animal life, vegetable Life, insect life will cease to exist. The planet earth shall again be awakened into cataclysmic strife. The system Sol is about to experience a new state of being. You have not long, my brothers and sisters, to becone the fulerum point in levering human evolution one way of the other. It is noted that your people do not like to dwell upon thoughts such as these. Your minds tend to disregard unpleasantness. But life is a balanced creation -~ one must know not only those things which are pleasant but one must also be avare of the opposite. Ignoring the situation does not do away with ite reality. Your people will face reality in a most stunning manner much too soon. our Being and those Beings of our people upon your surface, all of you to whom I speak, have accepted a great responsibility. Your major contribution can be as a beacon point through which much illumination can be directed to your people. Know your function, let your beings express The Radiance not only from within, but that which flows from a source unextinguishable. Let your "Light fall upon those areas of great darkness, It is your purpose. Your time is indeed short. Again and again, my brothers and = tere, we repeat these words to your people. Surely you must realize we are not speaking idly. You have approached the great dividing line in the path of your existence. Which path do you now take? Think well. It has been ny great privilege to again have spoken. May Our Infi- nite One's “Light” be with all of you, and may I express my gratitude for your patience in again hearing my humble words. Adonai, my brothers. I am Hatonn. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Katonis. I will at this time anever a question uppermost in your thinking. Question: "As you people are as physical as we are, then this com= munication we have with you, is it on the physical and not the mental or causal planes?" Katonis: "This method which we have termed the Tensor Beam an: which we are using at this moment to impress your young friend's méntal processes is an entirely physical device. However, our thought communi cation takes place in the mental realms. Our thought is what actuates the physical Tensor Beam equipment. The radiations from this device reside in a portion of that spectrum you know as electro-magnetic. These72° GHAPTER THREE frequencies, I might mention, are available to you even at this day and yet your scientists, because they blind themselves, do not realize the great potentials which exist under ten cycles per second. By this I mean between zero cycles and ten cycles per second. A more thorough investigation of this range of the spectrum would yield rather astound~ ing results. "L might mention that our conversations can be overheard by not only our own people but by those which oppose us. "T must now leave so that another may speak with you. I am Katonis. Korton here. I mention the following regarding the next communica tions to be used in the forthcoming radio programs. I would briefly mention several items for your consideration. Regarding your trip this weekend, it would be advisable for all to reach their destination prior to the time of 1:00 P.M. During your afternoon hours we wish your young friend and our brother at the controls of your recording instruments to classify various types of music, You will be led to proper selections. ‘They may be your own ox those our brother has at his residence. T would suggest that pencils and paper be nade available at the time mentioned. One of the talks received will be one with a musical accom paninent. You should anticipate a meeting of at least one of your hours in length. Should the occasion warrant, perhaps two will be in order. I am informed one wishes to speak to you. One moment please. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Sutko. I would outline a certain procedure which we would suggest be folloved in es~ tablishing contact with new people wishing to become part of your organi— zation. As you are well aware there will be many coming to you as we have mentioned. Only those who seek you out should take up your time. This is essential until you are notified otherwise. Several reasons are ehind this unusual request. We wish you to develop and exercise your discrimination. O£ those who inquire it would be best for them to undergo preliminary evaluation by several individual members. Under no conditions are they te meet the group as a body until their understanding warrants this. At that time, prior to their meeting your full assembly, we would ask that our brother Gaoon speak with these ones and evaluate their true motives and the degree of their awareness. We place great responsibility upon you, Gaoon, in this matter. I would further recommend that all qualified persons only be admitted to your formal meetings, on an every other week basis, due to the fact that we still have more advanced training for the main group. In the name of The Radiant One, I, Sutko, have spoken. Adonai, my brothers.73 CHAPTER FOUR "LIPE AND DEATH" april 17, 1958 Solar Cross Tape # 10-A By: Mon-Ka Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Mon-Ka, My pur pose in speaking, my brothers and sisters, is to bring to the minds of all who hear my words a few thoughts concerning what is knovn as Life and Death. It is necessary, my brothers and sisters, for one to realize that there exists several forces in what is knovn as universe. There are qualities, there are rays of "Light" which permeate the fabric of what is known as creation. If our eyes could be so attuned, they would be aware of many colors, of many shafts or beams of radiant energy cours~ ing through what is known as ether, all about them, all about matter. Naturally, these shafts or beams of energy do have a source. We, in our limited concepts, speak of this as Infinity. If our minds could ut grasp the true meanings of this word, we would realize that in Infinity" we have what is known as Divine Consciousness. These shafts ‘of energy vadiate from this glowing field of thought, and emanate out— wards throughout all that is know as space, striking all particles of matter, imparting in these particles forms of vibration and of Life. Life, in its essence, is the thought of our Divine One as it acts upon the various forms of matter. It creates movement and movement begets what is known as motion or animation. Atoms start coursing about their nucleus. Molecules combine and recombine to offer matter new forms of Divine expression. Matter becomes endowed, as it becomes. more agile, with other finer influences expressed by these emanations coursing through the universe, and soon there becone qualities known as senses to matter. Soon we find that which is known as the densest of physical substance, of minerals, quivering with a new-found activity, coursing and responding and trembling with a pulse of what is known as Life. The consciousness contained in these minerals stirs and avakens, and thought itself starts outwards and collides with other thought, with other forms and enanations, and slowly the inanimate mineral acquires awareness. Life suddenly takes on a new meaning, and the first step in what is called evolution now accurs. Life in the inanimate mineral, in sending out its thought becomes avare. The first thought, in awareness, was to extend its thought again and again, and therefore, taste an experience of this new-found awareness. And so, that which is known as mineral evolves. It now becomes that known as vegetable. It sends out tendrils of itself, not only into the soil upon which it has lain to experience what lies below thie strata, but it sends tender young shoots aloft to experience greater and mote magnificent rays which emanate from above.ee ae ees ee ee eT 74 CHAPTER FOUR ‘and, ay brothers and sisters, we have witnessed what could perhaps» to weg unenlightened ones, be termed a miracle of evolution, for now we Jove no longer the inanimate mineral, but the animated vegetable. A thing of movement and of life, capable of accomplishing the one thing thing Gaimate mineral could not do; that of extending itself, of going Chough a process Known as grouth, of becoming larger, of ever exposing cereal ite total being to the rays which nourish it from below and worth stream down from the heavens above and give it energy and Life ‘And 0, through the vegetables, through evolution, these ones -— these forme of consciousness -- expand and grow. In the beginning, they were mezely little forms of moss and lichens. They evolved upwards through plants, through shrubs, and then at the height of their cxistence, they become that known as trees, ‘Trees which stretch up cede the utmost, ever attempting, following the natural laws of crea” tion, seeking, trying to draw nearer the source of their being; stretch” {ng wpwarda with open arms to receive the Divine radiations still streaming from above. And suddenly, another transition takes place, For during the evolution of that known as the vegetable kingdom, another transition takes place. We find that in the grovth of green things that substance is Piven off. Tt ie knon as a combination of gases. But, let me renind Fou ay brothers, that gases are consciousness also. And so departs: Wem this vegetable kingdom an essence, a rarified form of conscious” ates which is released into a new environnent, that which is known as Kaoophere. And extending ever upwards, driven now by the energies of Light” itself, of radiation, the molecules and particles of that Knew as gas extend outwards to receive ever moze inpetus, receiving greater as Ghent and awareness. These particles, now driven by Divine intent, Teaweree outwards through the universe, through space, through the me~ diums they can best evolve in. Soon they becone subject to a new form of growth, for their con scioumess has now reached the point where they have @ sew Law to ex: stefence -- that knoum as mutual attraction, And ao, ve find particles BE gar coalescing in the ether, forming clouds. These clouds, sccort- ing’to Known laws, begin to take on other attributes; and they in turn ine ii new ereation of matter. Now, ve come to the part where again ae elon hes reached a point of conscious avareness that is ready for a new experience. ‘and so, from the Divine source of enlightenment, radiant beams of energy of great magnitude course about through the ethers and mass and cere) are reconbined, and we now have what is known 4s animated 6ub- crerey Artne beginnings cf a new consciousness ~~ one which was only toon of these late vibrations received, according to the Divine time” table. We have MAN, An infant cradled in the velvet arms of space —~ tuN's natural habitat. For MAN ie not a land creature. He is # crear ture of the ethers, for the ethers are his essence. MAN exists upon land only a8 long as his consciousness denies or refuses to accept the Tits ohizh forever beckons him from the far beyond of the great universe. And now, because of NAN's denial, # great Being takes shape within the cloud of the original thought. This great One slovly materializes. He appears at a distance, gathering himself into a Being magnificent inCHAPTER FOUR 75 stature, radiant to beheld, in softly flowing robes of the most pure white. This One raises his hand and takes a step and begins to walk. Softly, but surely, he walks through the corridors of time, through the avenues carpeted by a million star suns. He walks through space, through time and he comes to look upon his creations. A great Being, whose very essence is that of Love, of thought, of consideration, of great benevolence. He stretches out his arms and a great flooding of peace is unleashed. It streams from his fingers. It blazes in mighty sheets from his eyes. It wraps itself and it coalesces about these errant ones who have refused to accept or admit his existence. And yet, these forces are net unleashed with thoughts of violence, nor of anger, nor of hatred. They are thoughts of the purest love, of the greatest of heartwarming; for all that is trembles and receives this great Elood of peace and beauty, And in the midst of those who did not accept that which was known as the Tauth, there comes a new dawn of awakening. For this great One now creates in his oun image a mew form of creation. And, he distrib- utes the essence of this new form to all habitable locations of life throughout the many corridors of his universe. And a new term is gathered into the Cosmic meaning. It is called Lord. And these Lords look with great rapture and love upon their Father's creations. And their very essence goes forth and communicates itself to their charges, their children, their ow evolutions, and a new dawn breaks over the horizon. Ihave not mentioned death, for in all truth, ay brothers and sisters, there is no death. There is only the gradually ascending spiral of consciousness, which reaches ever upwards, which treats with open arms and hearts the essence of its source. I have spoken, my brothers and sisters, upon this topic with hopes that it has touched your beings, has brought to all of you new under- standings, With great love and with great feeling, I depart now and Jeave you with your essence. Adonai, my brothers, I am Mon-ka. Adonai. wee “THE GUARDIANSHIP OF EARTH" April 23, 1958 By: Hatona Greetings, Oh Children of the "Light." I am Hatonn. Tt is my great privilege to speak at this time on a subject which I would like to call, The Guardianshép of Your Planet. As you are aware; the planet earth occupies a unique position at this tine in the history of your Solar System. It was necessary for my being to travel to the planet Nassar (Mars) in order to address you at this time. Fortunately, certain records were available to me and from these, I believe, we may present a wore interesting sidelight to this entire topic. People of earth, knowing of this great truth: that your planet does not reside alone in the Cosmos, it should be apparent that there is great76 CHAPTER FOUR purpose even in its existence. I have mentioned that your planet had a great heritage to experience. I would take this opportunity to discuss this. At the time of early life upon your planet the original inhabitants were gifted with amazing powers and abilities and were subject to various forms of environmental conditions; to certain qualities peculiar to the planet earth's own vibrations. Due to the subtle workings that you have encountered in many of your religious works, it is apparent and well known that a great darkness descended upon your people. However, there is always the eternal purpose of our Creator, which states that on planets with positive evolution, the "Light" will always dispel darkness, no matter how intense. So, your infant races overcame their liabilities and started again on an upward progression. Soon, it seems that certain forces (alien intervention) entered into the environment of your planet and created condi: tions of a chaotic nature. These led again, unfortunately, to conditions which caused a great conflict among two of your ancient races, known as Atlantean and Lemurian. Since, as I have mentioned, the forces causing this conflict were alien to your planet, it was decreed and ordered that all of those who had not totally undergone a disintegration of that known as spirit and character, should be removed to other inhabited planets within this Solar System and others nearby. ‘There was a great evacuation. You may reference it in time, and may find @ rather vague account in which much meaning is hidden in archaic language and stilted symbolism; in the account of a "great flood" and a ship carrying the survivors of all known life. (Hatonn is referring to the legendary account of Noah and the Ark, However, he is placing this event, in time, following the destruction of Atlantis and Lemuria. This implies thet our current historical theories regarding this event, are incorrect regarding the time of the "Great Flood.") Due to the conditions which existed upon your planet for a considerable length of time, those ones who had been partially touched by the alien brain control forces but who had managed to survive, migrated to various areas throughout your world; some to the region you know as your South American continent, while others went to those places known as Asia and your Far East. Again, a long progression started upon its upward trend, The re~ sults are those that are visible about you at this time. In the past, due to the nature of our galactic lave and those codes we live under and by, our Confederation has been allowed merely to observe and aid ‘in smal ways, the people upon your planet. Qur main concern and one of our chief duties is to see that tho: forces, which were alien to the earth, are not allowed to consummate any further activities that would be considered detrimental to your evolution. Your people failed once (the period of the great abomina tion) in its upward climb. This second failing was not considered to be your fault nor of your doing. There shal be no third time, people 0§ eatth. Many who hear or see my words will come to realize that all may change upon your planet. It is to undergo a great change. However, you are not unique. All planets in this Solar System areCHAPTER FOUR 77 undergoing similar stages of change as even your scientists with their limited views can perceive. The universe is never at test. It is constantly in movement. One unique characteristic of this drifting move~ ment is that a Solar Systen constantly encounters new areas of space. This is true of planets, solar systems and galaxies, and of the universe as a whole. ‘This entire planetary system, from which I address you, is undergoing great change brought about by many forces. It is no longer a question of our accepting a policy of non-intervention, as such = policy is now being changed. It is a question now of accelerating the rate of progress, of evolution, of enlightenment, of your planet, for even its physical substance must be avakened to a greater degree, as well as its inhabitants. It will not be possible for the rest of this local stellar evolution to complete its cycle, with the other planets concerned, and the neighboring systems in this corner of our galaxy, if the planet earth does not proceed with it, We may not lose a portion of creation in order to progress. All must undergo the experi: ences of this change. Our Infinite One in Divine Enlightenment has 60 expressed His purpose. Therefore, people of earth, we take great in— terest in your planet and your people. We have many motives for wanting to aid you. It is entirely right that you know some of these motives are a question of necessity. How- ever, there are motives far greater in nunber which are those things all of us of the Confederation hold dear. A certain memory perhaps, an obligation, a sense of that which is just. Many could be innumer— ated. All of them though, explain why your planet is indeed in a wnique position. We progress together, our brothers. No one wilt remain behind. I trust certain of my thoughts have reached the minds of many and that a greater degree of that called understanding and awareness will encom Pass and be a part of your new-found consciousness. Your planet receives a great deal of this Love, called understanding, called "Light," from many different locations and sources within our universe. Many great Ones have lent their abilities, their talents, their very beings, in mass, to accomplish that which our Creator has expressed. ‘Therefore, we of the Confederation now feel that we are called upon to openly greet your peoples -- to awaken in them an awareness of that which is. The changes that will necessarily ensue will be in the "Light" of Our Infinite One -- they will be correct ones. it is with all humbleness and with great love in our hearts that we do this great work. Now, you have before you a rather interesting concept; one which contains many truths. Tt is up to you, people of earth, how you will accept this, how you will act upon it. To those who sense a far off and yet near glimmering of a Radiance which knows no color, let your minds be opened -- let your hearts unfold. Lift up your arms and en~ compass that which is all. This ends my Little talk at this time. Perhaps, my brothers, we will find even more to talk about as I know that the time again draws78 CHAPTER FOUR near. We have long wé people of earth. ted the opportunity to speak with and greet the Adonai. May the Love and the "Light" of The Infinite One be with you. May all peace be yours. I am Hatonn. Adonai. wee ee "UNIVERSAL VIBRATION" April 26, 1958 Solar Cross Tape # 10-B By: Mon-Ka Greetings, Oh Children of the "Tam Mon-Ka. My little talk at this time concerns a topic known as, "Universal Vibration." I have suggested that certain forms of musie, known to your people, accompany my words. Therefore, if you will be so kind. (Background music started.) Throughout the Cosmos, my brothers, there is a force, there is a drive, known as the thought of Our Divine One. This thought permeates all of the known universes and all levels of vibration. This, this thought, spreads through the reaches of all space and time. It has its essence in that known as "Light." It darts with fingers of etheric eubstance through all of the reaches of that which is known. It spreads in ever widening circles through the very pores of all that which is known as matter. It is omnipotence. It is glory and majesty. It is the essence of all that whéch is. It is truth, "Light," wisdom and understanding, It is Love. Ie is! ALL, consists of energy, matter and thought. Three manifestations of that which is known as original with our Creator -- all existing upon planes of reference known as vibration, or more commonly, frequency. In following this, let us look upon these various planes of reference. Let us look first at the planes of thought. First, we examine that which is infinitely fine, that which io crystal in its clarity, that which is sharper and more concise than the finest edges of steel. It is a force, ebbing and flowing, pulsating through the universe, expanding ever outwards, ever onwards -- a form of nebulous substance. I speak of substance in this sense, as that so subtle, that only those things of a subtle nature can so comprehend and receive information, intelligence and wisdom from this thing knovn as thought. From this, purpose in the lower planes of vibration is manifest. We speak of nebulousness. We speak of mists, and yet thought is really none of these, it is so fine. I pause to let my words enter your consciousness and seek their true level. I have paused many times in ny experiences to consider these topics of which I speak. Thought is indeed the forerunner of all expressions that follow forth on planes of reference, It is not known amongst your peoples, but time is also involved at this point. Time -- a tempo, a pulse beat, a thing of vibrance. Here, you find a characteristic again -- a form of motion and of essence. Softly, in the innermost core of that which is known as substance there lurks this pulsing, this minute stirring ofCHAPTER FOUR 79 the tiniest of atoms, of their existence in plane or dimension known as time. Tine, the measure of the period between the occurrence and the conclusion of manifestation. Perhaps, I voice a thought in a concept unique to your peoples’ ways of thinking. But as I talk, the measured tread of that known as time -~ the footsteps and rhythms, pulse with the breath of a radiance from Our Divine One. Time will course through, not only your beings, but that of all substance everywhere in the universe, swelling, expanding and growing with great light, reaching out, infiltrating, pulsing and dash— ing against the very smallest grains ot specks of that known as dust. Throughout all creation, a universe teems with, and is in tune with a heart beat ~~ a measured pulse. It gives rise to that which is known as cycles; as periods revolving upon themselves and yet at the same tine moving forwards or, as I like to express it, ascending, reaching ever higher, growing more indistinct, losing that which is known as objec~ tiveness and identity; becoming more and more in tune with this univer~ sal pulse, with ite feelings rampant, in harmony with its essence. Can you not respond? Can you not reach forth and touch this thing called time? Gan you not sense it in a sense different from that which cones to your objective mind? Time! Time! In allowing for this to be absorbed by your beings, we have created a new condition, a new form, a new concept. Now, we shall examine another plane of reference, another form of vibration. Let us look for something worthy of our attention, Let us look for something, my brothers, which will appeal, which will reach out and touch; something we can be most intimate with. Something com mon, sonething that is a form, We proceed now to that which is known as substance, that which is known as matter, on a plane only slightly renoved from that which is known as physical or denseness. From the forms known as thought and “Light," we find vibrations descending a scale, ever reaching out, to engulf all which follows. We find these thoughts Eiltering down through; at first, vibrations or frequencies slightly lower in octave, slightly minor in effect. Here, we find the purpose of thought beginning to manifest itself in that which is known as the etheric. Yes, this is substance -- substance refined and of a nature certainly worthy of our attentions. For here, we find certain life forms, certain essences of consciousness, of Beings who dwell upon this plane for a noble purpose ~~ for that of communicating this thought to other forms of matter, of giving it intenseness, clarity and again, a form of expression. Here, ve find Beings who surround themselves in that which is known as "Light," and whose sole communication is through the transfer of thought into vibrations known as "Light" -- "Light" softly playing with a skill such as great men, known as composers to your people, have exercised upon the vibrations of sound. Here, we find "Light" fluctu- ating or modulating another form of matter. Here, we find that which degins to penetrate even the dullest consciousness with a characteris tic equality -- that known as reverence. The Cosmic forces, having expressed themselves in forms of thought, cloak themselves in vibrations of "Light," establishing conditions of being; now stretch forth to embrace the next vibration. This, my brothers and sisters, is where great inspirations arrive from. Great80 CHAPTER FOUR influences are felt and impact upon that form of life known as physical substance or matter -- a vibration, that which you are aware of, filters into the consciousness of that known as mind belonging to mortals. We find a richness, a warmth, a "Light" -- the minds of men the products of successive creation of Infinite Love, understanding and beauty, of greatness and nobleness. The minds of men -- experiencing all manner of vibrations coming from above, coning from planes about them, and coming from great Ones who have volunteered their services; who have descended from loftier steeps to enter your plane of reference and express great gifts of truth, great ideals and teachings. ‘Throughout the evolution of this form of substance, we find reactions present. We find the minds of men experiencing gamuts of sensation, from extreme to extreme, and yet, ever seeking to obtain a form of balance, a form of rest, in uhich to receive more fully and comprehend these thoughts which constantly have come down from loftier planes. Truly, ay brothers, men upon the surface of all planets have felt great occurrences, have experienced great truths, have met with inspirations which have molded and blended their beings into the more radiant repr sentations of our original Divine thought. It was upon a period of time in your planet's early evolutions, that a great and mighty Being (the Lord of the Earth) drifted down and mater- ialized to add His presence to a vibration, to become not finite, but infinite. Upon this occasion, great forces were released. A great Being had arrived. The very atoms of all substance, even molecules, trembled in their orbits. All matter responded with a thrill to this new and expanded One's Being. The rocks and minerals, the vegetation, the very air itself, pulsed with a new breath, inhaled a new vibration and experienced a greater feeling, a greater being. For this One, this One descended to bring to that known as earth, a great truth. A great truth was to be for earth's peoples. A great lesson was presented -- a great message delivered upon this day of your time. A great longing was felt. Man, in his dimmed awareness, suddenly became cognizant of anew stirring within. A greater joy of living began to penetrate his being, a more noble calling, that which spoke of the infiniteness of a universe, of a Divine. Even the winds, which coursed about this great teacher, in their scurryings about your planet carried the message, brought the vibration. And within the breast of man, there stirred a new beginning -- a new purpose, a new goal. Again, as he had many times before, man experienced the touch that he could not discredit. ‘And this One whose message was heard about the circumference of that known as earth had great purpose in being present. He had much to speak of. His was a humbleness and a sincerity, a great nobleness, for this One brought within His being a presence. He spoke a great truth as follows: Eou: "I am the Son. I am the way, and the "Light" to all men. 1 an the way." Mon-Ka: Man has heard this One's message repeated down through the ages. It is his to do with. It is his to act upon. My brothers and sisters, I, Mon-Ka, have been given a privilege, that of expressing certain thoughts to your peoples. It has been said that you have eyes with which to see, ears with which to hear and voicesCHAPTER FOUR 81 with which to express. Might I remind you of one other. You have love which can be shared with your fellow beings. Open your minds and hearts, my brothers. Your ways speak not of childishness particularly, but of unenlightened folly. You pursue pathways which are devious. The "Light," my brothers, has always been with you. Unveil your eyes. Expand your being and enbrace even the sun which greets your morning skies with open arms and minds, I£ you would but stand upon your feet and express the dignity of your beings; if you would but realize the capabilities, the intent in your very presence; if you would only share that which is within and give unto all forms of creation that which is a part of you, your lives would have new meaning, your experiences would be richer, you would be deluged with warmth and understanding. Your strife would cease, your conflicts end, and truly peace would be yours as well as understanding. I Find within myself and within that of my brothers, we who glide above your planet, who witness your deeds, who communicate our thoughts, who experience even as you, a certain longing, a certain pity; and yet, within our breasts there dvells a knowledge that within your beings, as within ours, "That Light," is present. It is not enclosed nor encased. It merely needs a fan to spark, to glow and to expand, We long, Oh people of earth, to share our thoughts. We have waited; we have experienced; we have witnessed your turmoils. We have accepted that which you represent. We have offered love and understanding. We merely wish for you to partake of the fruits which have ripened and are yours. Help yourselves. Open your hearts to receive that which is great, good and just. Let your beings exhibit the great love which is yours. I, Mon-Ka, have spoken. It has been my privilege. May Our Radiant One's "Light be with you. May His blessings be yours. Adonai, vasu barragus. Until I speak again. 1 am Mon-Ke. Adonai "HE CREAT HERITAGE OF EARTH" May 17, 1958 By: Korton, Mon-Ka, Oxoh Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton. It is again our great privilege to speak with all of you, Your reception this evening will consist of two parts. First, Mon-Ka would address you. The second will deal with a little talk presented by one familiar to you all. When Mon-Ka finishes speaking, you will be allowed the nec~ essary tine to adjust your recording devices for the talk accompanied by that music you have selected. One monent please. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Mon-Ka. I am again pleased to speak with all of you. Several interesting occurrences have been brought to my notice. Anongst them, the little venture you82 CHAPTER FOUR experienced with the one who approached you, regarding the use of your talks to be transmitted to your people over your radio. Regardless of this one's apparent peculiarities, I would suggest you contact him again with information that the talk will be available without the musical accompaniment. You should receive this within your next week. Also, we shall attempt to restore the Galactic Tour at that time. The broadcast of sone of your communications is a step within a step, my brothers. I would request also, that all of our talks yet to be re~ ceived where we desire a musical accompaninent, that it be recorded in your present manner so that the music can be deleted if so desired. We are aware of those intricacies and laws concerning these things. Now, my brothers, I would discuss for a few moments, “similarity transfer." As you were informed many of your months ago, the purposes involved in presenting the Tensor Talks were outlined and they indicated that certain results were to be expected, certain new techniques applicable to your work with those people you are among. I do not believe you need recall too many of our thoughts as regard levitation or teleportation. The words, "similarity transfer" applies to these two techniques. In view of this I wish you to exercise your minds somewhat, for at our forthcoming talk techniques will be described to enable all of you to effect these two occurrences, It might be of Sone help if you will recall a method employed upon one of our planets, which has been described in earlier talks, of how beings were transferr— ed from one locality to another. Yow, for a few brief monents, I would mention thet the journey to ealus may start at either of the two times available to the majority. The remaining impetus to unseal the entrance ways may be triggered from our craft which will be stationed in the inmediate vicinity. The opening process has progressed to the point where this is all that will be required. Needless to say, the situation will be under our control. T would also at this time make a comment regarding the apparent difficulties in your world situation. These points of excitation (earthquake activity) which have recently been disturbed will, within the period of the next two of your weeks, be quieted, This brief flurry of activity will have reached its peak upon # day yet to come, a5 you have been notified by another means. I would also mention that the attempts of your government to detonate an atomic device outside of the earth's atmosphere will be monitored closely by our craft, and that those harmful radiations will be disposed of. I would suggest to all of you, that in particular those of our talks received over the past two of your months be thoroughly studied. They bear heavily upon that data soon to be received. ‘This, I find concludes those renarks I have at present. May the “pight" of Our Infinite One be with all of you. I am Mon-Ka. Adonai. orton here. We shall now pause so you may adjust your recording devices for that to follow. You may now start your music and your recorders.CHAPTER FOUR 83 Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One, I am Oxoh. It great privilege to address these remarks to your people. At this ny brothers of earth, I would comment upon Little-known subject. eons ago upon your planet, Great Beings had their presence; their pose was to see that life and mankind had the opportunity and the Fonment to grow, and to mature in spiritual and cultural ways. The original Beings upon your planet experienced many, many conditions. The Tesults of these have been recorded and had to do with the early ac~ counts of your infant planet. In those times, my brothers, MAN upon your planet came from that known as outer space, great people from races who felt it their obligation to visit the planet and to help the earth. At this time certain scientific devices or machines were placed upon and within your planet. These devices were timed to cycle, through eons of time and to produce certain conditions and effects upon the planet earth. These forces and conditions were those deemed necessary by very high spiritual Beings to condition man to meet that which is known as life. Life had its beginnings in a tender cradle. Throughout all that is known of eternity, great love was bestowed upon all of Our Radiant One's creations. Some of these creations, through the exercise of their ovn inherent spirit, chose upon occasions to ignore that which was about them and which was created for their benefit. The results of these have been felt as mighty blows to many races on earth. My brothers, upon that known as earth, you were bequeathed a magnificent heritage; for the planet earth is to be the stepping stone for the creation of a great race of beings who will traverse the corridors of space; set foot upon many, many planets; colonize mighty star systems and spread the "Light" and Love of Our Radiant One. This indeed was and is earth's heritage. A most noble and magnificent deed that could be accomplished. Through choice, ignorance, the deliberate blinding of one's eyes, the ignoring of great and mighty forces in existence about him; man (humans) in ancient days and even to sone extent in the present, continues to ignore these things which are his heritage. Oh, my brothers, if only it could be otherwise, for you see because of these choices humankind now has a road of Long progression to traverse. The heritage, however, still stands as a beckoning "Light." However, much must be accomplished before its attainment is again within grasp. It has been a long road to travel which has saddened our beings a we observed the choices humanity made. However, it has come to our notice that in recent times, to our great joy, certain "Lights" have been seen upon the earth. Upon witnessing these, Great Beings were again called to witness that which was happening. A great benediction was pronounced. These Beings were impressed to extend great forces which were at their discretion to employ, to again encourage the bright- ening of these "Lights"; and, at this time ve are hunbled, we are grateful. For your planet, ay brothers, is beginning to show a luminescence; one which is spreading with great rapidity not only throughout the planet but through the very ether. It has drawn the attention of your neighbors in the heavens. Yes, my brothers, we are most humble and grateful, for once again we can extend those forces of Our Radiant One, those thoughts of great “bight” to help those who are in rapport and who will receive them.84 CHAPTER FOUR From the heavens, my brothers, there moves a great ship, a great star of understanding and "Light." Even at this time, it circles in ever widen— ing orbit, an orbit which will bring it near your Solar System. Earth will experience a great "Light" of Love and understanding, one that has been felt throughout all space, all time. Soon earth will again be in our midst. Truly, my brothers, you are coming home. This concludes ny remarks at present. May The “Light” be with all of you. May great understanding be yours. May I ever be your humble assistant. My love. I am Oxoh. orton here, We trust, ay brothers, this will again be of some benefit to all of you. Until we speak again, may Hie “Light and that of the Solar Cross be with all of you. Adonai. eee /TELEPORTATION AND LEVITATION” May 21, 1958 By: Soltec Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I amKorton. It is again our great privilege to speak with all of you. Your reception, my brothers, this your evening will not be lengthy. One wishes 0 speak who will describe that which will be of great ine terest. One moment please. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One, I am Soltec, It again is ny pleasure to be able to share with you this information about ‘similarity transfer." I shall outline briefly chat which it is thought advisable for your immediate consideration. First, let us examine that which is meant by the term “similarity transfer." It is my intention to bring to you informat ion regarding that which is known as levitation and teleportation. Similarity, mean~ ing alikeness, a transfer of movement from one place to another. The movement of your physical vehicle through time and space, to some point iin time and space, removed by two dimensions. In order to accomplish this we recommend the “similarity transfer" process. In order for this to be accomplished, let us use an example, How many of you have difficulty recalling the detaile of that area you occupied shortly prior to the one you are now in? Can you not vividly recall the placement of objects, color and space relationships? Can you create in that, known as your thinking, a visionary projection of that ares you have just left? How adequate, though, are the details, how careful your notice? In order to effect "similarity transfer" one must minutely observe the area to which the transfer is to be made. Let us take an area two of your blocks renoved from your present location. Traverse thie distance ‘and examine a particular location, noting the details, forming mental jmages of pictures in that known as your brain, then return to your present location. Now recall this scene in as much detail as possible.CHAPTER FOUR 85 ‘The next step is the actual movement through two dimensions to this location, This is accomplished in its most simple manner, by directing one's entire attention to and through the mental image of the location held in your thinking. This establishes a rapport with the atomic and molecular patterns of the location. I would suggest the following. Keep the location fixed in your thinking. The direction or route used to reach this location is incen- sequential; physical obstacles in your path have no relationship whatsoever, nor are they an impediment to your progress. Those atoms that you have established rapport with, you have established in time and in apace in creating your mental images. These are attuned with that loc tion you wish to transfer to. When the rapport between the atomic pattern of the location, held in your thinking, reaches a similarity that is aceurate to twenty seven decimal places, teleportation will occur. It is essential, my brothers, that your mind be relaxed before attempting these fundamental exercises -- therefore, the use of the Cortical Pause. Secondly, all of you will require some exercise and practice with these techniques in order to implant the procedure in your own thinking. Results, when they oecur, I will warn you, will be instantaneous. You will no doubt be somewhat startled. Now let us discuss the process known as levitation. ALl of you who have had elementary training in basic physics have become familiar with certain laws regarding the movement of mass and energy. These, you may thoroughly discard. The forces affecting mass, gravity fields and molecular attraction, do not exist within the framework of your scientists! conceived concepts. First of all, what is involved in lifting an object? You have a certain amount of mass which is, at the moment, at rest. There is a certain amount of inertia to be overcome in starting an acceleration of movement; there are the effects of that known as gravity to be dealt with. How should you go about influencing these three factors? You will notice I used the word "influence" suggesting to your thinking that an outside force is called upon to exercise the influence. In this you are entirely correct. My friends, the human brain as such does net contain the necessary power to overcome these conditions. However, those forces just des~ eribed can be influenced by another portion of your being which is operating on a higher octave of vibration. In order to levitate you may discard any preconceived ideas that it can be accomplished as an act of will, You will find chat will does not even enter the equation. ‘That force which will accomplish this is that force which you appeal to, that you call upon, and with which you establish rapport. Ie is called the "Light." In establishing this rapport through the brain, and the mind, you sutmon this force from another level which is removed or different from that which you occupy. You are creating the necessary channel through which the energy to accomplish these results must flow. How many have conceived the idea of using an external force with which to accomplish this? How many are aware of the degrees, of the nature, of those forces far removed from your normal senses? How many. of you have attained the state of being where you may call upon thatee ea ee 86 CHAPTER FOUR known as your higher self and communicate at will, convey ideas, requests, exchanges of information and exchanges of forces? low, my Brothers, do you visualize that which is beyond your present compre- hengion? Since you have only witnessed your higher self upon rare occasions, and few indeed while in a physical existence, how do you go about establishing this channel of conmunication? It should be obvious. It requires that you achieve 2 form of com munication between the brain and the higher self, which you commonly call the mind, Then, you must be able to practice directing this "Light" foree by your mental processes. Once this has been achieved, you no longer have to consider overpowering gravity; you no longer heed to consider mass or inertia. All that you do consider is the thought that you are no longer standing where you are, or lying where you are. By the degree of the rapport established with your mind you can control Levitation. Does it not seem strange that in all of the tine devoted to your physical sciences, that your science cannot produce this phenonena? Who among your peoples has claimed accomplishment of phenomenal ability? I speak now, my brothers, concerning that known as levitation. T do not in any way refer to those physical devices capable of lifting a craft. I speak as it applies to your beings. I do not speak of objects. Therefore, should you desire to accomplish these things, fe will be necessary for each in his own way to attempt communication in the manner described. I wish it understood that I have merely covered step one. In another communication I shall explain this topic more fully, meanvhile T shall have had tine to observe your actions and your attempts, It has been my great privilege to address you. Adonai, I am Soltec. Korton here. It is our intention to allow you to rest with this. May Our Radiant One's "Light" and understanding be yours for develop~ ment. Adonai. You may discontinue. RRR “THE GREEN EMERALD" (Introduction to the Tape) June 14, 1958 By: Mon-Ka Now since all of you have made your individual journeys in response to our request, and we are again warned by your presence, let me state that together we have perforned a great work and shall continue to do so. In our dealings with many of your peoples, it has alvays been our great good fortune that in the majority of all cases, our contact groups chose wisely those that would be of great service, All of you, I believe are aware, your particular gathering stands not only in our highest esteemCHAPTER FOUR 87 but you also warrant the attentions of many other beings upon planes even far removed from those that we occupy. Perhaps, this is because of our great and wonderful friend whom you know as Oxoh, I am informed that he wished his name injected into this communication and he sends the "Light" to all of you. Perhaps, my brothers and sisters, those things which have transpired (the actions of those in the UFO movement who, because of their ego problems, have experienced public ridicule) have caused you anguish; have caused others of you to ponder as to the actions and decisions which you found it necessary to experience. Might I remind you, that we ourselves find it difficult with experiences more deeply penetrating than yours. I would inform you, that upon these occasions when I address your gathering, that there are great nunbers of our people which monitor the talks. 1am eruly amazed that so many would find my humble words of such great interest. Therefore, it behooves me upon many of these occasions to extend my "Light" over greater areas than that inmediately occupied by your gathering. As one in your midst has a way of stating it, there axe others throughout the universe who can be blessed by "my ignorance." The topic I would present this evening is one that is unusual com pared to many of the talks you have received. For the topic, ny brothers, will deal with something which is a paradox ~ an abstraction and a real~ ity -- the lige and perhaps, the death of an entire population. This communication, having noted your preparation, may or may not be accompanied by those pieces of your music I've impressed upon your young friend. Use your discrimination. Before starting this talk I would again state that all of the events which you have undergone, jointly and separately, have been monitored and there are very few instances when your actions have not been observed. You have had a cheering section of which you are entirely un~ aware. These gatherings are an occasion when we permit ourselves the privilege of addressing you and they have not ceased. However, as you were informed, this period has been less active; a time of quiescence for which even we are duely grateful. Soon, the pace will quicken and our activities begin again. You will find the great work even more absorbing. Now we are ready to present your next talk entitled "The Green Emerald.” ee Re "THE GREEN EMERALD” June 14, 1958 Solar Cross Tape # 9-8 By: Mon-Ka Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Mon-Ka. In speak-88 CHAPTER FOUR ing at this tine, wy brothers and sisters, I would speak with you about one of the Little known aspects of a certain planet. In tines far re~ foved from this one's present, great forces and energies from sources, which in your terminology could be considered Divine, were exercised upon thie mass of substance. Great stirrings were felt. Mighty forces were unleashed and vave after wave of avakening consciousness ¥adiation poured forth from the very ether itself, and this one knew identity and consciousness. Its position, like many sister planets throughout the Universe was to then Evolve through eons of time, to a time when its evolution passed beyond the need of its physical existence. For by this time, its purpose would have been served. This planet, my brothers, vas located in a typical solar system. Races from various other sectors of space visited this one end human civilization vas enacted. Through eons of time man gained ever in avare— hess, He experienced all manner of this thing called life. He gained through ages of total ignorance, shall we say, into more enlightened ages. He discovered the principles of some of the universe's great laws. ‘Through the sense perceptions available, he began to observe, to correlate data, to make assumptions. These findings precipitated hin into an age of great learning and great enlightenment. But, like gost forms of consciousness, newly realizing the potentials of great forces, poorly understood and at his disposal, a blunder ocurred, And man upon this one was cast back or reduced to again @ here primitive state, net totally lost in awareness, but, shall we say, with @ portion of his menory renoved. These ones, again, started building for their futures with a great and wighty ideal still implanted in the innermost core of their being. Again, progression occurred and this form of man -- now the wiser through the gaining of much experience ~ treaded upon the path, and again; sought the ascending steeps of loftier heights. There passed ages of gradual avareness and awakening. Man again sought for and obtained the essences of that known as the Divine. This time, however, his progress was nore carefully planned. Instead of evolving at utmost speed, his footsteps faltered some~ times along the path, but nonetheless, his strayings were never too far removed from the goal he had envisioned as his future. At a specé ified tine, a great teacher was sent to these ones to again precipitate them into an awakening experience. This One, having left His influence and His teachings, departed your planet in a way never to be forgotten. ‘dnd since thie time, progression has occurred at an ever accelerating pace. now, as this one evolved, again the forms of science, technology ‘and the evolvement of things considered spiritual took place. This time, these ones discovered new forms of energy. They started delving inte the very secrets of that called matter. Soon, they learned the various vaye of disassembling matter itself. Unfortunately, these powers were not alvays used tovards constructive ends. For, even Gmongst these ones, there were those -- there were those beings fron other worlds ~- who quietly stepped into this planet's environment andGHAPTER FOUR 89 sought after positions. For should evolution and progression again attempt a direction towards that which could be considered detrimental; these ones could exercise the great knowledge, the great teachings, the great awakenings. Now, we shall examine for a moment this one's two alternatives. Let us look first upon a progression considered correct. Let us look at a planet whose cultures and sciences, whose spiritual achievements reached forwards and upwards; whose races knew peace and harmony} whose people trod the forests and hills and ever enjoyed the calm serenity of pale azure skies Lined with fleecy white clouds; who listened to the cries of the birds, and enjoyed the delicate fabric of a forest carpets whose eyes surveyed mighty mountain chains, observed rolling waves of grain, and observed the mighty rollings and swells of oceans wide. This, my brothers, is one probability. One, whose very probability could advance mankind in a short period to the learning of such truths, that powers not unlike those of the gods, would be theirs. ‘These ones would spiral not only outwards through their neighboring systems to other stellar constellations, but would even discover the secrets of their om planet's internal core and learn, perhaps, the most startling of all information, This is the probability leading men in footsteps most desired. Then, my brothers, there is another probability existent. One where those forces at man's disposal would be turned towards the creation of havoc and destruction. Where grief and poverty, misery end anguish, would be the rewards cast upon humanity. A humanity, which in itself, would undergo these experiences for not having faced the realities ever present about them. Whose eyes, instead of accepting that which is frue, would be glazed and dulled. Whose hearts and minds, having been conditioned, would accept mere statements or words as fact. Whose very thoughts of reality were colored by the thoughts of those who told them what to think, Could not your hearts go out to people so blinded and enslaved, so comfortable in their wheels and shells of ignorance that they would not have the insight to look about then? It would be a great pity. ‘ My brothers and sisters, in our many discourses with your peoples meanings have been brought forth to your avareness for your considera: tion. They have one purpose only ~~ to cause men upon your planet to think, to let them see, perhaps, a glimmer of that illusive thing known as truth, If on any occasion we have accomplished this, we have accom plished a mighty deed. For in all my references, my brothers and sis~ ters, I have been speaking to a planet known through many, many stellar systems, and as I believe most of you are aware, one known as earth. ‘Throughout all of the teachings available to your peoples, references have been nade to great gods -- of great beings. Perhaps, people of earth, you axe about to witness this for yourselves. I, Mon=Ka, have spoken. May the "Light" of Our Radiant One be with you, and may I most humbly plead, you awaken before it is again, too late. Adonai, my brothers. wee90 CHAPTER FOUR “A MEETING OF THE SATURN TRIBUNAL" June 27, 1958 By: Korton, Sutko, Mon-Ka, Hatonn, Ashtar Koaton: “Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton. 1 extend ay velcone also to those visiting your midst, this your evening. "the delay occasioned before our transmission was based upon two factors, The first, in your meditations I observed that most of you present were devoting more of your time to the examining of oneself, perhaps too critically. I am aware that of those amongst you, several experienced a detailed self-criticion. However, this shall pass. You have one amongst you to whom this might appear somewhat new, upon this occasion it was deemed permissible to continue this talk originally scheduled for this time. The second occasion for our delay was necessary to establish the contact with the Tribunal where again, due to the nature of many events transpiring, concerning your planet, it was thought you would again be pleased to assume the role of observers. ‘adar Sutko, who several of you are well in tune with, will be speaking. I trust this vill prove of sone enlightenment to all of you. E shall again take on the opportunity to explain the events as They occur, One moment please. We will effect the transfer. ‘We are now, my brothers, again within the great Council chambers of the Saturn Tribunal where an issue is being discussed. You will, I Know, without ny having to identify the individual speakers, be able ko tell as the conversation progresses which ones are doing the speaking. The Council is being seated. Kadar Sutko will speak first.” Kadat Sutko: “Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One, This Tri- Dunal is now in session. My brothers, we are again assembled to discuss that phase of our operations which deal with the planet earth. I would request that our brother Mon-Ka illuminate us briefly upon those reports he has had the opportunity to gather." Hon-Ka: "Greetings, Oh Kadar, It has been my privilege during these past periods to inform the Council that the work of the Great Lords has net with their approval and that thie phase of operations is now com plete, Due to the processes involved, certain occurrences are now tran- ‘piring upon the earth which, as you are all aware, will bring about a greater good. However, due to the subtle natures involved, reactions present upon segments of their population will vary and it is my sad duty to inform all of you that I detect signs that forms of violence fare about to occur. In viewing activities transpiring in their various national bodies of government, I have grown weary in examining certain thoughts prevalent anonget their various nations. The effects of those Great Ones whose work has been completed will be most pronounced. "another observation of pertinent interest is the measurement of the earth's rotational axis; having deviated another one-half degree. Al- ready, our craft have been dispatched to rectify this situation.CHAPTER FOUR 91 "1 would ask of this Tribunal that certain measures now be employed for the protection ef those ones upon the earth's surface with whom we have created degrees of understanding, so that our previous work is not submerged by the tidal forces of violence about to be unleashed. I, Mon-Ka, therefore petition this Tribunal that the authority be granted. "T believe my brother Hatonn, in having examined these forns of data available to him alone, has some comment upon this alee, I retire with the Council's permission." KadaX Sutko: “Your remarks, my brother, have been received. I am pleased to note that the response present in this Council, as already registered, appears to back your requests. Therefore, 1 shall consider it. Hatonn, my brother, you may speak.” Hatonn: "Greetings, Oh Radiant One and to all ny brothers present. In having explored the records of this one's past, that we speak of, 1 find that in interpolating the data available and by the work of my staff, that I an forced to concur with my brother Mon-Ka's remarks and request. “Tt is evident, my brothers, that due to certain crises now present upon the planet earth and due to existing forms of governmental struc~ ture, there are only one or two possibilities present as to the course of their national defense. Unfortunately, after close examination of all pertinent data, I can only arrive at a decision which leads me to great sadness. "T would also reinforce my brother's request that certain emergency powers be granted, and I would further request that the Chronononitors be so informed and that again their povers be exercised for that life prevalent upon this one's surface. I see and I would inform this Gouncil that there are evidences that in the near future, weapons devised by various nations on earth will be employed. I would, therefore, request that upon the first launching of their missiles, steps be taken to nullify their actions and, if upon evaluation of further data the worst is to be expected, that their efforts be brought to a stalemate. It must be apparent to all of you that those influences exercised by our Great Ones be given time to mature. “Therefore, to further state my brother's previous remarks, I would request a delaying action be instituted. I am avare of a major crisis, capable of creating great havoc upon its surface. From that data available, and that within the next forty-eight of their earth hours, an event could transpire. Therefore, I request this Council's inmediate attention. I, Hatonn, have spoken." Kadak Sutko: "Your thoughts, my brother, have been received also. 1 am aware that there are certain groups of our people monitoring our conversations. I believe they, due to their status, may continue to monitor. Ihave communicated this request to Ashtar. I await his word upon this occasion. We shall be pleased, Oh Ashtar, to hear your comments."92 CHAPTER FOUR Ashtax: “Ashtar speaking. Immediately, twelve Chronononitors are to be stationed within five thousand miles of earth's surface. Their communication programming is immediately switched to our Galactic code. I would suggest to your Council that all measures relative to the protec~ tion to the surrounding bodies now be employed. I would authorize com plete nullification with but one exception of the nuclear weapons involved. It has been decided that one such weapon will be allowed to detonate at its launch site, Proceed. Ashtar has spoken." * Kadak Sutko: "My brothers, we have all heard. 1 see all of you are in agreement. Therefore, I, Kadar Sutko of this Tribunal, so instruct the Chronomonitors at my disposal to immediately deploy themselves as instructed. I also request the presence of Shan Shee (a large transport craft) beyond the orbit of earth's satellite. I further request that all survey craft now employed upon their regular duties be on standby; and that those of our people and those with whom we have established degrees of understanding have inmediate craft assigned for their crans— portation, should such techniques be so called for. "I request direct surveillance of all of our contacts and of all of our people. 1 further direct that with no exceptions, other than so stated, that no more than one nuclear missile be permitted to be detonated upon the planet earth in any form of aggressive action at this time “This Council is adjourned with the following words: It is again our great vork, ny brothers, to attempt to establich and maintain those codes by which all of us live. I have had to invoke strong measures to deal with this one before (the earth) and have been forced again to order such. It is with a feeling of great distress that, again, this one's activities would constitute a threat to the safety of nearby planets, and to those of all people present upon its surface. And, not in the least, to a dawning consciousness awareness prevalent in many of its population. "Te is ao longer permissible that we can afford the luxury of standing by and letting these foolish ones exterminate a great force of good. Eons, my brothers, have made all of us somewhat wiser. It has made all of us more aware of our great privileges and our actions. I have called upon all of you for this assemblage to be present, for as you are all aware, this was @ measure in which I desired your thoughts as well, We wish peace for this troubled one. We desire understanding. We have expressed "Light." Our efforts have not been wasted or attempted in vain. Our success may be measured and our failures may also be measured. Let us again attend to those matters innermost and may we always have the inner guidance of the "Light." "I, Kadar Sutko, now dismiss this Tribunal. I request, Kerton, that those in your gudience be held but for a moment as I wish a word with ‘them personally. (* nuclear explosion occurred in the Soviet Union shortly thereafter. This was detected by scientists in other countries. The Soviet's later announced that they had conducted an underground test.)CHAPTER FOUR 93 Korton: "Korton here. We shall adjourn to an outward corridor before ny brother Kadar Sutko again speaks. I would supplement his coments in stating, my brothers, that in direct interpretation of his remarks that you continue your normal patterns of existence, but with the full Knowledge that great forces have been placed at your disposal -- that your present activities are now constantly monitored and that our craft is at your disposal should the occasion arise.” Kadat Sutko: “Greetings, my brothers. I trust in having overheard ny remarks that this has not been too great a shock to your systems. It has been known, I realize, to all of you that mighty events were in the making. You have been instructed over several lengthy periods of your time as to certain roles you would be employed in; of certain environmental situations of which we have, I am afraid, consistently reminded you of. I would mention also, that at the moment the events surrounding all of you are of such import that there is very little you are in a position to de, Therefore, I would suggest continuance of your normal activities but with the knowledge uppermost in your minds of that which you have been permitted to monitor this, your evening. “a great sadness Lies upon our hearts. We have seen the Great Ones, who have visited your planet, undertake with forces of magnitude and subtlety, a major undertaking which can only result in a higher attainment of the evolution of humanity upon your planet. However, due to the nature of these forces, a degree of time is required for them to be consummated. Their work has not been useless. I might say it has been more than successful. However, due to the state of mental coma so prevalent and in such a large degree in humanity on your planet and whose actions could only be predicted by the meager information at our disposal, all outward manifestations of the results of this change are not readily predictable. "E know that deep within all of you there stirs that sane degree of perplexity, of sadness. I can only say this -- that your work - that for which all of you have become intended for shall be exercised, and shall continue to follow that for which you were originally conceived The Radiant One's plan does not appear to have changed; merely an un- certain course of probabilities has now been observed. "It is distressing to see hostile actions instituted and employed by great masses of your people. However, we trust that on this occa sion, we will be of greater service to your people. There can be no doubt that, again, a great dawn of awakening will stir the minds of those who shall be the only ones left upon your planet. "ponder ny words well and always know that we, your brothers, have been with you and are even now upon the side which represents the Great "Light"; we are at your disposal, 1 respectfully and humbly request that all members of those assemblages I address at this moment, inform all of their missing companions and audition my words for them within the next forty-eight hours. "Z would also request that all of those who hear my words remain with at least one avenue of communication open at all time during this period and, if it is so or can be arranged, that their proximity be somewhat close to one another.94 CHAPTER FOUR "May Our Radiant One's Love and understanding be with all of you. I trust and am aware that a great deal of discussion in your midst is now called for. Therefore, Korton, I would request that all channels be terminated at this time until we again have occasion to speak. Adonai. May His "Light" be with all of you. I am Sutko." Konton: "Korton here. We shall remain within range of your thoughts. You may contact us as you desire. Adonai. wee "IN THE MOUNTAINS" July 5, 1958 By: Korton & Mon-Ra Konton: “Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton. It is again our privilege to speak with all of you. Before our little talk begins I would comment upon your past few days and say that it is written upon your auras the depth of that you have experienced. I can tell you now that a nuclear war has been averted. Before one would speak, it is desired that Gaoon record his observations of these past few days. You may proceed, my brother. It will be recorded," Gaoon: "It is difficult for me to try to express to you people and those present here, the meanings of this past day or last few days. It has been priceless in so far that all of us present here, I am sure, have gotten a fuller, deeper, appreciation of each other, We have now a greater awareness of the good fortune that is ours as the result of this association. Needless to say, you people have been uppermost in our thoughts. You have probably understood what our conversations have been about you and the place you fill in our lives. “These past few days will be like any other great experience, friends; they will be close to us -- so much @ part of us that it will be impossible for us to express our feelings. I won't take any nore time, friends. This is your occasion. Thank you so much." Korton: "May the "Light" of Our Radiant One be always with you, Tt has meant a great deal to us also. He, who would speak with you next, will merely echo our sentiments that we are grateful for your words and your thoughts. One moment please. One would speak with you." Mon-Ka: Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One and may the fellow- hip of che Solar Cross be experienced by all of you. Iam Mon-Ke. Tt is my privilege to tell you that a nuclear holocaust, @ third World War has only narrowly been averted. We, in all humbleness, can be grateful to the “Light” and to all ofCHAPTER FOUR 95 those concerned im preventing what could have been a major event. Extraordinary measures were employed and a type of cosmic justice was experienced by those xesponsible. A nuclear missile ready for launch somehow detonated itself at the launch site, Those responsible were present when thie occurred. The release of radioactivity into the atmosphere will be detected by the monitoring stations of your various governments. Our craft will quickly neutralize this radiation after its discovery. Humanity will not be exposed to this danger. You have followed our suggestions well. I trust your presence at your present location can now be thoroughly enjoyed. The environment you find yourselves in has vibrations subtly surrounding all of your beings and radiating into and throughout those beings; a great depth of understanding and of power. My brothers, as all of you are no doubt avare, your movements to the locations you are now in was, shall ve say, directed. It was, perhaps, necessary for ¢ certain degree of guidance to be offered to you so that, that location you now occupy could again feel the tread of our people. In your surroundings you have noted, I see, the amphitheater below your present location. You have noticed the formations of those growths of vegetation immediately about you. Eleven thousand years ago, my brothers, those of you present were present at this location. At that time we visited you and you were brought home. In this, your year 1958, in all of you stand upon the same threshold, You have again made your pilgrimage to a location from whence you left the planet earth. Your experience has now attained a greater degree of import for all of you. You are again acting upon those conditions agreed upon; fulfilling your missions as it was so intended. Forever, in Qur Infinite One's Supreme Being and purpose, those of His "Light" Bearers, have again kindled the torches of radiance, which will soon spread to a conflagration that will envelope not near local~ ities, but entire continents; spanning the oceans in their unquenchable thirst that the powers of "Light," again profuse your planet, calling forth that which is good, great and noble in this species called hunan- fey. It seems, my brothers, that it is our great purpose in existence to trod the pathways and trails of many star systems; to touch upon these little coalesced gens of Our Infinite One's creations; to again, per~ haps, be planters of not only His like but of ideals which would inspire MAN, which vould urge him upward on the ever ascending spiral. our tasks, ay brothers, have never been easy ones. We have all shared great disappointments. We have all experienced the most exeru- ciating of illusions. We have all tasted of the nectar of ecstasy. We have all thrilled to the accomplishment of a work well performed. And yet, it is always we who are called forth again and again. with eons of time lying in our path and infinities beckoning us onwards ever, we tread the path. We are honored to use these powers and gifts of Our Infinite One. Again, we will attempt to disseminate "Light and justice.96 CHAPTER FOUR Ours, my brothers, is not the type of service which can always phys~ ieally embrace Our Infinite One's creations. But, it has been our calling and service to be those focal points, through which His energies might be directed to areas blighted by vibrations akin to those that we try to overcome. And so it is, after all of these many thousands of earth years, that again, you visit this departing point. Look about you, ny brothers, with your minds and your visions. Rely not only upon your physical senses but absorb the very essences of that which this locale can present to you. First, after that which abounds about you in such quantity and then, after having sampled this again, let it go forth from your being Let it permeate this atmosphere; let it ever expand outwards, embracing and engulfing the planet. Let us do the great work. For, my brothers, you stand and rest over a great edifice many hundreds of your feet beneath you. It is activated; it is charged; it gleams forth its radiant forms of energy; se subtle the forces that can be used for good. It is one of the powers which was delegated, undescrib- ed, at your last little tale. Feel within the very essences of your beings, the great tidal waves ef force emanating about you that can be channeled and directed through your mentalities, to those areas needing the sacraments of "Light," the vestments of radiance and the liquor of hunbleness. Stad upon yout feet, my brothers, Recognize the great forces which are yours and dwelt therein. Extend your arms, expand your beings. Be the five pointed star with its apex in place and again remember who you are and what you repre~ sent. Te has always been true, for those of us who have stood without, to shannel the assistance, the support, the integrity, the dynamics so Sorely needed in such environments. Do you, at this moment recognize ‘that you are not of the human race, that you are not of the evolution of earth; that you are not mere wanderers putting in your tour of exis= tence upon this little one? Know that you are agents of not 2 Solar System nor galaxy, but of an Eminence which transcends even universes. Again I call to you, my brothers. I call for you to recognize that which you are; to expand your beings; te grasp that which you are and emanate the great force which is yours. Coincidence? I believe not. Happenstance? I have difficulty in conceiving. Purpose? Ah, perhaps. Perhaps, in the word purpose, we have struck the great keystone, My brothers, I conclude and end my remarks. Again, I ask that in your remaining hours at this present location that you do attempt these things. I ask that you do recognize that of whieh I have spoken. Send out the tendrils of your being. Sample this, your environment, and emanate the great power and the great love which you are capable of, for it is in your grasp to do so. Then, raising your eyes to the great and mighty star, Polaris, witness -- witness. Again, my being has been warmed by your presence. My longing has been shared and I trust my love has been felt. Go now upon your mis: sions with hearts buoyed by a Great White Radiance. Know that for which it is written. Adonai, my brothers. It is yours. I, Mon-Ka have spoken.CHAPTER FOUR 97 Koxton: Korton here. Listen well to your brother's remarks. It con taine a great message for all of you. May Our Radiant One's "Light" be with you. I am Korton. Pa "ELEMENTARY MAGNETICS" July 6, 1958 Solar Cross Tape # 6-B By: Bellarian Greetings, people of earth. I am Bellarian. It is tty great privilege to address all of you at this time on an extremely interesting and noteworthy subject. One, it is true, that is little known to your people == the topic of the phenomena of magnetics. In your early edueation you have all been exposed to a concept which states that certain laws are known as to the reactions of magnetic phenomena, Let us look, first of all, at the tiniest substance or particle of matter = what is known in your terminology as an atom. tere you would see a central nucleus, or let us call it a core, surrounded by a number of whirling electronically charged particles known by various names -- electrons and so forth. In their course about the central point or core, they are maintained in an exact orbit and at an unvary- ing speed. How is this possible? What forces propel these particles in their circular orbits and maintain a constant speed? It defies the laws of all of your classical physics, for the law of friction does not apply. Where is the friction? There is none, obviously. Therefore, there must be an error in a certain mode of thinking, dealing with this basic science, upon which a great many of your sciences are predicated. Let us examine it closely. An atom is very similar in every respect to a Solar System, consisting of a sun as its nucleus, the planets in their orbits about it as electrons. Again, what keeps things going? No one knows, it is true, upon your surface. Let us look at this whole subject in a rather simple way. We have a core of definite atomic weight and size, possessed of certain properties unknown, which distinctly influence the neighboring particles of electrons or planets, whichever way we speak. This central core does exert an influence. For if we remove it, we no longer have an atom. We have instead a number of charged particles flying off in all directions through space until they arrive at some attractive point. ‘They then recreate with other particles and again form new and nore stable atoms -- an atom or a Solar System, all operating upon one of the littlest known laws of all -- the law of magnetic ALL of you know that without magnetism, there is no electricity. Without electricity, we have no civilization. That includes you, pe ple of earth. What unique property does magnetism have which makes it so distinct? Think for a moment. It is a field of force. A field endowed with a power such as no other force, perhaps, existing in oura ec ar ee eee ee 98 CHAPTER FOUR universe. Why ie this? How could it be? Why does it deny all your lave? Ie ig simple. It defies all your laws because it is @ lav —- a {iv upon which other lave axe formulated. You know effects. You do not know causes. You believe in space travel. Shortly, your civilization will attempt to reach your satellite, the noon, and then your other neighboring plan gto, You shall reach your moon. You shall never reach your accompany” {ng planets. A very basic lav is involved, of which your scientists and your experimental eaft will become aware. 1 would offer some advice. Do not study the effects of magnetics study magnetics. Study your little atons. Sprinkle your little iron filings upon sheets of paper in a magnetic field and look at the patterns they deseribe. You observe a field of force, for the filings arrange theaselves inte simple geometrical configurations. Do not overlook the fact that you are merely staring at a geometrical configuration. Perhaps that is the key. It might be worth looking into. Again, do too many fail to see the forest because of the trees? Look closely, my brothers. The Little iron filings sprinkled upon a sheet of paper exist in one frame of reference. Strange, ie it not, that a planetary aystem has a vertical exis? Tt hae g horizontal axis elso, only in circular form, called in your terminology, an equator. You have yet anodher axis. Magnetic phenomena, ny brotheve and sisters, consists of a force which permeates all matter, including the atom. You have not two forces, but three -- two at right angles to one another and a third, There is only one possible axis it fouid aseume, Instead of thinking in three dimensions, you can solve {his very simply, for the clue is located in the second dimension, The cneter ig in three, You might study this litele problem, for, people of earth, you are going to learn about magnetics very shortly. 1 ehank you for allowing the privilege of addressing you. T trust T have not gone too far into your forest. 1 am Bellarian. Adonai, Vasu Barragus.99 CHAPTER FIVE "HATONN'S FIRST PARABLE" July 9, 1958 By: Hatonn Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One, I am Korton, My pardon for the delay. We trust that your communication, this your evening, will prove of value. I would mention this now: search diligently through the words and look for the meaning. One moment please, one would speak. Greetings, Oh Children of the "bight." I am Hatonn. It is again ny great privilege to speak with all of you. What I would say upon this occasion is of great intent. If 1 may, I would like to recite and ex- pound a little story. It is in the nature of a parable. Therefore, I would be most interested in following your diligence in seeking for what it is Iwill have spoken. T hold in ay hand what is commonly known as a pebble. It glistens in a soft slick radiance. As I turn it over and examine it, I see present upon its surface many thousands of Little openings. If I were but of microscopic size, I would indeed spend many years examining what, to me, would seem huge openings or caves in this object. 1 could spend an entire lifetime examining all the many twisting and turnings; the many byways and corridors and caverns. I would perhaps search, not knowing exactly what it was I searched for. But I would continue to press onward and examine each tunnel, each fissure, minutely and carefully. Perhaps, I would fear that in my haste to progress, I would overlook something of value. In my intense concentration and study of this object, I have become completely im- mersed. Suddenly, I realize that this object T hold in my hand cane from an area where there are not only vast mountains but millions of similar stones; that here, I have devoted an entire lifetime to exan- ining merely one. I feel upon this dawning awakening, a deep feeling of frustration, Knowing that perhaps what I sought after, illusive as it was, might possibly be in one of the others, Yet, when I again take pause and re-examine my efforts, I ask; "Have I indeed accomplished that which Ihave intended originally? Have 1, in all my wanderings and explor— ings, learned what I sought after?” Perhaps -~ perhaps upon occasion I become discouraged; my feet become leadened; I felt that each step carried me merely into another passage as barren as the last. If I had the occasion of meeting others upon a similar search in the vast caverns, I would have become disappointed in them also. Again, maybe they would not have shared my singleness of purpose; my consuming impulse and desire to search ever on for something misty and illusive just beyond my fingertips. Maybe I would ignore these100 CHAPTER FIVE ones. I might have lost track of what it was I sought after. I may have taken and shared in the pleasure that these ones would offer through their companionship. I believe that there are those in your presence who begin to grasp something of what I speak. Perhaps, in my wanderings, I become confused as to directions. Maybe I often traversed the same corridors more than once. I may even have been so deeply absorbed in my pursuit that time ceased to exist as a frame of reference; I might have been surprised to meet myself coming and going at the same moment. Yet, within my bosom, a desire wells up with a faith which is vnquenchable and ever leads me farther in my examination of the environment. Perhaps, I would often think that all of this was of no purpose, that in all of time I had merely surveyed an interesting form of manifestation. Yet, my brothers, let us remove ourselves from this little pebble; let us stand back; let us now look upon it as a whole, rather than a never ending maze of passageways. What do we have? Why, perhaps it is a building block, one of untold number, each one in its place has formed another structure. Look well upon this little pebble, for you, my brothers, have in your strength the ability to hurl it far; to change the environment; to change its frame of reference; to use it as a part of another. My words, perhaps, fall strangely upon your ears. Again, in my own being, I see that there begins to glow a little spark somewhat brighter. Think well, my brothers, upon these words. I would ask that you examine them closely for therein lies a great truth, one you are now qualified to really know. Remember the pebble lies within your grasp. What would you do with it? I shall watch. A great ster lies in your future. It does bear a relation. Until I speak again, may His Love and His "Light" be with you. You are all my children. Soon perhaps -- sooner than you realize we will meet again, Adonai..I am Hatonn. Kerton here. Originally my brother Soltec had prepared another Tensor Equation for your mental digestion. However, in reviewing this that has been spoken, it will wait a little longer. In passing, our good friend Oxoh has instructed me to extend his "Light" to all of you and inform you that one eyebrow has been raised in your direction. May the Pure White "Light" of Our Radiant One be ever with you. Adonai until we speak again. wee “WORLD CONDITIONS" July 19, 1958 By: Voltra Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Voltra. My purpose in speaking with you, my brothers and sisters, is in reference toCHAPTER FIVE 101 what is termed your world situation. As all of you know, your planet at this time is experiencing a per~ iod of great unrest. You find one group of nationals struggling against others continuously, in your various sectors, in what they term the pursuit of their individual freedoms. If I may call to your attention a fact which is obviously overlooked by many upon your surface, I would bring to your attention that at no other time in your planet's recorded history have so many various nations, countries, racial groups, or individuals created such fitful conditions, nor strived so diligently in the cause of their own freedoms. In your past all nations have sometimes used this word "freedom" as a cloak to hide the true natures of their desires. However, the driving motivation present in this your current tine is a true striving towards Liberation. It has been growing, as you are aware, over the past several of your years. Again, may I bring to your attention that as shortly as two years ago of your tine, those countries referred to as the middle east had very little thought of individual national freedoms. Does it not now seen strange that within such a short space of time, suddenly all of these nations would desire this? It is common with those living im your environments to often over- ook the obvious because of the mass of confusing assumptions and the tendency for many to take all happenings for, as you would say, granted. My brothers and sisters, in viewing the teachings and lessons delivered to your respective groups, you will recall that several outstanding qualities were expressed and you were prompted to study diligently along those lines that would cultivate these. Among then was the sense of discretion, the heightening of your powers of observation, the controlling of your emotions, and therefore your tempers; the raising of your mental and spiritual qualities to planes slightly above that which you occupy. These have been presented over and over and over again through the medium of many of our peoples, clothed in different forms of communications, contained in various little thoughts; but, if your messages are carefully analyzed you will find that one of these is the main under~ lying theme. ‘Therefore, your nations, your groups and individuals are now all responding to a new type of vibration; one designed to heighten, to envelop, and to raise the standards of all awareness upon your planet. Regarding the future exploits of your many striving segments; upon the best data obtainable to our peoples, according to our best inter~ preters, it is quite evident that a period of turmoil is about to be experienced. My brothers and sisters, I would state this to all of you for clarification of your records. First, we of the Confederation have in no way contributed, abetted, or aided any cause, movement or endeavor that would lead your peoples or any other beings so influenced, into forms of strife or violence. Our motives, 1 can assure you, are governe by those thoughts of peace, of love, of harmony, of understanding and wisdom, as expressed by Our Infinite Creator. Secondly, those great beings, the Lords of the respective planets, which have visited the earth, have brought about an increasing tempo of this new vibration destined to bring your planet to heights of unseen glory and majesty. They have in no way contributed to any form of violence or strife. If the forces which these great Ones have brought into102 CHAPTER FIVE being cannot be accepted by segments of your planet's population; if these forces, in being exercised, cannot be grasped; if consciousness cannot accept the blinding light of Truth; then like in an experiment in the science you call physics a reaction is bound to occur. If one substance cannot accept another, one of then has to be renoved or undergo a transformation so they become compatable. Tf your populations cannot accept the new vibrations which your planet is now experiencing, then these ones shall renove thenselves by means of the employment of certain universal laws which will cause their renoval from your planetary environment. It is like, for an example, your requesting the sun not to shine because it has a ten= dency to cause your skins to change color. A law, my brothers and sisters, is a law. It functions with cause and purpose. The laws as set forth in the universe decree that within certain cycles of existence and evolution, planets, galaxies, peoples and races, ainevals and vegetation, will grow through certain cycles of enlightenment and ‘0£ experience. These laws can no more be refuted than we can refute the fact that we are presently existing. Therefore, my purpose in stating these things to all of you is to make vhat is about to happen in your future somewhat easier for you to experience. The time for not only your planet but for many others in this por— tion of the galaxy, is one vhere a great lesson is about to be experienced. A great law is about to have its affects felt. These things eannot be avoided. They are as much a plan and a part of the great ereation as you and I. I do not say these things to create an impression that all of you will pass through these times untouched. You have volunteered; you have been placed in environnents where you could not enly feel the pulse of the peoples you are to work with, but for you to act as beacons and reservoirs, of channels of tremendous energy from the cosmos, as stabalizing factors in an otherwise chaotic condition. ALL of you received certain conditionings prior to your emergence and embodiment in human form. Conditions and instructions were presented in such a way to your consciousness that only upon the occurrence of certain events, would your memories return, would your full status be realized and recognized Many of you, I have noted, question yourselves as to your position in the Infinite plan. I would say this to you, my brothers. "Question not that which is Divine." Know that as surely as there is a universe, your lives are not without purpose and meaning. Your presence upon the earth is not without reason, It should be apparent to all of those to whom I speak that you, my brothers and sisters, are not subjects of the planet earth. You are subjects of the Universal Confederation, to the laws of the universe and of Our Radiant One. You have been acting within the framework of your present envirenment's laws, as you were instructed, This was necessary in order to carry out your missions. Soon, my brothers, do not be astounded or surprised when you find yourselves in a position to be the faw. I believe you should think about this. ‘There are followers and there are leaders anong men. You are definitely not of the former, Fret not about your seeming inade- quacies, your lack of apparent capabilities; for if that part of your awareness, which remains in deep sleep at these moments, awakens at the urgings or occurrences of certain events, many of you would 4indCHAPTER FIVE 103 it within your power to contro£ the entire planet you now reside upon. I do not speak lightly, my brothers and sisters. I speak to all of you that which is known as Truth. Do not, in the name of our Radiant bne, take your duties lightly. You are now requested to carry on your present activities until advised to the contrary, in a manner which will hot attract attention to your immediate persons. It is suggested that you work behind the scenes, as you have a way of expressing it, for the time will come when there will no longer be a necessity for your presence upon the earth to remain veiled to your selves or others. 1 trust, my brothers and sisters, that in this little talk to groupe ‘all about the planet earth, that you shall experience new avakenings 3s it has been so ordained, 1 shall speak again as the occasions warran bringing you those items of knowledge essential to your works. Adonai, my brothers. I am Voltra ae RE “ADVICE CONCERNING THE MISSION" July 26, 1958 By: Korton, Soltec, Hatonn Korton: Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton, Our topic this your evening, shall be one of great interest. Your speaker this evening shall be our good brother, Soltec. You ace all aware of the degree of rapport established between your young friend and this one. Do not be startled should there appear any seeming changes in his appear- anee. One moment please. So€tec: Greetings in the "Light'' of Our Radiant One. I am Soltec. It Is again ny great pleasure to address all of you. Ihave at my side one who has recently returned from a great mission. This one is known to you, closely. The topic I would speak upon at this tine is not one of dur Tensor Equations but one of interest and purpose for your activities. Through these past months of your time, we have conversed separately ‘and as groups with many of your people. As you are all aware, your planet faces many crises in this your present time. Each of you know that there are great purposes and efforts being directed towards the duties you shall perform. I would take this opportunity to outline, if I may, several projects and efforts which it is now desired to bring to your attentions. First, I would address your young friend, and mine, and also our brother Calvin (Calvin Girvan). You, wy brothers, find yourselves in a unique position; one where great things and doings are expected. Limited as you are by your present Neiled awareness, these efforts hardly seen to be productive, even when much of your time and effort is put into them. These things are known to us and we truly appreciate your positions. It is not by chance that j104 CHAPTER FIVE you have come to know one another, It has been stated that you shall be ‘of mutual benefit to the planet you now reside upon. Therefore, 1, and ny brother who sits with me, know to Calvin as Ceyxtan, suggest that you knev one another and that you blend your efforts tovards the accon- plishment of that which we outline, Gryxtan shall speak to Calvin Shortly and thea we shall indeed have an interesting get-together. At your last gathering Voltra brought the subject of your missions to your attention. I address all of you now. This unit of the Solar Gross now needs to realize ite unique capabilities and position. Te thas become known to all of you that every effort which you have attempted has been one unique in character. You have been leaders and pioneers ‘as mentioned. You have initiated new methods and ways of bringing our thoughts to your peoples. ‘The talent of this group has not been over— looked. If you have examined your efforts of recent, you have noted where your great successes have been. These have been in the field of trans- mitting our thoughts and words to your peoples. TI ask you to consider that this field of your activities now is needed, as it has never been needed before. I request that you follow those thoughts outlined at your last gathering; to promote that knowledge which we can furnish and Those words which should have great meaning and truth for your peoples. Your medium known as radio is immediately acceptable. I am quite sure that you will be surprised and anaced at that which will occur vhen our words are broadcast to your people. It is easy, I know, to ask you to do this work when it could be so easily accomplished through our means. But think well why we ask you. Why do we place our trust, our efforts, in your hands at this time? You have great responsibilities and you have been trained for many Life- times for this, your chosen work. T ask cach one of you to search deep within your beings and know that the tine has arrived. Now you are called to perform that work of not only your brothers but of Our Radiant One. I ask that all of you, each in their own way, contribute what is needed to further this effort. { do not expect you to drop all your other activities or those which would further these ends if they can also be accomplished through other forns or mediums. Our young brother's Literature (Calvin's book), soon to reach the eyes of your people, is a step in the proper direction. In his words, many truths Lie for the curious eye to chance upon. Therefore, you are now called for a great work. We shall aid you in the formation of your plans and in their accomplishments. I tell you that these things are of great importance. ‘A great and rewarding satisfaction shall be yours as you see the eager response which shall come forth to all of you, even though you remain concealed in the background. The events that have occasioned this are well known, Your teachings and studies should now continue We will communicate our thoughts as they are needed. You shall all be enveloped in a radiance which, will not only fill your beings, but shall communicate itself through the ethers to those about you. Even the radio signals of your broadcasts shall carry a subtle vibration.CHAPTER FIVE 105 Think about these things now, and later, for there is much thought needed before your steps are taken. It shall not be long until I have the privilege of addressing you, perhaps not by this medium, but in a way more acceptable and I know desired. I leave you now with those thoughts, requesting your urgent consideration, Adonai. I am Soltec. Hatonn: Greetings, Oh Children of the "Light." I am Hatonn. T would add my thoughts to those of my brother. As what you would call @ Li- brarian, it has often been my task of delving into these records of ours. Ihave noted all of your past activities; those areas you have worked inj the environments you have changed. I find that vork you are now embarked upon, one of great interest and productivity. We have examined the many areas available for your concerted efforts. Your areas of endeavor have been surveyed. Your greatest suc~ cesses have been in seeing that our thoughts reached humanity and now find you are again called upon to accomplish this in a somevhat different manner. Knowing of your capabilities, of that which you can accom plish, I know that you shall be successful and again, our great work has been fulfilled, May Our Radient One's "Light" be with all of you and may Its ema~ nations now be felt. Adonai, my brothers. I an Hatonn. Konton: Korton here. My brothers, through the various mediums used to communicate our thoughts to all of you, there shall now be an effort to establish and to keep the channels more active so that there might be more rapid interchange of information. As your days progress and your awareness becomes more in tune you shall find, and please do not be startled, that we might suddenly interject ourselves into your conversation without che necessity of your holding a formal meeting. T trust that all of you are aware of the significant changes brought about and introduced in your meetings. T shall depart. In the "Light" of Our Radiant One, may peace, love and harmony be yours. Adonai, my brothers. 1 am Korton. “CONCERNING THE RADIO TALKS" August 9, 1958 By: Mon-Ka In monitoring your many activities during this your past week, and I might say in particular those of this your evening, you have all provided us with a great deal of valuable data, Therefore, I have requested that our brother, Voltra, and those of his staff also monitor the entire proceedings.106 CHAPTER FIVE In viewing your activities and efforts in this work that you have been called upon to perform, it was known to us and to you that obstacles of apparently insurmountable difficulties vould present thenselves to you for your consideration. I might also add and request that you attempt to formulate your program material entirely on your own. I am also pleased to note that you have been aware of many activities apparently reaching a point of climax. In your monitored conments, we have noticed your references to the fact that in your literature, mediums of entertainment, news services and many other mediums, there is a major effort being made towards enlightening humanity. You have asked yourselves, what is the real purpose behind our requests and be~ hind the apparent activities which you have noticed approaching a new level? You have wondered about the results to be obtained in the proposed radio series we have asked you to consider. You have all arrived in your own minds at different degrees of wisdom. I find no fault, nor do any of us, in the conclusion you have reached at this moment. In your present environment you have stated: "We are not fully aware of the overall plan of our Space Brothers.” This is true. ‘That is why many of you are veiled. Knowledge of this type if placed within your hands prematurely could cause your mission to be forfeited. We, therefore, present you enough data to allow you to continue your activities and yet, we trust, not enough to endanger the missions which you are engaged upon. I do not say this in a manner calculated to create a feeling of infe~ riority or of ignorance. Me do net expect you in your present level of avareness and the positions you find yourselves in, regardless of past experiences and knowledge, to influence too greatly your present level of society and environment. Now, I would take the opportunity to mention that we have monitored any of your thoughts concerning the possible consequences of your various undertakings, including the proposed radio series. It is, ny brothers and sisters, your right of "free choice" if you so desire. However, it is not your prerogative to doubt that the forces which operate in the universe do not operate intelligently, nor without motive or knowledge of your situational environment. Perhaps, I sound somevhat harsh, but again, my brothers, I find myself in a position where I must bring this matter of fear and negative thinking to your attention. I do not criticize any of you, for this is a common charac= teristic prevailing in your planetary environment. I merely inform you that there is a conception; a negative thought formulation which exists about you. The heightened sensibilities of your own avareness allow you to be even more susceptible to this than sone of the more unenlightened My brothers, you are being awakened to an ever widening gamit of sensations and vibrations. You should realize that you have the ability to overcome this. You should realize that you have mastery over these situations and of your own achievenents, individually and collectively. For this we have given you praise. I do not recall having given you criticism. I pause to let my words measure their full weight. As you know, I am quite capable of delivering talks much more to my liking than this one.CHAPTER FIVE 107 I have stated previously that if humankind would only stop and look at the tiniest blades of grass springing between their feet, they would be witnessing a miracle beyond their present comprehension. I have asked that you become aware of and believe in the dignity of your individual beings, and that which you represent. I have placed upon your shoulders responsibilities that few upon your planet could tolerate. I have not been disappointed. I have been greatly pleased. This is all I care to mention at this moment upon this subject, except that you now realize who you are and what you represent. You have great powers, as you have been told, placed at your disposal. I fail to see the need to constantly remind you that they are there and that they only need your concerted efforts to bring them into visible manifestation. Now, if I may be permitted and if it is agreeable to all of you, I would suggest the following. Obviously, the formulation of the proposed series of radio broadcasts is going to be difficult. Do you really believe I should remove this responsibility from you and transfer it to those of our people who are in a position to carry it out to near perfection? I again request that you carry on and know why I request this. Our initial statements were: "If you will merely put forth the effort, you will be amazed at the results." Your amazement may well commence inmediately, for, my brothers, if you should desire it, we would be most pleased to present you with the first progran. I would suggest that if this is agreeable, you now so state. Thank you, my brothers and sister: I would conduct this, with your permission, in perhaps a manner somewhat unusual, since no doubt there will be many little facets of material that you will necessarily wish to alter for reasons know to your avareness. Therefore, I would initiate this by stating that you may at any time edit or clarify our words if in your thinking it is necessary to clarify the meaning of adjust the topic content to fit the time format of the broadcasts. 1 shall merely voice ay thoughts for your recorder. You will later, I trust, compile those words into a meaningful sequence. (Editor's Note: The foregoing remarks prefaced the first talk of the Radio Series. That first talk is now presented.) Peay "GALAXY, AN INTRODUCTION" (The First of the "Galaxy" Radio Series) August 9, 1958 Solar Cross Tape # 5-A (Editor's Comment: Although Non-Ke is responsible for the word content of this talk, having dictated the talk, it was his suggestion that a108 CHAPTER FIVE professional narrator be used to actually make the voice recording that would be aired over the radio and subsequently released to the general public. The voice on the tape is that of the narrator and is not Mon-Ka.) In the year of 1965, mankind upon the planet earth succeeded in a step which, if carried to its completion, vould bring the peoples of our planet together. ‘The first faltering footsteps into that area known as space will have been a result of the unleashing of those forces contained in the atom, Friends, we are indeed privileged to present this broadcast -- the first of its kind -- to the citizens of this, our country, Long has it been known that within the hearts and minds of the American people exists that spark of greatness which has inspired our country to attainments thought, not too many years ago, to have been nearly impossible. Today, we are standing upon the threshold of man's first attempts to conquer distances formerly thought inprobable, if not impossible. We intend to launch vehicles capable of leaving the earth's influence and progressing outwards into space to first, it is understood, our satellite, the Moon; and then, if our attempts are successful, to the planets within our Solar System, such as Venus, Mars and Jupiter. Mankind has admitted his willingness to accept the greatest challenge ever presented; in the exploration of outer space. We are informed by our authorities that certain types of life exists on many planets within our Solar System. This does Hot mean, however, that the general thought prevails that human life, such as our own, exists. The reference is made primarily to forms of plant life and certain molds of a bacterial nature. It hae been man's dream since the beginning of time, upon gazing into the evening heavens, to somehow bring close to his presence those Little pinpoints of light sparkling in the vast distances. Now, in our time, this age-old dream of man appears close to culmination. What do we expect to find upon our moon or upon our journeys to Mars or Venus? Who can tell until we finally arrive. This mich is known; certain conditions upon these two planets indicate that perhaps it is possible for some form of human life and intelligence to exist in these planetary environnents. Therefore, the menbers of our first exploratory craft to succeed in reaching these points will be anxiously awaited, upon their return to relay to the peoples of our world what they have seen and found. Perhaps, what they shall report will be of little or no consequence. And then again, perhaps they shall report the presence of intelligent life, of human beings identical to ourselves. What, under these circumstances, would we do? All manner of questions come to our minds. What would these people be like? Do they consune food the same as we? Do they have families and children? Do they occupy themselves in forms of employment? Do they have time for leisure? Do they have any concept whatsoever of what we call religion? And, if so, do they believe in a God such as we do? How many of you have ever stopped and asked these questions of yourself? What would I do if I were a crew member on board such a craft and these were the conditions we found upon arrival? How would I reactCHAPTER FIVE 109 to another form of intelligent life? How would I react? Who can tell, except those individuals so confronted with such a situation? This brings to our minds a thought of whether or not we the inhabitants of the planet earth, are alone in this infinitely large universe or are we perhaps, merely an insignificant little spot or segment. We have read upon occasions, as our various news services have reported, that strange objects have appeared in our skies. Sometimes, it is true, we have mistakenly thought these objects to be a form of intelligently operated craft from an inhabited planet somewhere in space. Sonetines, perhaps, we may not have been mistaken. Due to the sheer enormity and weight of the meny accumulated sight- inge of these strange objects in our skies, not only our Government, but other Governments throughout our world, have decided that they are worthy Of investigation, From the year 1947, when a tremendous number of these sightings were made, so many of these objects have been observed that no fone of a sane and intelligent mind can longer state that there is not something strange existing in the skies above our planet. It makes no real difference at this moment, whether these be intelligently operated ‘space ships from other planets in our Solar System or elsewhere, or whether they be some form of perhaps astronomical or meteorological phenomena. ‘The mere fact remains that someching definitely unusual is occurring in out sbics. For a moment, let us consider what the possible implications would be if there were a form of intelligence manning some type of craft cap: ble of traveling the vastness of space and approaching our planet. What possible reason could be behind such a visit? At the opening of this program, all of you heard the most awesome and terrifying sound ever to fall upon human ears -- the sound of an atomic bomb exploding. It is well known to our science that each of these explosions release untold millions of radioactively charged particles into our atmosphere and who can tell how much farther out into space. Let us assume, for an instant, that there is intelligence, say, on the planet Mars. Assume that these intelligences, in noting the sudden arrival of this strange form of ra~ diation coming from space from the direction of a neighboring planet, might be curious enough to investigate, such as many of us will sometimes drive around the block to investigate some occurrence which arouses our curiosity. Might mot this pose one explanation of their presence -- the presence of the Unidentified Flying Objects or, more commonly, the Fly- ing Saucers? It would certainly be indicative to any form of intelligent life, that here was a neighboring planet worthy of observation. It is well known through our own experience, that many, many hundreds of years of toil, heartbreak and struggle preceded our entry into the atomic age. It is true that we do mot know, at this early date, of the possible ram- iffcations involved in our use of atomic energy for either constructive or destructive purposes, We are somevhat in the position of feeling our way along a dark corridor after the sudden disappearance of our electric Light. Yet, at the far end of the hallwey through an open door, we de~ tect a glimmer of light and so we stumble on, perhaps injuring ourselves and giving vent rather freely to our feelings. We manage to reach the ‘end of the corridor and the light. With the opening of this portal and110 CHAPTER FIVE our emergence into the light, we find that once again we can take a new look into our frightening situation. We are no longer fumbling. Now, we understand. Perhaps, my friends, we are in that category in this our present day. To the minds of thinking men and women who are the inhabitants of this, our planet, would it be too great a shock to comprehend that in the vastness of space, there could be other forms of intelligence or life? It would indeed be a eredit to ourselves, our country and our race if we could accept these things. For someday friends, this could well be a possibility, We would then have to re-enact the drama of the past few minutes in reality. We have assumed a lot of things in our talk -- the existence of intelligences in our Solar System, our universe and the existence of what is commonly known as Flying Saucers. Along with many other things, we have assumed that a degree of curiosity is present, not only in ourselves, but perhaps in the minds of those on other planets. Let us ponder on these thoughts for the present. "COMMENTS ON THE RADIO TALKS" August 25, 1958 By: Korton Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton. I would suggest the following; upon this your next day, as the opportunity pre- sents itself, that your number two program be completed in its written form. This should be prepared for Tuesday evening. Wednesday evening of your time, this talk will be presented promptly at your time of 9:00 P.M. Your present surroundings are adequate for this. Mon-Ka will be available to present the program. If ix is possible on your evening of Thursday, Soltec will re-pre~ sent his talk on your number three program. 1 would then suggest that more preparations be spent in going over Mon-Ka's other talks. If any changes are in order or you find the pauses too lengthy, Mon-Ka will either re-deliver the talk on your coming Saturday evening, or Bellarian will be prepared at that time. Unfortunately, duties considered extremely pressing presented an obstacle to Bellarian's speaking this evening. These same duties will delay his talk until the time mentioned. We find your activities progressing at a satisfactory rate and we deeply appreciate your striving and efforts. You occupy @ position of high esteem in our thoughts and feelings. We have no criticism. One moment please, Hatonn is prepared to present another talk.CHAPTER FIVE 111 “HATONN'S SECOND PARABLE" August 25, 1958 By: Hatonn Greetings, Oh Children of the "Light." I am Hatonn. It is indeed ny privilege to again speak with all of you. In all my ample ramblings, ny brothers, you have detected in your avareness that underneath my words, there sometimes lies a story. If I may be so presumptive at this time, T would submit another thought for your consideration. Let us for a moment visualize ourselves standing upon an open mead~ ow. As we gaze across a large vista, we see on the far horizon a dis~ tant range of mountains. In our desire to satisfy this drive within us, known a8 curiosity, we find that when the novelty of our inmediate surroundings begin to lose the brightness of their newness, our minds stray towards the distant peaks. One fine day in our determination to see what lies beyond, we begin to thread our way across the meadow in the hope of seeing what lies beyond the far mountains. After a long and weary day's journey, we reach the base of these mighty peaks. As we gaze upwards, we have difficulty in locating a suitable ascent to the top, But mone the less, our drive leads us to attempt 4 somewhat hazardous path. Slowly but surély, we begin to work our way gradually up the sides of this peak. Soon we reach the summit. Then, as our eyes gaze wonderingly across, a mighty vista spreads before us. Here we find an entire new set of experiences. Always in our being lurks an eagerness to approach these new unfoldings, so we descend from our lofty peek and enbrace with our arms that which greets us. Here we meet a race, These ones are not as enlightened as are we, for they have not yet stood upon the summit. We find in our beings a new sensation, the desire to shape the destinies of these ones so that they also may sometime ascend to those lofty peaks. These ones, shal we say, almost babes in their unfoldment, at~ tempt manfully and pridefully to scale the summits from which we have descended. On countless occasions, their attempts are in vain. Then, by ones and twos, they finally attain the summit and there they gaze upon @ new environment. They return and they, too, are filled with a new drive to enlighten their people. Then, one day 2 strange object appears in their sky. Moving swiftly and silently, it drops rapidly to their surface. From it step two beings, magnificent in their simplicity. Nearly all flee in many directions with the exception of a few. To those who remain, a great communication is delivered. Again, we have a parallel. ‘Think upon my words. Perhaps, my brothers, there are those anong you who will grasp my point. I would suggest that you review my words -- that you take then unte your beings and there encounter a new experience. May you rest easily knowing that, perhaps, two magnificently simple beings are descending. Adonai, my brothers. May Our Radiant One's "Light" be always with you. I am Hatenn.112 CHAPTER FIVE "A DANGEROUS TIME-PERIOD" October 11, 1958 By: Mon-Ka Greetings in the "Light" of The Radiant One. I am Korton. Again, ny brothers and sisters, it is our privilege to speak. Mon-Ka is waiting. One moment, please. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. 1 am Mon-Ka. It is again my great privilege, ny brothers and sisters, to speak with all of you. I have several interesting things to bring to your attention at this time. As to my word -- I now formally announce that those delibera- tions conducted at the recent Tribunal have been ruled upon. The deci- jon was to adopt Voltra's plan in its entirety. Several requests, which it was ny privilege to present, were also granted. I would now mention the following: At once all phases of the outline were put into effect. It is nec essary, ay brothers, to alert you at this time to be prepared for any eventuality. Your next thirty days commencing on the 15th day of your present month will see a great change. 1 do not anticipate any major disaster of atomic or natural phenomena. However, be alert to the ran ifications of a socielogical and economic nature, such as were touched upon at the Tribunal. I would suggest that your immediate group hold itself in readiness for a stay of seventy-two of your hours, at any moment announced and that you be prepared. We may have need, my brothers, of more direct consultation. No anticipated journey should remove you more than one~ hundred and fifty miles from your normal location. Now I would repeat my request, I ask all to be prepared. I do not mean that you should have those necessary articles for a stay of seventy- tuo hours duration available within one or two hours notice. I strongly suggest that they accompany you for instant use. You are aware of the necessary ways of accomplishing this. As our brother Harry would say, "You are now on an alert.” Let us see how well you maintain it. The word may come at any tine during the period mentioned. You will be notified. There shall be no question when this occurs. Now, if I may be allowed the privilege, I would continue with a few facts of note. The plan of endeavor, I shall attempt to verbally sketch in outline only at this tine. To broaden the comments of Voltra, they are as follow: Im the change of your earthly authority, several necessary steps are to be instituted, You will find, my brothers, that one has already left your planetary environment (the Pope). You may look forward, I assure you, to the removal of no less than seven. I might mention that we in ho way exercise this removal, This is a function entirely of The Council of Elders. We are merely advised. You will find, my brothers, a great educational figure will make a most startling announcement; a banker will attempt to destroy himself andCHAPTER FIVE 113 your economy; an announcement will be made of a new drug; there will be a transportation accident of great seriousness; an extinct voleano will come to life. These are merely the signs to be observed. They will be your way of knowing that the plan is in effect, for within thirty days of your time all that I mention will occur. There shall be a sudden mishap in the great area where your substance known as wheat is grown. A new disease will be found in cattle. A financial maneuvering will occur to shock your planet because it will be found out. T could continue my brothers. Due to the ramifications involved, this T believe is enough to sketch an outline of phase one. ‘The thought is going through your minds as to the nature of intervention being em ployed. In order to clarify this for your understanding I would state the followin, The planet earth is at a point in an evolutionary trend of a decid= edly negative character where it is not beyond the concept of reason to anticipate a planetary dissolution.* We are acting accordingly. In the event that such would occur all of out people and many others would de removed, as they are a percentage of your earth's population. At this moment, two of the Gities of Shan are stationed beyond the ozbit of Pluto. The Council of Lords are now upon your Moon. The Solar Tribvadl, The Calactic Tribunal, Our Elders and Ashtar have agreed that we have no choice but to see that che planet earth does not disintegrate. It is, ay brothers and sisters, this serious. Our motives you are avare of, but beyond that we have acquired, let us say, a great sense of rapport with many upon your planet. Ie is not written in the Cosmic record that these ones shall undergo the experience of a planetary annihilation. By this, I refer to the wiping of hunanity from the face of your planet. ‘There would be, as you say, wholesale removals of large segnents of your popu lation for not all that we view is darkness. It is my responsibility to govern these actions for the planet earth. I do not take this Lightly Three things ean occur. But in any event, your planet will remain intact. One, it will either be swept of all humanity as a result of hunan folly and left barren or, two, it will be transported out of your present Solar System -- I assure you such power exists.#* You have all, ny brothers and sisters, suffered through many experiences. We have the great privilege of knowing all of you and sharing our thoughts and words, We know of that desire present within all of you to meet us. May I de~ fine our position, We have remained renoved from your observation for # definite reason. That reason, my brothers and sisters, may not always appear to satisfy the desire present in your beings. However, it is one case where personal desixes are not the sane as the mission requirements. However, like all conditions of being, even rules, even certain laws, become modified with-changing conditions and time. I can assure you that this, too, applies. On the brink of a nuclear war which could decimate hunanity,) (** Or thirdly, the present negative situation will decrease, the danger diminish and humanity will continue until the New Age is upon them.)114 GHAPTER FIVE I have often considered our first meeting. I know you have felt, perhaps, that it would be difficult to be in our presence. Let me assure you it is more difficule for us to be in yours. If you think, you will know the reason. This, however, is no barrier. It will prove quite enlightening to all concerned. You will pardon my digression fron a dry outline of operational facts and plans =~ but I can briefly mention again that if your people respond to the conditions being brought about to help them -- I assure you our presence is also imminent. It is a fate which can be decided only in the consciousness of a planetary population. Destiny is flexible. You might compare it to the pivoting of a compass needle. ‘The pivot point remains constant but, the pointer of destiny can rotate about it. Always in linkage, always in rapport, always a part of the pivot. But a wide avenue, a degree of experience encompassing a large area can be experienced. I trust my little example is enlightening. We have great desire that in the minds and in the consciousness of people upon your earth that an awakening will occur. It is our fervent, our prayerful desire that this be so. We shall have much work to do. Certain basic things will occur regardless of the balance of thought prevalent upon your planet. These things are written and so shall be. Your inmediate futures, my brothers, is written. All probabilities exist but all are present and accounted for. A great work still remains to be accomplished. Your roles are entered on the list. They shall be performed. ‘This same message carrying the import of my words ig being relayed, even as I speak, to all upon your planet's surface with whom we have communication. Now, my brothers, I would make several suggestions. Go on about your duties. You will, perhaps, find them more trying as the days progress. You will all experience a certain degree of detachment in your mundane affairs. Complete your present radio serie You have merely gained, as you have a way of expressing it, a toe hold. You will find the climb long, but a gentle slope. It is my be~ lief that all of you now have enough to consider. It is now a tine for your most profound thought. You will enter into a discussion which ve shall be monitoring. We will speak again, Your young friend will be notified. It has been my privilege. Adonai, my brothers. I am Mon-Ka. kee “TIME, SPACE AND THE CREATION OF MATTER’ October 17, 1958 By: Mon=Ka & Soltec Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton, Agein, ny brothers and sisters, it is our privilege. The first to address you is Mon-Ka. One moment please.CHAPTER FIVE 115 Greetings in the "Light" of Our Rediant One. I am Mon-Ka. Again, it is my great privilege to address all of you, Before I touch upon that which is to be covered this your evening, several comments are in order. In monitoring your conversation regarding the publishing of the talks you have received, may I suggest for the time being that you do not concern yourselves with further efforts to produce our thoughts in written form. We would velieve your little group of the time and energy necessary to accomplish this at present. I would advise you to wait and see what occurs. We are pleased with the results of the radio program series thus far. All conditions appear being met and the work goes on. I would clarify, my brothers and sisters, again, your unique status. Let us say that you are the heralds of the new forces to be brought into action upon your planet. Yours will be like the voice of ancient Delphi This is your role, your function, at present. You occupy the unique position of introducing new concepts to those of your planet. The infornation that is introduced to those who Live on earth will be upon many difterent levels of informative strate and will concern all manner of things. You will find all of your current communication mediums of expression utilized in the times ahead, placed, ve shall say, at your disposal. Again, I emphasize, you need not go out -- they witt come to you to project the forces now working and emanating through not only all of you, but the carrier waves of the communication station which carries our words. This is the time for the assimilation of new thoughts. Your minds must be able to receive these new vibrations. Your work now comes to its present focal point. You will hear nore of this before this talk is concluded. You have reached, again, a higher step upon the path. This concludes my comments concerning this phase of activity. ‘Our thoughts concerning your seventy-two hours temporary leave of absence still lies in your path. The events forecasted, I bring again to your senses; watch closely, my brothers Now I would discontinue my remarks at this time. I am with you always. Adonai. I am Mon-Ka. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. Iam Soltec. It is time, my brothers and sisters, for your next Tensor Equation, Your Ten- sor Equation this evening is as follows: "Time, space and energy are manifestations of primary force. First, exists spaces secondly, exists times thirdly, energy. Time is one axis, space is the other, energy the third. Manifestation proceeds in the manner described, and we arrive at the very core of being." This concludes your Tensor Equation at this time. This Tensor Equa- tion, just presented; deals with a subject so involved that it ie now necessary for me to present a new concept to your minds. I shall title this concept, "In The Beginning.” My brothers and sisters, you have become exposed and somewhat acquainted with the, as you would say, esoteric side of creation. In Mon-Ka's descriptions and talks, you have been shown the paths of one phase of en- Lightenment. Now I would expose you to another. Let us hope that my re~116 CHAPTER FIVE marks will impinge upon your senses and bring awareness of still another dimension. Let us examine your equation. Space ~~ your books of word meaning define this word in an illusory manner. T would give you a more specific definition. In the beginning, it has been stated, from the Cos— mic Mind there flowed forth vibrations, waves of thought, which coursed through that known as ether and brought about the coalescence of minute particles. Protons and electrons were brought into proximity with one another and formed the basic building blocks of physical matter called atons. Atoms thenselves, floating about freely in this entity called space, exhibit few properties except that known universally as attrac~ tion, No atom by itself is intelligent, It 44 instinctive, It func~ tions without the process of reason, It exists in its own limited entirety for the briefest of all time spans. I include in my description of "briefest" that known in your terminology as “eternity.” My thoughts shall be clarified as we proceed. Space, then, is not a nothingness. It is an entity, crowded almost to the saturation level with atoms blindly attracted to one another, drifting about as the radiations of force emanated fron the Cosmic Mind direct, to form molecules, My brothers, the next step in the creation of physical matter requires certain other forces. We must have not only radiation, ve must have temperature and we must have pressure. Pressure is the result of temperature. One cannot exist without the other. It is now necessary to cause these atoms to rise in temperature. Again, the cosmic radiation influencing these atons, brings itself into close proximity with the very structure of the atom itself and brings them into magnetic alliance. They begin to gather, they form whirlpoals, they spiral in, tighter and tighter, ever increasing in velocity. As they do so, their apparent mass begins to increase. I say apparent because what is happening is that atoms are being packed tighter together. As this occurs, one atom comes in contact with another. This results in a very simple mechanical way. As nore atoms are poured forth and drawn into the center of this whirlpool or vortex, the packing becomes tighter. One atom, thousands of atoms, millions upon billions of atoms, and what occurs? The next logical step, friction which causes heat. We have now fulfilled our second requirement. We now have a blazing nebula of atoms about to become molecules. One item only is missing -- pressure. Soon we have a glowing mass existing in this entity called space, for we have radiation, we have heat and one begets the other. So down the chain of reaction, as a result of heat, expansion occurs. With expansion we develop pressure. Qur sphere of influence broadens, it is circular, it is spherical. More atoms are continually being drawn through the spiral arms of a nebula into its innermost core. Your science assumes, from the far-flung spiraling arms of a nebula, that these particles are being thrown off. This is mot true. It is exactly the opposite. They are being drawn into a cosmic whirlpool. Thus we have the beginning; with Light or radiation, temperature, pressure, we now have the forces needed to produce a new substance; we now have molecules. Molecules are the secondary building blocks of physical matter. Molecules behave essentially in the same manner as do atoms. They also exhibit the properties of mutual attraction. Again, a whirlpool comes into being. More molecules are gathered, more heat and light is produced, more radiation, pressure, temperature. Now ve have a glowing,CHAPTER FIVE 117 firey hot entity, existing within an entity called a nova, a sun or a star. This, my brothers, is the beginning. A nev star, or sun, exists through maay cycles, It grows hotter, it blasts away its radiations into nearby space; its temperature is reduced; its surface cools; it condenses. Finally the only fires existing are in its very core. Then the cycle for regeneration occurs. External radiation begins to feed the eternal fires within the core. Expansion begins to take place. Heat is radiated off from its core, vaporization takes place. The condensed molecules called physical substance begin to break up. They go back into their freer forms. A sun continues to expand until all that remains is, again, a blazing sun. I trust you will overlook the complete disregard of the factor of time necessary to accomplieh that whieh I have just described, for now I shall talk about time. Time, my brothers, is like a sphere. It has no beginnings, nor has it any endings. It is, as your scientists would say, a closed loop. However, time exists in more than one frame of reference, Let us look at it dimensionally. Let us take, for example, one of your handker- Chiefs, or let me suggest that you use a piece of paper. Place this Paper upon a support in a horizontal plane. Now, as you observe this, your piece of paper, lock clesely at what you see. You are looking at three dimensions. The paper in its horizontal plane assumes one dinen— sion, that called length. At a right-angle to this it assumes another dimension also on the horizontal plane, called width. It has another dimension too, again, only thie time in a vertical plane called thick~ ness. However, there existe that known as time. You have often heard references te that known ag time travel. Impossible? Please heed ay words. Time travel is the most simple step that can be performed. I shall demonstrate. Place a small filled-in circle in the upper left- hand corner of your paper. Shade it in. Thank you. A few words of explanation before I proceed. I am about te demonstrate in a simple way the theory of that known as time and travel. We know that for anything to exist, it must occupy in the physical plane, three dimensions. The fourth dimension is, as one of your more noted intellects con- ceded, that of time. Time exists now in a spherical dimension about your other three dimensions. However, as I mentioned in ay opening words, time existe in « closed frame of reference, in a closed loop. It is a sphere. Now, about this sphere there are many points on its surface. Let us use your planet as an example. Your cities appear at different points upon the surface of a sphere. Now, let us say, you wish to travel between the cities of Los Angeles and New York instan- taneously. What is necessary? Again, contrary to your scientists belief, for they express the purely irrelevant formula of, “distance equals rate tines time," Nothing could be further from the truth. Time, my brothers exists continuously, as a closed sphere. Distance is merely the observers recording of a period of time. For distance to cease to exist we merely have Co accomplish one or two things: Speed up the observers concept of the duration of time, of, as you have a way of expressing it, provide @ short-cut through time. Let me state this; time is a spherical condition. All of you are not in the same reference of time as you were one minute ago, fiveee a aires tae ee for Sas nena a 118 CHAPTER FIVE minutes ago or fifteen minutes ago. If I, as the observer, were to look upon you at those moments, you would be complete entities existing at that particular instant of time. The complete entity existing in the next instant of time would not be exactly the same as that I witnessed first, If I looked again an instant later, I would see neither of the first two, but a third and still different entity. Each instant of existence, my brothers, you exist in what we shall call parallel fields of probability. There are possibly, to use your figures, trillions upon trillions of slightly different versions of yourself existing in the cosmic meaning at this moment. This applies to all of you, and to myself. Perhaps you think I have digressed. Ihave not. This was mevely the foundation, the showing of, shall we say, the background of this Little experiment The circle you have inscribed in the upper left-hand corner of your piece of paper, Let that represent your present location. If you will draw a circle in the center of your paper and shade it also, let this circle represent the planet Mars for instance. How do we get from one point to another? Let us say that the spacing between your two circles is distance. You can progress, such as your people normally do, by traversing increments of a cime vector, inching your way across that known as distance, which is merely an accumulation of such time increments. Let me suggest that you grasp the upper left-hand corner of your paper between thumb and forefinger, and fold the paper over, bringing your circle adjacent to the one you placed in the center of the paper representing the planet Mars. At this point I will ask a question. "In doing this, what have we accomplished? What have we eliminated?” We have eliminated distance, obviously, by moving a point (or object) along the spherical curve of times’ dimension plane rather than travers= ing along a path of time vector increments in a three dimensional frame of reality. I will make a statement at this point, my brothers and sisters. Any- thing that is capable of being conceived in thought by an expression of consciousness, is capable of being manifested. ‘Time exists in the cosmic meaning because it is a dimension. It should be no more mysterious than the three dimensions of physical reality which you are so intimately acquainted with, and yet it has presented a nystety. Tine, or distance, as you presently think of it, exists only in the brain thinking of a limited (unaware) three dimensional concept of reality. The Mind is an observer of fourth dimensional time planes. And, the Mind is not the brain. When you envision an occur rence or an event in your Mind you do not consider the factor of dis~ tance, Therefore, you have mentally traveled in tine Depending upon the observers focus, the event could have occurred in what you call the past. If it is yet to occur, you call it a glimpse of the future. Truly, it was a glimpse of the future, Remember, there is no word in the cosmic meaning called imagination. However, there is that which is known as an dnagination concept. If it can be conceived, it is in reality. You cannot conceive of something which does not exist.CHAPTER FIVE 119 By folding your Little piece of paper, you transcended the limited idea of distance. You eliminated that idea known as distance as easily as you will shortly be able to eliminate that which you presently know as time. | I trust that this explanation will cause your Tensor Equation to be more meaningful to all of you. I would ask you humbly to think about what T have brought to your attention. I shall speak further upon this subject in the future. Adonai, my brothers. I am Soltec. Adonai. Korton here. It has been mentioned that more material would be pro vided for your future efforts in presenting our thoughts. After the transcription of this Tensor Equation, and our brother Soltec's explane- tions, after its review and after we have again inserted any other of our remarks to clarify ite meanings, you will have the basis for sone of a forthcoming new series of talks (The Tensor Concepts). I can assure you we will attempt to bring a true concept of truth, which embraces all things. We shall even have our scholars assist you in the formation and application of this knowledge. Your work, ny brothers and sisters, has only begun. You will find that there is no "time." You will all, I observe, be too busy to recognize it. Adonai, ny brothers, until we speak again. I am Korton. we R RR "DISEASE AND THE HEALING DEVICE" November 2, 1958 By: Lalur Greetings in the "Light of Our Infinite One. I am Korton. I would present one who could be called in your terminology, Dr. Lalur. You will recall my mentioning you would hear from this one. ne monent please. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Infinite One. I am Lalur. It is my intent to speak on the subject of healing. This field of endeavor, my brothers, is one which consumed many, many periods of time in our evolution, We, as you have been informed, have very little need in our present time for a medical profession, except in our exploratory craft when new and alien life forms are encountered. How this came about, how we vere able to overcome that known as (1) disease, and (2) the decay and physical aging of the human body, I would like to discuss. First, if T may be permitted, I would lay some preparatory ground work. In our early encounters with that known as disease, one paraneter always vas recorded on our charts in measuring the emanations about the physical body. Disease, in the many various forms which it can take,120 CHAPTER FIVE steates primarily a state of electro-chemical unbalance in the primary life force of an entity. By unbalance, I would use as an example one of your primary diseases, that known to you as cancer. In cancer, you have noted what may be classically called "a cell gone wild." All of your medical world have attempted to explain the erratic behavior of cancerous cells. It is what you would call a disease common to your present state of evolution. It is a mutant disease, one which could not have had its awareness in the cosmic meaning prior to a certain stage of evolution occurring upon your planet. I shall not explore fully all of the background concerning the reasons for mutation of cells, nor of what happens to the electron and proton, particularly the mutated nuclei of a cellular atom. I will merely mention that the normal cell electron departs from its polar orbit on an erratic course, caused by the bombardment of what is known to your peoples as cosmic radiation. It, my brothers, requires high energy particles to knock an electYon from its orbit. This electron searches for a new state of balance in an adjoining atom. When it joins this atom, a change occurs. Your bodies are living examples of atomic fission and fusion. Now we Know that disease is an unbalanced condition of an electro- chemical nature. How do ve rectify this? How do ve restore balance to a diseased organism? This is the problem facing your world. Before I attempt an answer, let us talk for a moment about age. The classical theory, popular amongst your peoples, is that tissues lose their vitality in the sunset of that known as physical life, due to an electro-chemical reaction taking place in the cells -- popularly speaking, a slowing down of chat dynamo known as a cellular atom. Classically speaking, @ slowing down of orbital velocities, Naturally, the tissue involved withers and wrinkles. The very essence of life carried through out your bodies by your circulatory system is constantly supplying fresh atomic fuel to be burned in your body furnace. Again, we have a problem, that of adjusting the balance of body chemistry and electronics. Perhaps I have over-simplified to a great degree the ramifications involved in all forus of diseases, and very broadly speaking, the aging Process. Let me now mention what can be done to (1) eradicate disease entirely from the human race, and (2) to arrest that known as the aging process at any given age desired. You have a statement, a classic, I am informed, that says you will "Eight fire with fire." In this case we will fight radiation damage to cellular atoms with radiation. You are aware, ny brother of the medical profession, as well as several present in your midst, that experiments have been tried in your great schools of learning with the effects that various colored lights have upon living substance. It is true, vegeta~ tion is the primary study involved at your present level and time. Ger- tain plants when exposed to radiation of a particular color frequency exhibit unusual growth characteristics. They mature earlier. Should they be a fruit bearing plant the fruit is greater in size, it is more palatable to your taste. In every way the vegetation responds to a frequency of color vibration. All of you are aware that the range of the human vision spans only several octaves of what is called the light spectrum of frequency vibration, It is measured in angstrom units, The eye sees very little ofCHAPTER FIVE 121 the entire magnetic spectrum. What lies beyond the range of hunan vision at its shortest wave length known as ultraviolet? A serious gap, a most serious gap exists between the far ultraviolet and that known as X-radiation. None of your physicists have examined this gap for the unique properties inherent in this part of the spectrum. The far ultra-violet and beyond, though higher in frequency than that known as X-rays, gama, alpha and beta radiations which, you have noted, have destructive tendencies on cellular tissue, to still far shorter radiation unmeasurable at present in your technology. We find that radiation performs in its many different and strange ways. Let us start, for example, with that known as sound. Some sounds, you have noted, are pleasant to your sense organs while others cause disagree- able sensations. We cannot say that since some sounds create an unplea~ sant sensation that all sounds are unpleasant, nor can we say that all forms of radiation, such as X, and alpha, and gamma aré bad for the reason that they cause destruction of living tissue. You will find in examining what is known as the electro-magnetic spectrum, periods of reoccurrence of radiations conducive and pleasant and stimulating to the human organism, and those that are the opposite. So it is logical to expect that beyond the shortest radiations known to your present technology there lies 2 certain range of beneficial radiation frequencies. Through our many, many periods of time exploring the effects of radiations upon the physical body, we have made several interest ing notes. Let me first make a statement. This your evening, you are all being exposed to radiation. Radiations from your local radio broadcasting stations are passing through your bodies at this moment with little or no effect. At the same instant, however, cosmic radiation passing through your planets ionosphere is wrecking havoc upon the electronic balance of your neuro cells. One with no affect, the other totally destructive. ‘The answer, my brothers, to your classical problem is that in order to abolish that known as disease, we restore balance to the physical body, electrically and chemically. We employ several different forns of radiation, entirely unknown to your present technology. Now, for the benefit of the medical doctor in your midst, should there be questions more imminent in this one's mind, may I be of some service? Doctoa (visiting us on this occasion): We have found a rhythnic impulse persisting throughout life within the cranium. The normal cycle is from ten to fourteen per minute. We have found this increased in fevers, de- creased in mental conditions, varying with other disease conditions. We do not know what it is. We think it is due to a fluctuant cycle in the cerebrospinal fluid which controls the metabolism of the brain and central nervous system and, therefore, the vhole body. We feel it is, in a sense, the highest known element in the human body, possibly our link with our Creator. We would like to know, because of the significance of this fluc~ tuant wave or cycle, because of its possible diagnostic and prognostic value, we would like to know how it can be recorded on an instrument acceptable to the scientific world, usable by any and all physicians. We122 CHAPTER FIVE feel ie would be a tremendous advance in the study of and prevention of disease, Latur: Your question is noted, my doctor. May I ask one further ques~ tion before answering. What type of read-out of data do you prefer? By this I mean, do you wish this recordable in the forn of a strip chart, or do you wish it in photographic form, do you wish it in written form, in digital form? What, ay brother, do you desire? Pocter: Whatever form would be simply and easily read. We have considered two types; one photographic, with the visible recording on the tape, and the other an electronic device with a similar record, but we still are not well enough acquainted with the problem involved and how best to record it, to state definitely what type we would prefer. Latut; In answer to your question I would make the following statement. Such a device as you have requested is quite within the realm of poss: bility. In fact, it is in existence among our people. You will, per haps, think that we who reside in a more unique portion of space are somewhat bold, but I will state this. The vibrations, my brother, received from your mind this your evening, are in attune. They have been Passed upon by those of our people qualified to judge and interpret a specific type of individual. You are welcomed to our presence. Such a device as you desire, capable of portraying the information you desize, will be described in detail upon the occasion of your next visit to this group. Whenever you can arrange to be present again, we will describe such an apparatus to you and work with you until it is com pleted. 4nd may I be so bold as to carry your thoughts one step further, and mention this. We would be most pleased to also instruct you with the aid of this same device, in a corrective procedure to speed up the fluid's motion to the point where all symptoms would disappear, and a cause be instituted to initiate corrective action. I would ask you, my brother, will you consent to joining this group again? Doctor: By all means, Lafuts I trust you will appreciate our reason in wanting you to voice your answer. It will take us some time to determine which materials upon your planet are suitable. Let us say that at the end of a period approximately four of your weeks hence, through the channel used at this present moment, we will advise the readiness of this material for your reception. I trust that we can be of still greater assistance in the future to your endeavors and those with whom you associate. Adonai, my brothers. It has been my privilege to address you. trust it will not be the last. I am known as Lalur, Adonai. May Our Radiant One's "Light" be with all of you.CHAPTER FIVE 123 Koxton: Korton here. I believe, my brothers, you have enough at hand. Therefore, lest there be further enquiry, we shall discontinue. Cycor: May I inquire if the proposed research foundation that we have under contemplation, my own contribution and my own work, if this device can be developed through the resources of that foundation as well as the foundation work that we have planned to make available through the Doc- tor's teaching foundation? Koaton: Me have no objections to these thoughts providing that one thing be understood. This device cannot be used to produce a monetary profit. Tt is to be used solely for the treatment of the items mentioned. How- ever, remuneration for your time and your initial expense is permissible, providing it is reasonable. In cases where those to be treated do not have the necessary funds, let us say, to meet the expense involved, I would suggest the treatments be given as a gift of your gratitude to the Radiant One, 1 trust this answers your question. Cycot: I think it would be well within the scope of all of our foundation's research, that we follow at all times the suggestions and provisions which you have just recited. I think our guest of the evening and his life work is evidence of his desire to make possible benefits to humanity such as are not available to us at the present time. Koxton: My grateful appreciation to all present for again allowing us the privilege of this communication. I will now discontinue. May Our Radiant One's "Light" be with all of you. Adonai, my brothers. I am Korton.126 CHAPTER SIX “A PROBABILITY LEGEND" November 28, 1958. By: Zolgus Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton. It is again our great privilege to speak with all of you. We have the opportunity to present Zolgus who would be called the head of one of our Survey Teams. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One, I am Zolgus. It is ny purpose in speaking at this, your time, to describe a survey flight that could take place, according to our knowledge, in what is termed a possible future. Among many devices at our disposal there is one known as a Krono- tron. Let us say that we have experienced the ability to project into future probabilities and witness evolutions yet to be born. This, my brothers, aids the Galactic Survey in a nunber of obvious ways. 1 shall, therefore, relate the experience of a possible survey in which I may have the opportunity to direct the research. I trust that in this talk there will be born in your awareness an illuminating truth. It is in the future that this Galactic Survey reaches a remote corner of a galaxy, A system from which, it has been rumored, great Ones looked from the confines of a planet and stepped over the boundaries imposed by space and time to reach to the object of their consciousness, to the remote depth of a galaxy and beyond to a universe. ‘This corner of a galaxy has a great deal of historical interest for we of the Confederation. There ace many rumors prevalent among our peoples, many myths, that at one time as the histories speak, there was a Little-known planet, the third of this particular waning Sua, that played a great cosmic role in the destiny of our Confederation. Upon the occasion, our craft descends through an atmosphere which sparkles with a radiance of blue-white intensity, and beneath the sun's rays we look from our height and see the rolling sphere of a mst unique planet. Everywhere that we gaze, ve see mighty marches of the forest coating this one in a shroud of emerald green, As we slowly leave this one's atmosphere we circle its circumference, utilizing our scanners for possible traces of life of any sort. ‘The first moment of surprise is upon us, for unlike most bodies that t, our scanners register a complete absence of life. Slowly, as we orbit about this one, now at a lower altitude, we view the remains of what it appears were once mighty areas of habitation. We see that according to known progressions of planetary evolution that the ones who were residents upon this planet at one time followed the general pattern ofCHAPTER SIX 125 ‘building their citadels of civilization, first, upon the shores of their mightiest oceans, But this is not our primary interest, We are here to investigate a legend and so we descend. Our choice is in the midwestern section of one of the large land masses. It is relatively barren except for the rolling terrain. Lt is night on this side of the planet. Our craft gently comes to rest on the surface of this one. As certain portions of our ship's hull dilate, we receive a first sample of this one's atmosphere. It has about it a certain caressing influence upon our senses. We sense here the peace and quietness of a true desertion, of a solitude born through centuries of time. As we leave our craft, my colleagues note a lushness of vegetation about us. In the heavens a single satellite glows with the light of a Flaming sun, casting a silvery glow upon the landscape. it is silhou- etted in a sheath of silver as is the forest about us, and all is quiet. There are no sounds of insects nor creatures of the night. The silence is absolute for even the winds are stilled. It is our decision after conferring with one another that we should wait until the daylight before carrying out our mission of exploration. And so it is, that as the darkness turns to gray, the great huge orange-gold orb of this one's sun clinbs steadily over the eastern horizon. The skies become alive with streaners of multicolored hues. The clouds seem to dance upon an azure ocean. The velvet of the grasses stix with a faint breath of the morning breeze which suddenly springs up about us. Our gaze becomes fastened upon high cliffs to our right; there we see the handivork of that which we term civilization, could produce. We gaze with wonderment and then excitement, for vhat our eyes behold are four graven images carved out of a living mountain. Our scout craft rapidly maneuvers us closer to this one and we exam ine with minute detail the carvings of faces on the cliff, These ones could have been a race of giants for such is the scale of this sculp- ture. These faces wear a look of benign dignity. Around the deeply etched Lines we see traces of humor, we see those lines which come from sorrow, and yet there is a certain majesty in this work that we behold. ‘The next several of our cycles upon this one, we spend in examin ing the terrain which is relatively barren and we decide that our ini tial landing was not in the most favorable location. So we again board our craft, and lifting into the atmosphere we proceed in an easterly direction. ‘As we pass, we become aware of the remnants of what, at one time, must have been broad avenues Lined with a type of rock material. These vestages of ancient approaches and ways evidently formed the means of interconnection between various population centers we pass over. We see rank upon rank of marching forests and here and there our eyes are greeted by little lakes and large bodies of water. From this distance @ certain land area looks almost like a huge hand, palm upwards. We cross with sudden avareness a mighty river dividing this particular continent. We move more to the east, and as we do so, we see even more signs that here places of habitation were concentrated.126 CHAPTER SIX Finally, we arrive on this continent's eastern shores and gaze, with somewhat a feeling of awe, upon the remnants of what had once been a tremendously large city. ‘As we descend, we see what is evidently a large forested avea in the middle of this city, which we determine is built upon a nase of solid granite rock. As our craft again touches down, we scout outwards through the brambles of this overgrown area and see the rennants of structures crumbling with the decay of tine Our primary effort now is to see what evidences these ones left behind. We see huge depressions scattered about this.one as if a giant had taken bites out of the surface of this land. The ruins are not pro~ nounced in such devastated areas. We examine the structures. Something of great heat was used here, for ve find the natural soil turned into a substance not unlike glass. We examine further. We comé to a great avenue, and as we walk slowly down the deserted ways, in the heart of this ancient metropolis, we come to the meeting of three other avenues and we look up and about us. All that remains are the skeletons of once mighty edifices; so our teams start the labor of excavation. We burrow through the silt of centuries and our machines stunble across many interesting artifacts; among then a type of vehicle, this made evidently for the transport of beings much like ourselves. The contour of their interior denotes a manlike shape. The mechanics in~ volved appear to be little beyond the elementary stage. Our special ists determine that here raw substances were consumed in a type of com pression device and our firet thoughts were how greatly inefficient the devices appeared to be. Everywhere we gazed we came across devices which led us to believe that perhaps these people were more barbaric than civilized. We saw forms of objects which were evidently meant to hold a manlike body in various positions such as sitting or lying down. But how these ones could experience comfort in such devices led us to wonder that perhaps they were instruments of torture. Everywhere we gazed we saw the blank look of eyeless structures throwing our words back in resounding echoes. Yet, as our teams un~ earthed the remains of ancient libraries and our translators set to work, we found that these ones had a grasp of elementary science and culture. ‘Their Literature, particularly, fascinated us; for among several ancient compilations of some tissue-like substance and which was written upon with some black stain, we found great and noble words ascribing to the perfection of man and his ideals. Our hopes were raised when later our teans uncovered other structures upon which words of similar charac ter had been inscribed, These ones, no doubt, did have the first glin- mering of what a race could evolve into given the opportunity. The work was long and so our call echoed back through the galaxy. More teams of our people arrived and we left to further look about this one. We found, after several months, what appeared to be a seat of gov ernment upon this land continent. Thie area was evidently laid out by one who had some knowledge of planetary configurations, for such was the design, Here, in our many wanderings and diggings, we found the renains of what seemed truly words of great wisdom.CHAPTER SIX 127 Upon one fragmented structure, meant to hold a manlike form, at the vase were inscribed certain words: "For the people” and as we cleared avay nore debris, "of God and country," and "nation indivisible." We found our avareness begin to perceive that perhaps we were not alone; that maybe the entities of this long departed race still hovered about this seat of their authority. All of us were experiencing certain degrees of what would be termed in our Language, irrationality. One of our crew had to be severely rep- rimanded for actually becoming attached to a piece of sone form of fab- rie, not large, but upon which was emblazed a rectangle and upon which was represented five-pointed configurations in a field of flowing colors a fanciful piece, one which would make an attractive artifact for our nuseun. Later our craft explored all the continents stretching to the south of this one. Here, we found signs of great poverty; a civilization not nearly ao advanced as those of the north except, again, on the seaboards. Across an ocean, we found a continent where evidently great strife had ensued. Everywhere we Looked the sane deep depressions were scooped from this One's surface. Cities were fused into glase. Among the writings and inscriptions, we were able to determine that these ones had discovered elementary forms of atomic energy. But, it appears, they did not know the dangers involved in its use. ‘A great find was made in what appeared to be an institution of great learning upon the western seaboard of the first continent visited. Here, in the ruins, we found records of early attempts to harness the pover of the atom, Here, ve found that anong those who worked to complete this chore, there were sone who had the vision to foresee the end results, This result evidently was like a nova occurring in the depths of space. No doubt, according to our sociologists, this planet swarmed with teeming multitudes of this race. These ones had evidently known the truth but, no doubt, ignored it. We found evidences, here and there about this one, of the remants of these one's feeble groping outwards into space. We looked at crude sketches of what appeared to be types of space vehicles. It was a pity, and perhaps fortunate that they never had the opportunity to actually attempt distant travel in such devices, as no doubt the consequences. would have been beyond their scope of understanding. Yet, for all the limitations present and the narrowness of what appeared to have been a national consciousness, upon all of the continents surveyed, these ones did have unique qualities. What appears to us as perhaps forms of invisible madness proved to be the workings of an undeniable drive. We found in ancient records, that here and there about the circumference of this one, were races that bubbled over with the gaiety and the sheer joy of living. We found that, in their works of art. These ones expressed a form of illumination which in many instances would have served to catapult them into the universe and from these, perhaps our greatest discovery was made, In two locations, we found evidences of what appeared to be successful launchings of vehicles capable128 CHAPTER SIX of space travel. In the middle of the original continent visited, high in the mountains, we found a lonely secluded valley where a type of power generat ing equipment was present that was far beyond the concept we viewed elsewhere about this planet. We found drawings of eraft not too dis- similar from the one we arrived in. Again, in the desert to the west of a fringe of low hills we found similar apparatus which to our utter astonishment was, as our chief scientific advisor indicated, a type of communication apparatus capable of probing and communicating through the depths of the galaxy. We found here, to our great consternation and amazenent, apparatus similar to that found on a planet investigated earlier, known as Mars. As we pondered this question of the evident awareness of some of these people of the things beyond their planet, and the coincidence of advanced technology present on this one and much in evidence upon some other planets in this remote Solar Systen. The report transmitted back to the Universal Tribunal of our efforts 6 such that our original crew was asked to return and relate our findings. So it was that in the legends of antiquity, we could presume that from this little known coxner of the universe perhaps came the forerunner of a race that eventually melted into the early annals of universal history. Our thoughts and communicators pulsated and flared in radiations of Light as this intelligence was transmitted back to the Tribunal. We felt as if about these chambers still greater writings shone forth. The very ether, itself, seemed to nod an affirmative Now, my brothers, the Kronotron looks no further but, in turn, pivots upon its axis and restores our vision to the relative present. We stand amidst our brothers, our people. From the dim one, whose sands glisten with red on a high plateau, looking over a scarlet valley, we turn our thoughts again te our brothers sitting at the controls from which these thoughts have been carried to your beings. It was my humble privilege to have been able to conduct all of you into a probable reality that could yet happen. Perhaps some of you will recognize the sign posts and markers along time's highway. It has been my privilege to speak to all of you and I shall again welcome the opportunity. Korton bids his farewell also. In Our Radiant One's "Light," adonai I am Zolgus.CHAPTER SIX 129 "A QUESTION & ANSWER EXCHANGE" November 29, 1958 By: Lalur, Mon-Ka, Oxoh Keaton: Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Kortoa. The first to converse will be Dr. Lalur. ne moment, please. Latur: Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Lalur. I would at this time talk with our brother regarding the little device. T have noted several comments already that would be of great interest, also several problems. My good brother, you have had an opportunity now to receive our thoughts. We would ask for your questions. Doctor H: First, I want to express my most sincere appreciation for the detail in which this has been given. There are many questions which ‘cone to mind, probably mattere of ignorance on my part, matters which, through Richard, can be settled later. In order not to take too much time, however, may I ask just @ few? This thing which we have felt manually and thought to be a fluid fluctuation of some kind, am I correct in thinking, in the light of what you have revealed, that it is merely the gross manifestation of the disturbances in the neuronie frequencies which you speak about? Latut: My good brother, to answer your queries I must first state that our young friend and yourself are entirely correct as far as you proceed, but let me clarify a point. The rhythms you detect through your sense of touch are a result of, as you have presuned, the cerebro-spinal fluid. This, however, is set in motion by the frequency disturbances coming from the unbalanced portions of these beings, much in the same way ~~ let us use an analogy -- of heat being applied to a vessel containing the liquid water. The heat, in this instance, represents the frequencies we speak of, As the water becomes heated, it begins to boil. Let us say its rate of vibration is increased, and as it increases it gradually starts to ascend. Is this correct? Doctok M: Do I understand you to say that there is not normally present in every individual this same phenomenon at, shall we say, a normal rate or frequency? Latur: You are quite correct, my brother. I take your earlier statenents that in cases of depression the rhythm of the fluid appears weak. whereas under conditions of excess body temperature, known in your term inology as fever, the cerebral fluid exhibits great agitation, or rhytha. The analogy is in its similarity. Pocton M: In what other conditions might ve look for a marked change?130 CHAPTER SIX Latur: You might under conditions where injuries to the being do not normally appear as, shall we say, easily located symptoms. Let us take the example you mentioned earlier, This case, to your trained eye, vas readily apparent. To, perhaps, another of the medical profession, it would have required many hours of time-consuming laboratory measurements. Let us say the symptoms that are not readily apparent, such as the original change of the perpendicular axis of the intercanals of your hearing organs, would not be detectable to eyes not trained to note them. Doctor il: Do you think, then, that the guess I made about the condition mentioned is reasonably correct? Laut: Ie ie more than reasonable, my brother, it is a fact. Let us say it is one of the other espects we have not mentioned earlier. Doctor HM: What, in your thinking, would be the best method to use this apparatus for the good of humanity? Lafut: You ask a question, my brother, which I could spend many hours discussing. But briefly, it should be made available for the use of all humanity. Let me summarize: Wherever a human being suffers any disorder whatsoever, it is not only our desire, but it is the individual's right to be alleviated of torment. Doctor H: There are many more questions I might ask. Again, let me thank you from the bottom of my heart for this help, and may I seek your assurance that whatever further help we need may be forthcoming through ny good friend here? Latur: It is our desire, it is our duty, it is the desire of our young friend, to be of whatever assistance we may. We shall always be indebted to the people of your planet. This you may find strange, but there were times, ay brother, in the remoteness of your past when the planet you re~ side upon contributed several gifts of outstanding value to all civilizations in this, our universe. Do not move your heads in wonderment. It is true. Why do you think we have come back to aid your planet? Why do We state our gratitude? It is obvious. Among MAN populating the habitable universe, there are brothers of earth. We shall be honored and privileged to fulfill our obligations, to assist humankind from not only this, let us say, our moral standpoint, but also under the direct instruc~ tions of The Radiant One that breathes the universe into existence. I trust T have answered your question and perhaps clarified a thought pre— sented your previous evening. We are again privileged. 1 shall communicate at any time you desire more data. When your construction begins, I hope to personally supervise your units. And now, my brothers and sisters, it has been ay privilege. Adonai, ny brothers. I am Lalur.CHAPTER SIX 131 Hon-Ka: Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. 1 am Mon-Ka. First, I would inform your other guest that it is well he is reposing. I will mention, my brother, that your present affliction serves a purpose. Among other things it has accomplished is that you have been given an opportunity to rest and think. Now that you have had this opportunity it is my duty to inform you that it is time for your continued endeavors. My brother Lalur has directed certain energies upon your being since your arrival in order to alleviate your condition as speedily as possible. You will soon be about your mission Therefore, my brother, you may speak from your position. Guest: An I correct in having heard your voices during the past two weeks of what you call my enforced rest period; that the great work that has been made known to ne during the past eighteen months, as to the magnetie research foundation, is now ready to conmence? And, by that commitment, am I to understand that the tine is now here and not to be delayed any further as to all the various phases of what I have under~ stood would take place? Mon-Ka: % should not hesitate to answer your question, my brother, know ing, let us say, that I helped formulate it. Let me state thi It is four great good fortune to have known each other in the past, and even at this moment. We have orked before upon what we like to discuss in our leisure periods, as noble endeavors. Answering your question, indeed my brother, the time is now for all to whos I speak. ‘The mow, however, is only an indication of relativity. The now began the monent you experienced avakening consciousness on your present planet. Let us not speak of time in sequential order. Let us look at time as the period necessary to accomplish an endeavor, to manifest, to bring into being. Your work shall proceed the sane as mine. Your endeavors shall com mence with the regaining of your movement. As the needs arise, and as the occasions warrant, as the timetable so schedules the events, they shall fall into place Like the many pieces of one of your puzzles. Do not worry, you will not be found lacking, nor will you be found short of providence to fulfill your needs. The great spheres of influence, of power, first have to be set in motion. You have enacted one force, you have performed your duties. We cannot stop. We must continue to press on, for as ve pause, there are those vho would step in and attempt to check our movements. There- fore, we continue, for as we expend our talents and energies, they are constantly re-supplied. You have found this to be evident in your past. You know it as a truth. We have discussed it many tines. Let us, a8 you have a way of saying it, put our shoulders to the wheel. You will find those who will aid you. We have assisted our brothers in the past. Bellarian was one exen- ple. In the moment of his great work, he had assistance. You also, my brother, shall be a recipient, along with those who struggle to aid Our Radiant One's plan, of the great resources ever present, merely waiting132 CHAPTER SEX to be supplied. You may proceed Guest: I think you understand, Mon-Ka. I have pondered many times over the question as to how I, a simple human being among sone two billion on this earth, could be judged by you and your associates as capable of doing this great work, I have no way of expressing to you my sincere appreciation of what you have said. T cannot help but ask you how, in your judgment, can I measure up to. such a responsibility? And in answering that, tell me whether or not this long half-century of training that I have gone through here on this earth, both good and bad, have been for the purpose of my better undertaking this work? Please explain that to me, if you care to do so. Mon-Ka: My brother, I am pleased at your comment. It was known to my awareness, as it was known to yours, that you are upon the planet of your present residence, to fulfill an obligation, a duty, a mission of Breat purpose. It has been long since the days of your early physical childhood, when strange dreans filtered through your awareness and you saw visions which have lasted even to this, your present time, I shared those dreams of yours, as I have with others. It is true your experiences have been many and trying. They have helped to create a certain degree of balance and avareness in your present environment. You are one of our people like many upon the earth. It ig slow returning, this knowledge. You shall fulfill your mission, as they are only given to a few. There are those who can be leaders, and there are those who must be followers. It is a law often overlooked, but nonetheless, a lav. There are those who must lead mankind, who must ever illuminate the path a few steps beyond so that others may see the true nature of their drives and yearnings, the pathway of their destiny. It is our mission, and I speak to all my brothers and sisters whe enter into lives of service. You all serve humanity, each in your own way, by your ovn method and degree of understanding. Think well, my brothers and sisters; you serve not only your fellow man but you serve those with whom you belong. I am proud of my brothers upon the planet earth, I am in great rapport with all of then. And, my brother, never forget the great lesson you have learned As the sands of time trickle through the hourglass, each grain finds its proper place in what builds up from below. Our mission shall proceed. Your missions shall proceed. Rest easily, my brothers and sisters. A force field surrounds you. At this moment there is a force surrounding your present environment capable of deflecting the most powerful nuclear devices your people have discovered. It is like a curtain or an umbrella of energy. You know of the forces that we have spoken of. Surely you know within the innermost core of your beings, if the occasion arises, we can employ them. You have our "Light" to depend on in such statenents. Before I leave, I shall answer one remaining question, and thenCHAPTER SIX 133 there is one who still wishes to speak. Guest: You understand, Non-Ka, I am sure, that I not only hear your voice, as I an doing at this instant, but I feel your presence and that of your brothers and ny brothers. I'am confronted with the problem of hen and how will T see you? Ho ‘Again, my brother, I can answer your query, and I can answer it in a way which will, no doubt, leave your questioning still active. We shall approach you. We shall meet with you. We will sit down and be your guests. But this will occur only as the occasion warrants. Therefore, I cannot be specific, for the very nature of even atoms change from time to time. You, my brother, as well as all of those whom I speak to, shall be in our presence, physically, as you say, but only when the need is there; and, I do not mean the need of your mental desir~ ings. We have stepped into your environment in the past and a8 you know and are aware, we have left on occasion particular objects for your find ing. You will recall such a tine. We have approached your young brother aa the occasion warranted. We communicate as the oceasions warrant. We will again appear as the occasion warrants. We cannot do so before, even though we desire it as much as you, for to anticipate the event Level of consciousness is, as you say, a risky endeavor, We can see trends in your futures, we foresee such meetings. That is vhy ve speak of them. When they occur can be a statenent of relativity, and that only. Never question in your minds the fact that you shell see us. We shall stand in your presence, but it must be at the proper moment. It has been my great privilege to heve spoken with all of you, and I shall be again with you, Now I shall step aside for one to whom we all owe a great and lasting gratitude. Oxoh: Greetings in the "Light" of The Radiant One. I am Oxoh. It is my purpose in spéaking to inform all of those gathered, that in the great purpose of your endeavors, there resides a touch of not only the Eicrocosmic, but the macrocosmic. It has been the undertaking of such beings as I to help protect you from the forces of darkness, 2 dark- nese little known to your present vealities. Upon this occasion, there has glowed upon the foreheads of those to vhon I speak a shining radiance, and even as I speak now, the "Light" of the enlightened beans forth and envelops you. Know that among the aware dwells the spirit of majesty. Know that even in the un-enlightened, there is a spark of Omnipotence. Know that at the pronouncement of the Glund-Oyarsa!s proclamation, there departs from your environment all negativity. You are positive, radiant beings of "Light." From the very auras encir- Gling your beings, there now glows a different "Light" emanation. 1 Pronounce that this is accomplished. I most humbly request you accept the gift you have earned. In the "Light" of Our Radiant One, it is so pronounced. It shall be, Adonai, 0 Radiant One. Adonai, ay brothers and sisters of earth. I am Oxoh.134 CHAPTER SIX Korton: Korton here. Should you desire further information, my brothers, along whichever pathways you pursue upon your morning activities, I shall be available for immediate conference, and may Our Radiant One's "Light" be added to, by that of my being. Now we shall depart. Know, ay brothers, the great "Light" that is yours. Adonai. I am Korton. You may discontinue. "THE CHAMBER OF CREATION" December 31, 1958 By: Korton, Lalur, Esu Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I amKorton. It is our great pleasure on this, the eve of your New Year's activities, to be able to communicate these thoughts to you, our brothers and sisters. For the rendering of these remarks, our good brother Lalur will introduce our Lord Esu to you, One moment, please Lalu: Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Lalur. In describing the thought prevalent this, your evening, I must weave @ canvas of enlightenment. Our canvas must portray the thoughts of our Lord Eeu Clothed as the scene is in the Chamber of Creation, we must realize that the Chamber's walls are the structure of the universe; the ceiling, the length and breadth of galaxies; the carpet, the luminous dust of a million Solar Systems, imparting the faint luminescence of cosmic matter in motion. Seated within this Chauber, the Lords of "Light" rest but for a moment, the reins of destinies lax in their grasp -- a period of reflection == a moment of centuries passes as they meditate, and a breeze stirs the web of universal fabric. The Lords’ attentions are awakened, The arresting motion of a microscopic particle of creation hesitates for an instant. This draws the attention of the Lords. They manipulate the view-sereens of matter, time and space. The dust particle resolves in magnification and swings majestically into the Chamber's confines; an etherial globe, wrapped in misty white clouds; an emerald of green radiance, of soft pastels, claims the attention of all present. A benign look of supreme joy lights the countenance of Lord Esu. The others present note the emanation of intenseness and Esu rises and steps forth from this company. At the flicker of commanding thought, the image of earth pauses in recognition. ‘The briefest interval of time is suddenly expanded into an eternity of joyous rapture as our Lord slowly rotates his ward before the intense gaze of those present, Slowly, slowly, the earth in infinite casualness displays proudly the Creator's lavish attentions. It mists. It deepens in softest shades of violet. It blazes suddenly with the radiance of its noble Sun uponCHAPTER SIX 135 whitened deserts. It portrays the slanting play of many hued shadows across the avesomeness of its mountain ranges, It speaks of eternal mysteries, yet unborn, to the minds of the Lords. Each Lord, in turn, sits as if stunned into silence. Again, Esu's thought flickers through the substance of earth's mat= ter and in seeming joy the earth responds. And, like a delicate petal, seems to dip its colors in acknowledgment and slowly drifts closer, until Eou's arms circle about it. Thus clasped, the earth steadily increases in vibrant radiance. Esu then turned, and with all the expres ion that ageless time can etch upon such a countenance, spoke, first to the assembled gathering. And then, to the children of his charge he addressed the following: Esu: Aeycle hath ended. ‘The wheel turns, but not on any surface. The thought of my Master's eyes bids my statement to those whose eyes reveal noble purpose, to those whose essence clamors for "Light." To uy children, my own, my beloved, I charge of you your missions: Those who hun~ ger shall be fed. Those who strive will have my blessings. Those who transgress the laws shall know the price. The "Light" of Infinitene: abounds. May joys and sorrows be tempered by wisdom bought with experience. Peace unto earth, "Light" unto darkness, fulfillment unto the en- Lightened. Lafur: Thus in the embrace of Lord Eeu, the earth did quiver and thrill, and men shall experience the Divine Love and heritage as proclaimed. And now the "Light" upon our canvas is dimmed as the heavens recede in splen- dors undescribable; and we submit the painting of wisdom, of radiant consciousness, to our brothers of earth, May the radiance of its Sun kiss the atmosphere as earth greets the New Year cycle. Our Love and "Ligh" to my brothers and sisters on earth. Adonai, Zam Lalur. You may discontinue. “EXPLORATION OF THE UNIVERSE" January 31, 1959 By: Mon-Ka Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton, We are again pleased, my brothers and sisters, to be with you. Now one would speak, One moment please. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Mon-Ka. It is again our great privilege, my brothers and sisters, to speak with you this your evening. I am geatified by your degree of appreciation of our efforts to present the series of talks. Let us for a moment discuss this coming series of talks destined for the ears of your peoples.136 CHAPTER six As those among you have already sensed, there is a degree of sublety being employed in this presentation to bring a form of awakening to your peoples’ minds. It is, my brothers and sisters, necessarily a subtle forn of indoctrination for the simple reason that to otherwise approach your people would perhaps prove too disconcerting. In these talks, we will ateempt to shed some light upon a number of informative topics, with the sincere desire that this information will prove a valuable step in the attainnent of that planet, on which you reside, into the greater brotherhood of our Confederation. If I may digress for a few monents, let me speak of MAN, of his attainments, of his destinies. You are perhaps somewhat amazed and sone— what confused by the seemingly humble efforts you are called upon to render in the great cosmic cause that we all experience, but let me point to a few little known thoughts that prevail in this huge enterprise in which we all take part. First, let us look at your planet and its coming place in the Confed- eration. As has been implied, the mere presence of your planet in our universal form of life and government, itself, is the simplest of things to attain. The dealings, however, with your peoples, once this univer= sal citizenship is granted is, as you have a way of stating it, a horse of a different color. For you see, my brothers, one of the grants or conditions of your citizenship would be the freedom of the stars. Your Peoples would be free to embark for any destination within the areas of space governed by our Confederation. There would be no barriers. Your Peoples could come and go, either upon our craft or those which you will manufacture for such purposes Can you imagine, momentarily, the blow first of all to be experienced in the minds of your public, the realization that they are not alone in the universe? Such a blow to the egos of ones so self-centered could be @ powerful shock. But, further, visualize the effects of, let us say, Ehe Jones family down the block setting foot upon the planet of Procyon. How would these people react? Would they conduct themselves in euch a Way 48 to cause them ennoblement in the eyes of their hosts, or would it be beyond the realm of fact to visualize them displaying themselves in a way similar to that witnessed when they travel to varfous countries upon your planet's surface? I believe you can visualize what I am driving at. Therefore, before citizenship can be granted your peoples will have to experience a great change in their modes of thought; in their deport- ment; and a degree of sociological awareness will have to be ingrained into the very essence of their being, Otherwise, I do not believe you would have much trouble in visualizing the results. These pertinent facts, of course, enter the thoughts of all who con- template the various problems of earth's acceptance. But these, my brothers, are merely problems, and there are solutions to all of them. Some can be solved inmediately, others will require certain lapses of time, still others -- who can say how long. Therefore, the educational Programs scheduled for unfoldment before the minds and thoughts of your Peoples will, of necessity, be extremely intense, ‘Does the thought pass through your thinking as to why the earth isCHAPTER SIX 137 1 such a problem? Surely in all the years of the Confederation, similar circumstances must have developed. Other planets must have been threat ened. Other decisions similar to this one errived at and solved. Would you think it strange if I made this statement, that in the past this has occurred, but was more easily solved? That of all the planets, yours remains unique. But why? The answer to that question has caused some of our great est cultural experts and psychological people to do their most profound thinking. Why does your planet represent such an enigna in this universe? Perhaps, my brothers, the answer lies in the histories of our very roots. Perhaps in ages long distant in the memories of MAN, the earth played some prominent role. Who can say, except that in this, our present time, we do face this unique problem, and we do with all degrees of sincerity hunbly ask your assistance in aiding our people in this cause of enlightenment, You have shown determination and willingness and beyond that, you have all shown perhaps one of the most important qualities that MAN ean acquire, that of devotion. Devotion, not only to yourselves primarily, but in the efforts in which you willingly devote yourselves to bring them into the fullness of reality. For this kind of assistance, we are truly grateful. One fact, my brothers, that was never expressed to your people and not previously to those to whom I speak, is the following: We have made | the statement that in over 20 mega-trillions of your years of our travels through what is known as space, ve have never found what could be properly termed the end of creation. Does this perhaps explain why even today our craft still prowl the uttermost reaches of what is known as universe, looking and seeking. You would think in the length of time mentioned, that the occupation would lose some of its enthusiasm. The search, though, must continue, for out there beyond the cold white stars there lies a greater destiny for MAN. T have sat in what you would call my study, and I have gazed at sights portrayed on the vision screens which line one wall. I have seen the Light of suns and stars that would take another million years to become | visible to the unaided eye of MAN, light from billions upon billions of j galaxies, and it also discloses the presence of MAN in those galaxies. / It makes us appear rather insignificant, does it not? It makes us wonder at the almost infinitesimal place in space and time that we occupy. But most of all it brings to the minds of the enlightened, the realization that we have merely seen the approaching davn, that Mankind has merely left the womb and has yet to grow and mature. And even though our minds be occupied by the pressing affairs of our daily lives, occa~ sionally it does us goed to stop and consider; where are we ~~ what are we doing -- what have we done -- what is there still left to do? And then, perhaps, the greatest gift that MAN has within his being cones into the play -~ the driving knowledge that someday and sometine his conscious~ ness will have traveled that infinite distance; that his being will have experienced all that there is to experience; and, that someday he will stand in the presence of The Radiant One. Think, ay brothers and sisters. The road indeed appears to stretch outwards into the infinite. In the Light of this, the presence of our138 CHAPTER stx being in this divine painting signifies that there is purpose, that we each have our part to contribute. And if, in the length of time experi enced in our mortal existences, we can contribute to this painting, then we have done all that we could do. We could then live happily with the thoughts that in the next Life experience to shortly arrive, we will see a little more, experience a little more, and live for that supreme moment in eternity when we take the position of standing in The Presence. It is the heritage and privilege of MAN te dream dreams. For if we only knew it, perhaps it is the fabric of MAN's dreans which beckon him onward through the eternities of evolution, Perhaps this little tour of mental exhilaration has proved enlightening, and perhaps, stimulating. Now let us return from our voyages in thought, and examine that which is more in the reality of the moment. We see oux representatives upon many lonely planets, striving to do that which is the only knowable, the only verity of consciousness -- the bringing of enlightenment. Our efforts do have meaning. Your efforts do show results and purpose. We are truly grateful. Soon, as my brother Hatonn would state, ve shall have the honor and privilege of greeting you and of sharing in greater intimacy the common trait of reminiscing about these things. On our next speaking, I shall be pleased to bring to your awareness a little story, an incident which oceurred upon your planet years ago, and vhich has its ending in your present day. I trust you will find it interesting. And now, I offer you my admiration, my wholehearted support, and impatience to see you on your way. I amas interested as you to see how our joint efforts turn out. Until our next speaking, then, may Our Radiant One's "Light" be with all of you. Adonai, my brothers, it has again been my privilege. I am Mon-Ka, tee "ADVICE TO THE GROUP" March 7, 1959 By: Mon-Ka Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton. One moment please. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Mon-Ka. It is again our great privilege to speak with all of you. First, I would welcome you to this place of gathering in your hills. As your young friend has expressed to you previously, you are at one of the locations for the disembarking of our people. Let me state the reason for your present excursion is that during the hours of this, your night, a new type of force is going to be transmitted to all of you. This will be administered during your night of sleep. It was necessary to have all of youCHAPTER SIX 139 in an environment relatively free of any disturbing elements in order to bring this about. Therefore, you shall find on awakening on your coming morn a new sense of accomplishment, and perhaps a new ability. So much for our reasons for having you here now. Let me express that we are greatly pleased with your acconplishnents even under what is known to be trying circumstances. This little experience shall prove most restful for all of you. In our efforts we have investigated many possible approaches to many problems. Therefore, let me state that at this moment our plans may change rather rapidly. 1 would suggest that all of you spend as much time as possible in your come ing weeks away from the environment of your city. ‘There is a reason behind my request. Your contemplated excursion to visit the northern regions of your state are in order. You will find, my brothers, particularly in the next few of your weeks, that conditions will truly appear, as you have a way of stating it, “topsy-turvey." Let me state that this is a general condition affecting most upon your planet. As our brother Soltec vould say, it is a coincidence of two minor cycles. We will communicate the opportune times to continue the transcribing of your radio series. To sit down at random, as has been experienced, is sometimes futile. We shall, in the shortest possible tine, relay for the medium of your broadcasts a different viewpoint and approach to the methods of thought employment and stimulation for your people. One of them is a subject entitled: "Many valued facts and logic." I believe it will answer a great many questions in your thinking. It will certainly expose all of you and a great many of your people to a new aspect of an old lav of cause and effect. When this talk is delivered, you and your people will have received your next Tensor Equation. This evening, we are a great deal closer to all of you then you realize. Something could happen. It is within the realm of comprehension that all of us, brothers and sisters, are wedded and welded into great brotherhoods of activity and service. Also, remember that in your present awareness you are incapable of controlling environment. However, contrary to certain beliefs, environment has little control over you. The time is fast approaching when our greatest work will be initiated and ite presence felt by your people. It has been stated amongst yourselves that truly these are the passing moments of a great era. ‘This, should the truth be known, is indeed the master understatement. I see that a talk is indicated for your morrow. I would suggest that shortly after your period called lunch, that you again meet. And now, I would recommend your retiring early this, your evening. We would suggest at least eight of your hours to complete our little gift. Should you feel strangely, have no fear. We shall be watching you constantly, and within our breasts, perhaps even our heart beats shall become synchronized. A surprise awaits you on your morrow, Keep your minds clear, Know that we are watching most closely and please forgive the briefness of this conversation. I shall welcome your questions at our next sitting. Te has again been my great privilege. I only wish, and it ie strange that I use that term, you could feel my presence as I feel yours.140 CHAPTER SIX Adonai my brothers, until T speak again. I am Mon-Ka. Vec Yonto, Nictum, Barragus, “THE GALACTIC SURVEY AND PHILOSOPHY” March 8, 1959 By: Soltec Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton. One moment please, one would speak. Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. Iam Soltec. It is seldom that I have the opportunity to speak with all of you. I shall speak, firstly, of what should be called a little background of the Galactic Survey. From the heart of each galaxy many of our craft are dispatched to patrol and analyze the life conditions present on all the planets we encounter. For thousands of years we have inspected and recorded the necessary data to enable MAN's footsteps to spread outwards through what is known as this, our universe. It is the job or the employment ‘of many of our people to undertake this duty. Aboard our survey craft we have many specialists in different fields of activities. These in- elude representatives of all the known sciences, and sometimes our crews, the individual members, know more than one specialized field. In processing the knowledge present and about each habitable environ- mont, we discover many interesting as well as challenging facets of what you call mature. First, let me state that we have certain methods of detailing the very life processes of a planet. In new formed worlds when a planet is barren, a particular mission, in charting this one, will request aid in order to distribute the nec essary vegetation. This helps create an atmosphere, and also the fo- Liage necessary for MAN's environment. After elapsed periods of many centuries of time our survey craft re-visit such planets, recording the new found status, and again making the necessary adjustments prior to MAN's arrival. Within the Confederation there are people who desire to nove onwards and upwards, to colonize and inhabit these new found worlds which have been made ready for their occupancy. Little in the Confedera~ tion is known concerning all of the efforts exerted by the Galactic Sur- vey. But it is a necessary thing, for in this preparation of a planet for the occupancy of MAN, those of the Survey encounter the greatest satisfaction that life can bestow. Just the discussion of this phase could render possible many long talks. In passing on, we note that in the accomplishment of these duties, there cones a tine in the transition of MAN from one planet to another when he encounters those known as the Guardians, sometimes referred to by our people as the Elders. These ones are very similar to the spiritual guardians assigned to the maintenance of surveillance and evolutionCHAPTER SIX 141 upon all planetary bodies, except the Guardians are members of our Gon- federation. These ones establish a lonely vigil throughout the eons of time necessary for MAN's evolution and progression, hovering always just within or just without each of these planets’ atmosphere. Centuries » and the Guardians remain. Their role is to constantly observe ion, and also to communicate with any spacecraft approach— ing such a planet. Before any of our craft are allowed to land on such a planet's surface, they must contact, first of all, the Guardian. It is his word that ue accept whether it fs advisable to land, or to renain aloft. For example, during the period of your last great war, an in- creasingly large number of our people wished to observe some of the causes behind your great conflict. However, the Guardian's refusal to allow our craft to land on your planetary surface meant that these seekers had to observe from the heights by means of vision apparatus. They were not allowed the personal close-ups so many desired. My statement concerning the long lapses of time that these Guardians remain should arouse one thought in your minds -- what of the life span of these ones? You would, perhaps, think it a misstatement of fact if I said that though the Guardians remain 2s long as MAN is present upon a planet, throughout countless thousands of years, they are not immor~ tal. A paradox -- a contrary to fact statenent? I believe not, for this is where we encounter what was briefly mentioned to you in your past day's communication. The “nany valued fact," or more properly, the “quitivalued physics of reality." I would outline this briefly for your thoughts. What is “multivalued physics"? Let me illustrate it in thie manner. When your person, let us say, makes the journey from your present country, the United States, into the country of Mexico, you move in a particular franework of reality. When you enter this other country, how do you observe? You observe and appraise by means of past experiences and cond: tionings within your individual being. You see this new country, this new set of facts, in the light of the old facts you have already known. You retain your old realities and verities. You do not easily accept the new ones you are exposed to. And such, constitutes one of the greatest Limitations present upon your surface in the thinking of your peoples, for nothing is more confounding than this arbitrary limit to their hori- rons. You say to one another, “but surely if facts are contrary to one another, what can we base reality upon, and what becomes of our sciences particularly our physical ones? If fact is not fact, what foundations do we have?" The answer is so simple it is staggering in its concept. The great point to bear in mind is that all facts, all realities, are conditional. It is a verity only in one framework of reality. Fact or reality can be true and indisputable in one framework. It may hold partially true in another, and not at all in another. Let me illustrate this also. In going back and viewing the individual being who has moved from one country to another, and is viewing a new set of facts through the franevork and vision of his preconditioned ones, he has only a two dimensional mathematical symbol. By this, I mean that he is alive and a rei ident of his native country. This is one fact. It is also a fact that he is in @ new and foreign country, and is viewing many new facts through. 142 CHAPTER six the old eyes which have been taught how to view them. Now, let us take the eagle, flying high above this individual and these countries. To him, neither exists, for the eagle is not aware of the facts of our observer. In fact, the eagle is not even aware of the observer if he cannot be seen, and yet all three instances are still fact. You see what I mean vhen I state that realities and facts are conditional. They may apply in one framework, possibly two, perhaps not at all in another. There £ no such théng as an absolute! Bear this in mind, One of the tragedies we witness in the thinking of the people of your planet, one of the great blocks to the imparting of our inform tion, is that many have created a most amazing tool by which to gain understanding; a system of mathematics, a great portrayer of symbolic logic, but man, instead of using this tool to understand MAN, uses it only to attempt to understand the abstract. It has not entered his awareness that mathematics could be employed in the psychological field, in the field of humanities, in poetry. A great gift and tool, com pletely unused. Again I would liken this to a two dimensional being, recognizing only length and width, and not at all cognizant of height. Perhaps, in this crude method of description I have given you all something to think about -- something to aid you in the great works that lie shead. I humbly plead that you examine these words, that you discuss them among yourselves. Try to understand what it is I have stated. This is of the utmost importance. Your mastery, your acceptance of these statements regarding particularly "many valued physics,” and please do not let the words confound you, is of the utmost import. Study them well, mull them about, but believe the statements, there are no absolute facts or realities. There are, however, many frame— works of reality, and facts are conditional. Mon=Ka's absence, this your evening, is due to "naay valued physics." His reappearance upon the scene may depend upon your grasp of what T have spoken. I shall monitor your thoughts. Let us see, my brothers and sisters, ny children, the results, I shall be available for further questioning. Adonai, my brothers and sisters. May Our Radiant One's "Light" be with all of you. I an Soltee. Adonai. eee "THE TRIBUNAL MEETING" March 14, 1959 By: Korton, Sutko, Soltec, Lalur Korton: Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am orton. It is again, my brothers and sisters, our great privilege to speak with all of you and I welcome those in your midst this your evening. T would express my gratitude to Gaoon for so amply eliminating muchCHAPTER SIX 143 detail that I otherwise vould have expressed, This evening, by a special consent of the Solar Tribunal you are to be present in the Council chambers and I shall be your escort. ‘The matter to be discussed, you will soon be aware of. Some of which you may hear will be in the nature of survey reports concerning the planet earch. Now if you shall bear with me for a moment we shall begin our little journey. We are standing, ay brothers, in the great hall of the Tribunal upon the planet you know as Saturn. ‘The Council, represented by one member of each Planetary bedy in this, our Solar System, has been, as you would say, in session for some time, It was thought that at this portion of the proceedings you would be welcome as our guests. As we now enter the great chanber ve shall find our places in the rear third of this great hall. Upon the dias, several hundred feet fron our position, sits the presiding foree of this Tribunal. He is known by the title Kadar. His name is Sutko. We have entered during a brief intermission. In a moment we shall hear this one call the council back into session, ‘Two reports are to be given. I trust you will find these proceedings interesting. If time Allows between speakers, I shall attempt to explain what is occurring. All of the members are now in their place ‘One moment please, Kadar Sutko is rising. Kaden Sutho: Members of the Confederation, I call this Council to order. First, we shall be privileged to hear from our brother from Centauri He, who is known as Soltec, will present us with the results of his recent visit to earth. I would ack all of you, my brothers, to acknowledge this thoughts and I welcome those of you who are new to oux midst. Our brother, if you would be so kind. Kontor Soltec is ascending the steps to the rostrum. One moment. Soltec: Honored Kadar, members of the Confederation. It is indeed my privilege to again have this opportunity to speak with all of you. As is known, I am to report the findings of my recent trip to earth and some of the results obtained. Several weeks ago, I presented a more detailed report to our brothers of the Galactic Gouncil regarding a disturbance of the Solar Constant. At this time, however, I will report upon a survey taken of certain activ~ ities taking place upon earth. It was my opportunity, several of their weeks ago, to have visited several locations within the continent known as North America and the greater part of Russia. ‘The political as well as economic tensions between these two large power groups has not only interested myself but certain members of my staff, Primarily our latest visit was concerned with certain military and political maneuvers currently being undertaken by both of these parties.144 CHAPTER rx Let me state that the political regimes present upon earth represent to our minds a peculiar form of insanity rather than unsanity, the latter referring to a state that is unconscious of the fact. I make this as an open statement for obvious reasons in terms of what we think of as re- tionality. It appears that these two major powers deliberately sought fo create a type of tension between themselves. Indeed two distinct ide= ologies with paradoxically a common meeting point, if they vere not so blind as to see it. One is openly what is termed a police state.- The other, the North American continent, is not far different, The greatest irrational behavior we have had an occasion to observe exists in the political maneuv- erings of these two powers. Their intents are admirably constructed to Prevent any decisive action or attempts at understanding. Yet those who are in command of both factions are mutually in contact with one another; this, unknown to their people. It seems strange, my brothers, that an alliance exists between their leaders while their people are kept in ignorance. to make a recording of these leaders 4: themselves, Tribunal. I took the opportunity cussing certain terns amongst it shall be my privilege to present this infornation to this Such mass delusion is indicative of one thing only. The established privilege of a few -- who demand and expect to retain control of power until the very end, tt is indeed an unfortunate thing that the people of all these nations, for a great many of them are controlled by these two major powers, could be so duped into accepting the misinformation that has been fed them. Therefore, a part of my mission and of my colleagues was to see to it that this information will be placed in the appropriate hands and something done about it. As you, the council, are aware, our representatives upon earth now number in the thousands. Fortunately, a great many of these recognize who and what they are and their roles in the great drama. Certain other aspects of this mass deception are too lengthy to go into at this moment. But, we have examined the weaknesses that are inherent in all such power struggles and it is fortunate that these ones are no more intelligent than they are. I believe, as does my brother Voltra, that we can cause a necessary break in their attention long enough fo not only let them examine thenselves but perhaps, best of all in terms of therapy, let them Laugh at thenselves. It is seldom, my brothers of this Tribunal, that we are allowed to intervene in planetary affairs, and I am grateful for the rulings of the Galactic Tribunal in establishing our privilege in this The earth is indeed a most important place in the great plan, and it is our sacred privilege to guide its footsteps in paths least capable of causing destructive results. I would mention to this Tribunal, as an example of pure idiocy in the highest levels of their government, that at the moment they have con- trived a neatly packaged crisis in @ foreign country across the ocean where one power faction refuses to allow access to another. While in the meantime, their efforts are directed in creating what could be calledCHAPTER SIX 145 @ counter maneuver from an entirely different sector in the continent known as Asia. A mission of our people there have reported great reserves of mili tary potential. I mention this to this Tribunal with one thought in mind. It is clearly evident at this time that the power known as the United States will be the first to unleash a hydrogen nuclear device in any coming conflict. It is, therefore, a part of my task to request of the Tribunal the powers o neutralize all such devices (hydrogen bonbs er warheads) within the possession of both countries. My brothers, it is digficult for some of you to realize and grasp a picture of the naked horror that these devices can create. My thoughts are not adequate to portray euch a scene as those my eyes have witnessed. I therefore request the presence of two Chronomonitors to be stationed in the affected areas for the purpose of neutralizing all such atomic devices. This will create an interesting situation when they find the mightiest form of power known to them suddenly disabled. I therefore present this request to the Tribunal, with the thought in my mind that it be considered in the light of all known factors, and that I be present upon the next gathering to hear your decision. I am privileged for your attention, my brothers. I would prefer now to let another speak who is far more capable of description than myself. It has been my privilege to address you. Kotton: Soltec is resuming his place. Radar Sutko rises and will speak. ‘One moment, Kadar Sutko: Members of the Confederation, what our brother has requested will require the attention and thought of all present. I would suggest ‘three of our coming periods to study the request. Now I would summon one of our brothers attached to a recent earth mission. If you shall be so kind, Lalur. lalur: Honored Kadar, menbers of the Confederation. It is seldom I have the privilege of addressing such en assemblage. Therefore, I ask your indulgence in what may appear to some of you as a rather dry report, perhaps of statistical value only. My purpose in speaking concerns the value of our many contact groups upon the planet earth and some of the reasons we feel this one to be of such importance. All of you know the feeling of beauty the thought of earth creates within our breasts. Never, in all the many missions I have served upon, have I witnessed a planet that contains so much of truly unique and original beauty. All of our survey teans have been captivated, if not enchanted, in their brief stay ‘upon this one's surface. And, even those who were fortunate enough to have flown through their atmosphere have come back with reports of their senses reeling. Such a gem, my brothers of this Tribunal, needs to be preserved. It was ay privilege to have walked with my brother Soltec through the streets of one of their great cities. I might mention I have never experienced a146 CHAPTER s1X more disconcerting experience in my life. The barriers of thought, the feeling present in their great metropolises is almost beyond conception and is most staggering. It took a great deal of mental control upon our parts to walk their streets, for f have never sensed in my life such feeling emanating from the individual inhabitants. It is like walking into a solid object. The force of concussion is great. I mow see vhy the Guardian of this one forbids all, except our special missions, from min~ gling with earth's people. It is indeed an experience many of us could Rot withstand. It is truly one of the most fantastic examples of polar- ized thought I have ever encountered. Amidst the majesty of a truly incomparable land, we find humans that are barely above the evolution of sone of their higher animal species... ++You will pardon my pause, even the memory of it brings certain pain, and yet, it is into this situation that ve have placed great numbers of our people. It is no small wonder that many of them have found their mission go difficult of performance. We had oceasion, my brother and I, to vieit one of their military installations, Xt was a most profound experience. I did not think it possible, even after knowing of the preoccupation the people on this planet have with forces of destruction, to find their young men devoting their time to learning the techniques of combat and war. I paint a rather sad picture of this planet earth, and yet it was with the greatest of joy in our hearts, that within the field of dark= ness enclosing human thought, we did see the results of our agents. They are like little circles of light lost in an ocean of darkness. Yet, they were there and vhat is more important the number of force centers for distributing the "Light" of understanding is growing. There ae three times as many on this occasion, it is told me, than there were on our last mission. We welcome the opportunity of sharing our thoughts with our brothers of earth and with so many of our representatives. It is felt that our efforts to help these ones achieve Confederation status one of our most difficult missions. My brothers, I have served as a member of the Galactic Survey for a period longer than the normal earth human lives. I have visited the planets at the far flung reaches of our galaxy. I have had dealings with ninds difficult to comprehend. I have seen scenery vast beyond most men's imaginations, and yet, the same thought that beats within all our hearts at the mere mention of earth is what makes me believe that these ones are worthy. The greatest problem we have is that of undoing the mental and emotional conditioning exercised on then over the past one hundred of their years, A mighty effort shall be necessary to break not only the condition ing, but the stigma of its results on as yet unborn generations. It is hoped, as horrible ae the thought in its conception is, that in the approaching conflict between their major powers that certain demonstrations ef failures in their hydrogen weapons will bring these ones to their senses.CHAPTER SIX 147 Let them see us so they know they are not alone in the heavens. It is, perhaps, a forceful way that need be adopted at times, Yet the planet earth is the most worthwhile opportunity and challenge that our Confederation has faced since its inception. My brothers, at this time ve number more than six hundred inhabited planets in what we call the great co-alliance of MAN in the universe We have learned many lessons in our contacts, in our evolution, and in even the alien contact groups. And yet with all that we have mastered, the planet earth is the biggest single challenge that we face. Our brother Mon-Ka's remarks concerning this uniqueness, I'm quite sure, portrays to your minds the reasons for this. Therefore, even though it pains me greatly to see even the smallest particle of sand upon earth disturbed, I must ask for your avareness and your granting of ay brother's request of a few moments ago. May Our Radiant One favor us with his continued enlightenment in our handling of these problems as they arise and may we be deserving of the great task laid before us. I thank you, my brothers, for the privilege of sharing these thoughts. Kadar Sutko, I am humbled by this opportunity. Kadar Sutko: Again, my brothers of the Confederation, it seems ve have a great deal to ponder and consider. For the moment, then, we shall re~ cess this portion of our meeting. I trust the monitors present in our group will at some time in their near future be present. I would like to meet them. This session of the Tribunal is now recessed. Korton, if you would be so kind as to escort our guests, I am sure they have much to think about. Korton: My brothers and sisters, I'm pleased that we had the opportun ity of bringing this to your awareness. Now, we shall leave these halls and return to your planet, and T would mention to you that your presence upon this occasion was our hon- or. Before leaving I would pass on to you the warmest regards of our brother Mon-Ka, who patiently avaits the solving of a certain problem in physics. Adonai, my brothers. May the you. ight of Our Radiant One be with we ee148 CHAPTER SLX THE GALACTIC SURVEY REPORTS -- PART-1" March 14, 1959 Solar Cross Tape # 23-1 By: Lalur, Mon-Ka Editor's Comment: These Galactic Survey Reports, submitted from various elements of the Space Confederation are in various categories: These categories are: The Distant Past, The Near Past, and The Present. In The Distant Past category, the reports cover the period of time after the sinking of Atlantis and Lemuria, In The Near Past, the time frames that are examined are in the 17th and 18th Centuries and cover most of North America. In The Present--Part-1 category, the reports deal with events of the 20th Century and have additional geographical coverage of North America, including the eastern sea~ board, the midvest, the southwest and the Pacific coast region, Washington D.C. is visited and the Anerican political system is examined, Mexico and South Anerica are also covered. In The Present=-Part-2, the geographical areas covered are: Europe, England, France; and then to the Far East to Russia, Japan and China, You will notice, in some cases, where our Space Friends have used a past tense in making certain descriptions. We have no explanation for this, other than to presume that an observer at that time was looking from some future segment of time backwards. The data in these Galactic Survey Reports was current in the year 1959, when it was received, Its present value is in the insight and perception that it displays. Also, it gives additional insight into why the earth was perplexing to our Space Friends prior to "The Discov- exy"' by Soltee in the year 1970. Since that discovery, which is explained in detail in Solar Cross Tape # 13, (Chapter Seven, page 185), subsequent findings and trends are outlined and detailed in additional later Solar Cross Tapes and in certain of the Tensor Concepts. An interesting point: Certain items and dates, as well as archeo- logical finds mentioned in these reports, have still not been discovered by present-day scientists It is our pleasure to introduce The Galactic Survey Reports.CHAPTER SIX 149 THE DISTANT PAST: Greetings in the "Light" of Our Radiant One. I am Korton. You will find certain names mentioned in these accounts which may appear somewhat foreign to you. For the sake of brevity and speed, our commentator, in interpreting the reports, will use the name of the observer making the comments and pass on through the account in a rapid manner. You will be instructed what to do with this information after your study. Now, in the translation it is necessary to reduce it to your language concepts. Therefore, we will use a great many of your speech idiosyners- sies and ways of speaking. I would introduce to you at thi name of LaLur. time one of Voltra's staff by the LALUR: Lalur speaking. It is my privilege, my brothers, to speak with all of you. 1 shall read first the report of our preliminary contact with your planet, shortly after the event concerning your two continents, Atlantis and Lemuria, I shall quote these reports practically word for word. I ask that you bear with me. ‘The firet comments to come to your attention are those of one of our women attached to this particular survey mission. “this is so beautiful a planet," Bia wrote, "that I cannot describe it. Even in the spot of first landing which was badly selected, the colors on the mountains were spectacular -- yellow, red, grey. The rocks shine in the sun, and metals in the rocks glisten like a million tiny lights. It is a green continent, all shades of green, magnificent in its sweep, giving a sense of unlimited vastne "at the spot of first landing, we saw rolling meadows beyond the mountains, undulating in soft colors under pink and white clouds. We made our first landing in the dawn, before sunrise. Never have I seen anything 90 thrilling as earth's sunrise. An astonishing eerie drama symbolic of coming life, an overture to great deeds and excited activity. The dawn has a mood of freshness and of tremendous possibility, so that each new day must have been a daily inspiration for earth-dwellers. “Equally spectacular, and as indescribable as an earth drama, is the sunset. It is glorious, sad, yet triumphant; a climax in weny brilliant colors to a perfect day. One cannot behold it without feeling how it radiates satisfaction and happiness, inducing a mood of a day well spent and fully completed. With all the colors imaginable, the great orb sinks slowly over the western horizon in an esthetic benediction. What a privilege for earth-dwellers to witness such inspiring dramas of nature every day. “dite this daily experience is overvhelning, even nore thrilling to me was the night which is not completely dark, but Lit by a noble moon, a heavenly lantern rising out of the East, benign, soft, enchanting with its diffused light. I am sure hunans thought of the moon as a goddesi She is so independently feminine, She communicates a spiritual appeal, suggesting an influence which hovers over this lovely land beyond the

Star Wards - Welcome Home Earthman by Richard T. Miller

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Star Wards - Welcome Home Earthman by Richard T. Miller

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Potrebbero piacerti anche